t35 Manual

Title Page
GE Multilin
T35 Transformer Protection System

UR Series Instruction Manual
T35 Revision: 5.9x
Manual P/N: 1601-0114-W1 (GEK-113218)
Copyright 2011 GE Multilin
828742A2.CDR
E83849
RE
Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com
*1601-0114-W1*
ISO9001:2000
EM
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
GE Multilin
T
GIS ERE
U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management

System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Addendum
GE Multilin
ADDENDUM
This addendum contains information that relates to the T35 Transformer Protection System, version 5.9x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113218 (revision W1) but are not
included in the current T35 operations.
The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the T35 relay:
N/A.
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the T35 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S.
The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J 8L, 8M, 8N, 8R.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE
OLD
NEW
DESCRIPTION
CPU
9A
9E
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
9C
9G
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
9D
9H
RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
---
9J
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
---
9K
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
---
9L
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
---
9M
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
---
9N
RS485 and 10/100Base-T
---
9P
RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
---
9R
RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
---
9S
RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
8A
8F
Standard 4CT/4VT
8B
8G
Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT
8C
8H
Standard 8CT
8D
8J
Sensitive ground 8CT
CT/VT
--
8L
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
--
8M
Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
--
8N
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
--
8R
Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and
the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and
DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module,
the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1
1.1.2
CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1

INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2

HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5

INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5
CONFIGURING THE T35 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS .................................... 1-6
USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9
CONNECTING TO THE T35 RELAY ............................................................... 1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16

COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16
FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-16
1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17

MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-17
MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-17
RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-17
RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-18
FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18
COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-2
REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-6
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
3. HARDWARE
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-9

USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-10
MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-11
METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-11
INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-12
POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-13
OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-13
COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-14
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-16
ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-16
TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-17
PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-17
APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-18
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-18
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-6
REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-8
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
GE Multilin
TYPICAL WIRING............................................................................................ 3-10

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................................................... 3-11
CONTROL POWER ......................................................................................... 3-11
CT/VT MODULES ............................................................................................ 3-12
PROCESS BUS MODULES ............................................................................ 3-14
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ............................................................... 3-14
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-22

RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-23
CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-23
IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-27
3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-28
FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-30
FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-30
G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-31
RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-34
RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-36
G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-36
IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-37
C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-39
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-41
MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-41
MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-42
INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE...............................3-42
CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-46
UPLOADING T35 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE .........................................3-49
ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-51
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-4
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-5

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ................................4-9
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-11
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
5. SETTINGS
FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-14
LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-15
CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-18
DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-24
KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-24
BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-24
MENUS .............................................................................................................4-25
CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-27
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1

INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4
INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
vi
SECURITY..........................................................................................................5-8
DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..................................................................................5-12
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-14
COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-15
MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-38
REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-39
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-40
OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-41
DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-43
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-44
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-47
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-48
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
5.2.16
5.2.17
5.2.18
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 5-54
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-55
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-57
TELEPROTECTION......................................................................................... 5-65
INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-65
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

5.3.1
REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-68

POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-70
SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-71
TRANSFORMER ............................................................................................. 5-73
BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-84
DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-88
FLEXCURVES.............................................................................................. 5-91
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ............................................................... 5-98

FLEXLOGIC RULES .................................................................................. 5-105
FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-106
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-106
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS................................................................................. 5-106
FLEXELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 5-107
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-111
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-112
SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-112
TRANSFORMER ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-112
PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-118
GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-125
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-126
TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-126
SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-128
SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-129
DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-135
MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-137
5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.8.7
5.8.8
5.8.9
5.8.10
5.8.11
5.8.12
5.8.13
CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-143

VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-145
CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-146
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-148
REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-149
REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-150
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS .............................................. 5-151
REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-151
RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-152
DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................. 5-153
TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS.............................................. 5-156
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS...................................................................... 5-158
IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS..................................................................... 5-159
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-160

RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-161
DCMA OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-163
5.10 TESTING
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
GE Multilin
TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-166

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-167
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-168
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1
ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.2.13
6.2.14
6.2.15
6.2.16
6.2.17
6.2.18
CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-3

VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4
TELEPROTECTION INPUTS .............................................................................6-4
CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-4
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-5
REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-5
DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-6
SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-6
FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-6
ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-6
DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-7
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-7
IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-8
EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-8
TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS.............................................................6-9
ETHERNET SWITCH .........................................................................................6-9
6.3 METERING
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-10

TRANSFORMER ..............................................................................................6-13
SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14
TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-17
FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-17
IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-18
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS.................................................................6-18
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS .................................................6-19

EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-19
OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-19
DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-20
BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-20
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

6.5.1
6.5.2
7. COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-21

FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-21
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1

VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-2
SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-3
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
8. SECURITY
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
viii
TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-4

TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-4
RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-4
OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................8-1
PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ........................................................................8-2
LOCAL PASSWORDS........................................................................................8-2
REMOTE PASSWORDS ....................................................................................8-3
ACCESS SUPERVISION ...................................................................................8-3
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS........................................................8-4
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
SETTINGS TEMPLATES ................................................................................... 8-6

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10
SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
9. COMMISSIONING
OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 8-15
ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15
ADDING A NEW USER ................................................................................... 8-15
MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16
9.1 DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST

9.1.1
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST EXAMPLES

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 9-3
TEST EXAMPLE 1 ............................................................................................. 9-4
TEST EXAMPLE 2 ............................................................................................. 9-9
TEST EXAMPLE 3 ........................................................................................... 9-10
TEST EXAMPLE 4 ........................................................................................... 9-11
9.3 INRUSH INHIBIT TEST

9.3.1
INRUSH INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE ........................................................... 9-12
9.4 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST

9.4.1
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE ......................................... 9-13
9.5 COMMISSIONING TEST TABLES

9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINT TESTS.............................................................. 9-14

INRUSH INHIBIT TESTS ................................................................................. 9-14
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TESTS ............................................................... 9-15
A. FLEXANALOG AND
FLEXINTEGER
PARAMETERS
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
B. MODBUS
COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
A.1.1
A.1.2
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.1.4
FLEXANALOG ITEMS .......................................................................................A-1

FLEXINTEGER ITEMS ....................................................................................A-12
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1
PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1
DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1
CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2.1
B.2.2
B.2.3
B.2.4
B.2.5
B.2.6
SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3

READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3
EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4
STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4
STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.3.1
B.3.2
OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6

MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

B.4.1
B.4.2
GE Multilin
MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-8

DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-51
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C. IEC 61850
COMMUNICATIONS
C.1 OVERVIEW
C.1.1
C.1.2
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1

COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.2.6
C.2.7
OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-2

GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES ................................................................. C-2
GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES.............................................................. C-2
GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE
DATAC-2
GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES......................................... C-2
MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .......................................................... C-3
PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES............................................... C-3
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

C.3.1
C.3.2
C.3.3
C.3.4
C.3.5
C.3.6
C.3.7
C.3.8
C.3.9
BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING........................................................ C-5

FILE TRANSFER ............................................................................................... C-5
TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING ....................................................................... C-5
LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ................................................................................. C-5
LOCATION ........................................................................................................ C-5
LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES.................................................................. C-6
CONNECTION TIMING ..................................................................................... C-6
NON-IEC 61850 DATA ...................................................................................... C-6
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES..................................................... C-6
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.4.1
C.4.2
C.4.3
C.4.4
C.4.5
C.4.6
OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-7

GSSE CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. C-7
FIXED GOOSE .................................................................................................. C-7
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE ................................................................................ C-7
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE .......................................... C-9
GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................ C-10
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.5.1
C.5.2
C.5.3
C.5.4
C.5.5
C.5.6
OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... C-11

CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS .......................................................... C-12
ABOUT ICD FILES .......................................................................................... C-13
CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP.............................. C-17
ABOUT SCD FILES ......................................................................................... C-17
IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP........................... C-20
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.6.1
C.6.2
C.6.3
ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ................................................ C-22

ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................ C-22
ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ......................................... C-23
C.7 LOGICAL NODES

C.7.1
LOGICAL NODES TABLE ............................................................................... C-26
D. IEC 60870-5-104
COMMUNICATIONS
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
D.1.1
D.1.2
E.1.1
E.1.2
INTEROPERABILITY ........................................................................................ D-1

POINT LIST ....................................................................................................... D-9
DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1

IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.1
E.2.2
E.2.3
E.2.4
BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8

BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT...................................................... E-9
COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-10
ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-11
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F. MISCELLANEOUS
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1
F.1.2
REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1

CHANGES TO THE T35 MANUAL .................................................................... F-2
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................... F-10
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1
GE Multilin
GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................. F-12
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xii
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new GE Mutilin structured template.
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all NOTE, CAUTION and WARNING icons in this document
are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, or downtime.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1.
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
2.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
T35 Transformer Management Relay

GE Multilin
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEmultilin.com
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
T35H00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
828747A3
GEK-113279
MAZB98000029
D
2005/01/05
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
Made in
Canada
-
828751A1.CDR
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

3.
Ensure that the following items are included:

Instruction manual.
GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format).
Mounting screws.
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at
http://www.GEmultilin.com.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE:
FAX:
E-MAIL:
HOME PAGE:
GE Multilin
(905) 294-6222,
1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
(905) 201-2098
gemultilin@ge.com
http://www.GEmultilin.com
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3
milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements
CPU Module
Contact Inputs
Contact Outputs
Protective Elements
Pickup
Dropout
Output
Operate
Virtual Inputs
Analog Inputs
Output Elements
Input
CT Inputs
Status
VT Inputs
Table
Status
Logic Gates
Table
Virtual Outputs
Analog Outputs
Remote Outputs
-DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs
Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming
Device
Operator
Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic
operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP
DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent
completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control,
hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the T35 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture:
modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection,
transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This
results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5.
Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of
chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A
description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section
in chapter 5.
1-4
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the T35 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.
US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem

1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the T35 Transformer Protection System from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software
GE Multilin
1-5
1 GETTING STARTED
release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for
the T35.
6.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program.
7.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.
8.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
9.
Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.
1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE T35 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS

a) OVERVIEW
The user can connect remotely to the T35 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the
EnerVista UR Setup software. The T35 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232
port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
1-6
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
To configure the T35 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications
section.
To configure the T35 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications
section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering.
To configure the T35 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to the
Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ethernet
communications.
b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The
faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature
section for details on configuring the RS232 port.
A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction
manual for additional details.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or
online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 1 as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
Figure 14: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
1-7

9.
1 GETTING STARTED
Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMmenu in their respective fields.
MUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the T35 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to
the relay setting values.
11. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the T35 section to
begin communications.
c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 2 as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Figure 15: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
1-8
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
9.
Enter the relay IP address specified in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP
in the IP Address field.
ADDRESS)
10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the T35 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting
values.
12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the T35 section to
begin communications.
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE
a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT
Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port
with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
4.
Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
5.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named
Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the T35 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the T35. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the T35 model number.
b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS
To use the Quick Connect feature to access the T35 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay
from the front panel keyboard.
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed.
2.
Navigate to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting.
3.
Enter an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and select the ENTER key to save the value.
4.
In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting.
5.
Enter a subnet IP address of 255.0.0.0 and press the ENTER key to save the value.
GE Multilin
1-9
1 GETTING STARTED
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.
2
1
4 5 6
7
8
END 1
Pin
Wire color
1
White/orange
2
Orange
3
White/green
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Green
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
END 2
Pin
Wire color
1
White/green
2
Green
3
White/orange
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Orange
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Figure 16: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT

Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relays IP address.
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
1-10
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4.
Click on the Use the following IP address box.
5.
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the T35 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6.
Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the T35 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7.
Click OK to save the values.
Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection.

1.
Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing cmd.
2.
Type the following command:

C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3.
If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply
Reply
Reply
Reply
from
from
from
from
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
1.1.1.1:
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
TTL=255
TTL=255
TTL=255
TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4.
Note that the values for time and TTL will vary depending on local network configuration.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
GE Multilin
1-11
1 GETTING STARTED
Request
Request
Request
Request
timed
timed
timed
timed
out.
out.
out.
out.

Verify the physical connection between the T35 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
error.
error.
error.
error.

Verify the physical connection between the T35 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
Destination
Destination
Destination
Destination
host
host
host
host
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.

Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
suffix.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
:
: 0.0.0.0
: 0.0.0.0
:
.
.
.
.
:
: 1.1.1.2
: 255.0.0.0
:
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
C:\WINNT>
It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT).
1-12
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings
in Internet Explorer.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab.
3.
Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4.
Ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the T35 relay.
1.
Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or
2.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
3.
4.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
5.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the T35, then click Connect.
6.
The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named
Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the T35 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the T35. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the T35 model number.
When direct communications with the T35 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
GE Multilin
1-13

4.
1 GETTING STARTED
Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown below.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the T35 relay.
AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ethernet network.
Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series
relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code
options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to
identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.
1-14
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED

1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE T35 RELAY
1.
Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking

or selecting the +/ box.
Communications status indicators:

Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2.
The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
3.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the
using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several
functions that are often performed when using T35 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
View the T35 event record.
View the last recorded oscillography record.
View the status of all T35 inputs and outputs.
View all of the T35 metering values.
View the T35 protection summary.
GE Multilin
1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.
Figure 17: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the T35 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the T35 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the T35 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF)
as described in the chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
1-16
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
Actual values.
Settings.
Commands.
Targets.
User displays (when enabled).

1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
GE Multilin
1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate
Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer
to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup
software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations:
change state of virtual inputs
clear event records
clear oscillography records
operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION

FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1-18
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Commissioning tests are included in the Commissioning chapter of this manual.

The T35 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the T35 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore, the T35 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that T35 maintenance be scheduled
with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance:
1.
Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2.
Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3.
LED test.
4.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1.
Check wiring connections for firmness.
2.
Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3.
Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay
settings schedule).
4.
Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7.
LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:

1.
View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.
GE Multilin
1-19
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
1-20
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The T35 Transformer Protection System is a microprocessor-based relay intended for protecting small, medium, and large
three-phase power transformers involved in complicated power system configurations. The relay is available with two to six
banks of three-phase inputs: either CTs or CTs and VTs.
Typical T35 applications include:
Transformers with windings connected between two or more breakers.
Transformers with windings without associated breakers, where the only available ones are those on buses, lines, or
feeders.
The percent and instantaneous differential elements are the primary protection elements. The backup protection elements,
such as instantaneous overcurrent, can be expressed in fully configurable FlexElements. The relay can also be configured to protect transformers with any phase shift between the windings and handle up to 32 times the ratio mismatch (see
the phase and magnitude compensation descriptions in chapter 5).
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing
up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels,
with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIGB signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be
determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10Base-F Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10Base-F fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (T35 web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The T35 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
Table 21: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
50/87
Instantaneous Differential Overcurrent
51G
Ground Time Overcurrent
51P
Phase Time Overcurrent
87T
Transformer Differential
GE Multilin
2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Measure
3I_0
Measure
3I_0
2
Calculate
Restraint Amps
51G
Calculate
Operate Amps
Calculate
2nd, 5th harmonics
50/87
51P-1
51G
51P-2
87T
Metering
Transducer Input
FlexElementTM

828725A3.CDR
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current I2t
Event Recorder
Setting Groups (6)
Breaker Control
FlexElements (16)
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Contact Inputs (up to 96)
FlexLogic Equations
Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Contact Outputs (up to 64)
IEC 61850 Communications (optional)
Trip Bus
Control Pushbuttons
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power,

Power Factor, Frequency
User Definable Displays
Modbus Communications
User Programmable LEDs
Data Logger
Digital Counters
User-Programmable Fault Reports
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32)
Modbus User Map
User Programmable Pushbuttons
Disconnect Switches
Non-Volatile Latches
User Programmable Self-Tests
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Virtual Inputs (64)
Ethernet Global Data Protocol (optional)
Oscillography
Virtual Outputs (96)
2.1.2 ORDERING
a) OVERVIEW
The T35 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size () vertical unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.
Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information
required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning T35 ordering options.
NOTE
2-2
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regular CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.
b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 23: T35 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
T35
T35
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
S
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
CT/VT MODULES
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
A
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
H
L
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- M
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- P
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- U
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
|
|
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2S
2T
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
For Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F
No Software Options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
Horizontal (19 rack)
Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
Bi-phase, single channel
Bi-phase, dual channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 24: T35 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
T35
T35
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
F
D
R
A
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
L
CT/VT MODULES
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
2-4
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- M
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No Software Options
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
8 dcmA inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 25: T35 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT
CPU
T35
T35
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
PROCESS BUS MODULE
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
A
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
D
R
A
P
G
S
B
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
H
L
L
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- P
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- U
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
W/X
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RH
|
RL
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
For Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No Software Options
Horizontal (19 rack)
Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2-5
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 26: T35 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
T35
T35
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
*
|
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00
01
03
04
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
V
B
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
F
D
R
A
K
M
Q
U
L
N
T
V
* - F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
L
PROCESS BUS MODULE

INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
For the last module, slot P is used for digital
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
- H
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
P/R
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 and RS485
No Software Options
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
Chinese display
Eight-port digital process bus module
No Module
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2.1.3 REPLACEMENT MODULES

Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the T35 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are
available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://
www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning T35 ordering options.
NOTE
2-6
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 27: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply only available in horizontal units;
must be same type as main supply)
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
1H
1L
RH
RH
9E
9G
9H
9J
9K
9L
9M
9N
9S
3C
3D
3R
3A
3P
3G
3S
3B
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
2S
2T
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only)
redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC
redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
8 RTD inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
2-7
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.
Table 28: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CT/VT
MODULES
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
2-8
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
**
1H
1L
9E
9G
9H
9J
9K
9L
9M
9N
3F
3D
3R
3K
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
8F
8G
8H
8J
8L
8M
8N
8R
2A
2B
2E
2F
2G
2H
72
73
74
75
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
8 Form-C outputs
16 digital inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
8 RTD inputs
4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 dcmA inputs
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
NOTE
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Characteristic:
Principle:
accumulates breaker duty (I2t) and measures fault duration
Initiation:
programmable per phase from any FlexLogic operand
Differential Restraint pre-set
Number of zones:
Minimum pickup:
0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.001
Slope 1 range:
15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Slope 2 range:
50 to 100% in steps of 1%
Kneepoint 1:
1.0 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.0001
Kneepoint 2:
2.0 to 30.0 pu in steps of 0.0001
2nd harmonic inhibit level: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1

2
nd
harmonic inhibit function: Adaptive, Traditional, Disabled
2nd harmonic inhibit mode: Per-phase, 2-out-of-3, Average

th
Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

Alarm threshold:
0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle

Availability:
1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Thermal overload curves: IEC 255-8 curve
5 harmonic inhibit range: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Base current:
Operate times:
Overload (k) factor:
Harmonic inhibits selected: 20 to 30 ms at 60 Hz;

20 to 35 ms at 50 Hz
Trip time constant:
0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
Reset time constant:
No harmonic inhibits selected: 5 to 20 ms
Minimum reset time:
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.5% of reading or 1% of rated

(whichever is greater)
Timing accuracy (cold curve): 100 ms or 2%, whichever is

greater
INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
Timing accuracy (hot curve): 500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater

for Ip < 0.9 k Ib and I / (k Ib) > 1.1
Pickup level:
2.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Number of elements:
Level accuracy:
0.5% of reading or 1% of rated

Number of inputs:
16
Operate time:
<2 ms at 60 Hz
Operate time:
< 20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz
Time accuracy:
3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
PHASE/GROUND TOC
Current:
Phasor or RMS
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
97% to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy:
for 0.1 to 2.0 CT:
for > 2.0 CT:
0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated

1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating
Curve shapes:
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of

0.01
Reset type:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Timing accuracy:
Operate at > 1.03 actual pickup

3.5% of operate time or cycle
GE Multilin
2-9
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical

visualization (keypad programmable)
Number:
48 plus trip and alarm
Programmability:
from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

self-reset or latched
Lines of code:
512
Internal variables:
64
Reset mode:
Supported operations:
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2

to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
LED TEST
Inputs:
Number of timers:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual

input
32
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
4 (A through D)
Reset points:
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points:
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay:
from any digital input or user-programmable condition
Number of tests:
3, interruptible at any time
Duration of full test:
approximately 3 minutes
Test sequence 1:
all LEDs on
Test sequence 2:
all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3:
all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
FLEXCURVES
Number:
Initiation:
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number:
up to 256 logical variables grouped

under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual

input
Number of displays:
16
Lines of display:
2 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters:
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling:
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation:
drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate);
16 (enhanced faceplate)
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements:
16
Operating signal:
any analog actual value, or two values in

differential mode
Mode:
self-reset, latched
Display message:
2 lines of 20 characters each
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Drop-out timer:
0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Operating mode:
level, delta
Autoreset timer:
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Comparator direction:
over, under
Hold timer:
Pickup Level:
90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
SELECTOR SWITCH
Hysteresis:
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Number of elements:
Delta dt:
20 ms to 60 days
Upper position limit:
1 to 7 in steps of 1
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Selecting mode:
time-out or acknowledge
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Time-out timer:
Type:
set-dominant or reset-dominant
Control inputs:
step-up and 3-bit
Number:
16 (individually programmed)
Power-up mode:
Output:
stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence:
as input prior to protection, control, and

FlexLogic
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/

restore mode
2-10
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.3 MONITORING
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records:
64
Number of elements:
Sampling rate:
64 samples per power cycle
Pre-fault trigger:
any FlexLogic operand
Triggers:
any element pickup, dropout, or operate;

digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic equation
Fault trigger:
Recorder quantities:
32 (any FlexAnalog value)
AC input channels; element state; digital

input state; digital output state
Number of channels:
Parameters:
any available analog actual value
in non-volatile memory
Sampling rate:
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
Data:
Data storage:
EVENT RECORDER
DATA LOGGER
1 to 16
Trigger:

continuous or triggered
(NN is dependent on memory)
Capacity:
1024 events
Mode:
Time-tag:
to 1 microsecond
Storage capacity:
Triggers:
any element pickup, dropout, or operate;

digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events
Data storage:
in non-volatile memory
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 CT rating:
Accuracy:
> 2.0 CT rating:
0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated

1.0% of reading
APPARENT POWER (VA)

Accuracy:
0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:
REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy:
GE Multilin
1.0% of reading
FREQUENCY
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2
1.0% of reading at
0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:

I > 0.25 pu:
0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used

for frequency measurement)
0.05 Hz
0.001 Hz (when current signal is used
for frequency measurement)
2-11
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.5 INPUTS
DCMA INPUTS
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary:
1 to 50000 A
CT rated secondary:
1 A or 5 A by connection
Current input (mA DC):
0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,

0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Nominal frequency:
Relay burden:
20 to 65 Hz
Input impedance:
379 10%
< 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion range:
1 to + 20 mA DC
Accuracy:
0.2% of full scale
Type:
Passive
Conversion range:
Standard CT:
0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground CT module:
0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current withstand:
Short circuit rating:
20 ms at 250 times rated

1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated
150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250
V maximum (primary current to external
CT)
AC VOLTAGE
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire):
100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10

Copper
Sensing current:
5 mA
Range:
50 to +250C
Accuracy:
2C
Isolation:
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
VT rated secondary:
50.0 to 240.0 V
Amplitude modulation:
1 to 10 V pk-pk
VT ratio:
1.00 to 24000.00
DC shift:
TTL
Nominal frequency:
20 to 65 Hz
Input impedance:
22 k
Relay burden:
< 0.25 VA at 120 V
Isolation:
2 kV
Conversion range:
1 to 275 V
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Voltage withstand:
continuous at 260 V to neutral

1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
CONTACT INPUTS
Number of remote devices: 16

Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Dry contacts:
1000 maximum
Wet contacts:
300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds:
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance:
10%
Number of remote DPS inputs: 5
DIRECT INPUTS
Number of input points: 32
No. of remote devices:
16
Contacts per common return: 4
Recognition time:
< 1 ms
Ring configuration:
Debounce time:
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Data rate:
64 or 128 kbps
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
CRC:
32-bit
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
CRC alarm:
Responding to:
Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold:
Dry contacts:
1000 maximum
Wet contacts:
300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds:
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance:
10%
Contacts per common return: 2

Recognition time:
< 1 ms
Debounce time:
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Yes, No
Unreturned message alarm:

Responding to:
Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
configuration
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold:
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
TELEPROTECTION
Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA
Number of input points: 16
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms
No. of remote devices:

Ring configuration:
2-12
No
Data rate:
64 or 128 kbps
CRC:
32-bit
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
ALL RANGES
LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
24 to 48 V
Volt withstand:
2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Minimum DC voltage:
20 V
Power consumption:
Maximum DC voltage:
60 V
Voltage loss hold-up:
20 ms duration at nominal
typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
maximum = 50 W/VA
contact factory for exact order code consumption
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
INTERNAL FUSE
RATINGS
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
125 to 250 V
Minimum DC voltage:
88 V
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V

High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
Maximum DC voltage:
300 V
Nominal AC voltage:
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage:
88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage:
265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up:
200 ms duration at nominal
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC:
DC:
100 000 A RMS symmetrical

10 000 A
2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous:
Carry continuous:
6A
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
Operate time:
Contact material:
8A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

VOLTAGE
0.2 A
< 4 ms
silver alloy
CURRENT
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
< 8 ms
Contact material:
silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry:
Carry continuous:
6A
Minimum load impedance:
Break at L/R of 40 ms:
0.25 A DC max.
INPUT
VOLTAGE
0.1 A max. (resistive load)

IMPEDANCE
Operate time:
< 4 ms
2 W RESISTOR
1 W RESISTOR
Contact material:
silver alloy
250 V DC
20 K
50 K
Control:
separate operate and reset inputs
120 V DC
5 K
2 K
Control mode:
operate-dominant or reset-dominant
48 V DC
2 K
2 K
24 V DC
2 K
2 K
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage:
approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current:
approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Threshold current:
GE Multilin
approx. 80 to 100 mA
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a

required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time:
< 0.6 ms
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W
2-13
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Operate and release time: <100 s
Output points:
Maximum voltage:
DCMA OUTPUTS
265 V DC
32
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C
Range:
1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Make and carry:

for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s
Max. load resistance:
12 k for 1 to 1 mA range
12 k for 0 to 1 mA range
600 for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy:
0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range

30 A as per ANSI C37.90

300 A
Breaking capacity:
UL508
Operations/
interval
5000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
1000 ops /
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
Break
capability
(0 to 250 V
DC)
Utility
application
(autoreclose
scheme)
5 ops /
0.2 s-On,
0.2 s-Off
within 1
minute
Industrial
application
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms

10000 ops /
0.2 s-On,
30 s-Off
3.2 A
L/R = 10 ms
1.6 A
L/R = 20 ms
1.5 kV
Driving signal:
any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of

0.001
ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)

10 A
L/R = 40 ms
10 A
L/R = 40 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude:
Isolation:
Nominal DC voltage:
110 to 240 V DC
Minimum DC voltage:
88 V DC
Maximum DC voltage:
300 V DC
Input Current:
0.9 A DC maximum
Nominal AC voltage:
100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39

VA at 50/60 Hz
10 V peak-peak RS485 level
Maximum load:
100 ohms
Minimum AC voltage:
85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz
Time delay:
1 ms for AM input
40 s for DC-shift input
Maximum AC voltage:
265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz
Internal fuse:
3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 003
Isolation:
2 kV
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Capacity:
100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation:
300 Vpk
ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)

Nominal voltage:
48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W
Minimum voltage:
30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Maximum voltage:
60 V DC
Standard output points: 32
Internal fuse:
5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
SCD-A 005
User output points:
32
RS232
Front port:
ETHERNET (FIBER)
19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU
PARAMETER
RS485
FIBER TYPE
10MB MULTIMODE
1 or 2 rear ports:
Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated

together at 36 Vpk
Wavelength
Typical distance:
1200 m
Connector
Isolation:
2 kV
100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLEMODE

MODE
820 nm
1310 nm
ST
ST
SC
Transmit power
20 dBm
20 dBm
15 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
30 dBm
30 dBm
30 dBm
10 dB
10 dB
15 dB
Maximum input
power
7.6 dBm
14 dBm
7 dBm
Typical distance
1.65 km
2 km
15 km
Duplex
full/half
full/half
full/half
yes
yes
yes
Power budget
Redundancy
1310 nm
The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode
2-14
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)
ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS
Modes:
10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector type:
Connector:
RJ45
MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS
RJ45
Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.)

Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
Maximum fiber segment length calculation:

The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent
switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each
device using the manufacturers data sheets.
10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.)
100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.)

Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
OPB = P T ( MIN ) P R ( MIN )

where OPB = optical power budget, PT = transmitter output power,
and PR = receiver sensitivity.
The worst case optical power budget (OPBWORST) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion
loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example,
with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a
minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber
paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction:
Total insertion loss = number of connectors 0.5 dB
= 2 0.5 dB = 1.0 dB
The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S
modules using a single fiber cable is:
OPB WORST = OPB 1 dB (LED aging) total insertion loss
10dB 1dB 1dB = 8dB
To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical
attenuation for 62.5/125 m glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length:
OPB WORST (in dB)
Maximum fiber length = -----------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km)
8 dB
= --------------------------- = 2.8km
2.8 dB/km
The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber
length.
GE Multilin
2-15
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE
TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422
1200 m
G.703
100 m
2
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power

and does not take into consideration the clock
source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER,
FIBER TYPE
TRANSMIT
POWER
RECEIVED
SENSITIVITY
POWER
BUDGET
820 nm LED,
Multimode
20 dBm
30 dBm
10 dB
1300 nm LED,
Multimode
21 dBm
30 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm ELED,
Singlemode
23 dBm
32 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm Laser,
Singlemode
1 dBm
30 dBm
29 dB
1550 nm Laser,
Singlemode
+5 dBm
30 dBm
35 dB
NOTE
NOTE
These power budgets are calculated from the

manufacturers worst-case transmitter power
and worst case receiver sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter
power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will
deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5C.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE
MAX. OPTICAL
INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, Multimode
7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode
11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode
14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode
14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode
14 dBm
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE
CABLE
TYPE
CONNECTOR
TYPE
TYPICAL
DISTANCE
820 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 m
ST
1.65 km
1300 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 m
ST
3.8 km
1300 nm ELED,
single mode
9/125 m
ST
11.4 km
1300 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 m
ST
64 km
1550 nm Laser,
single-mode
9/125 m
ST
105 km
NOTE
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As
actual losses will vary from one installation to
another, the distance covered by your system
may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector
2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode
3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode
1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode
0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode
0.25 dB/km
Splice losses:
One splice every 2 km,

at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
OTHER
Storage temperature:
Altitude:
2000 m (maximum)
Pollution degree:
II
Overvoltage category:
II
Ingress protection:
IP20 front, IP10 back
40 to 85C
Operating temperature: 40 to 60C; the LCD contrast may be

impaired at temperatures less than
20C
HUMIDITY
Humidity:
2-16
operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at

55C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1,
6days).
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
T35 TYPE TESTS

TEST
REFERENCE STANDARD
TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand
EN60255-5
2.2 kV
Impulse voltage withstand
EN60255-5
5 kV
Damped oscillatory
IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic discharge
EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2
Level 3
RF immunity
EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3
Level 3
Fast transient disturbance
EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4
Class A and B
Surge immunity
EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5
Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity
EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6
Level 3
Power frequency immunity
EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7
Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC
IEC60255-11
12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions
CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock and bump
IEC60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic
IEC60255-21-3
Class 1
Power magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-8
Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-9
Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity
IEC61000-4-10
Level 4
0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Voltage dip and interruption
IEC61000-4-11
Damped oscillatory
IEC61000-4-12
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz
IEC61000-4-16
Level 4
Voltage ripple
IEC61000-4-17
15% ripple
Ingress protection
IEC60529
IP40 front, IP10 back
Cold
IEC60068-2-1
40C for 16 hours
Hot
IEC60068-2-2
85C for 16 hours
Humidity
IEC60068-2-30
6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety
UL508
e83849 NKCR
Safety
UL C22.2-14
e83849 NKCR7
Safety
UL1053
e83849 NKCR
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS

THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
GE Multilin
2-17
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE
APPLICABLE
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
ACCORDING TO
CE compliance
Low voltage directive
EN60255-5
EMC directive
EN60255-26 / EN50263
EN61000-6-5
North America
---
UL508
---
UL1053
---
C22.2 No. 14
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
CLEANING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds)

of torque.
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust

has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
NOTE
2-18
Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be

powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to
avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
The T35 Transformer Protection System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains
additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
11.016
[279,81 mm]
9.687
[246,05 mm]
17.56
[446,02 mm]
7.460
[189,48 mm]
6.995
[177,67 mm]
6.960
[176,78 mm]
19.040
[483,62 mm]
842807A1.CDR
Figure 31: T35 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-1
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
18.370
[466,60 mm]
0.280
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
4.000
[101,60 mm]
17.750
[450,85 mm]
842808A1.CDR
Figure 32: T35 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
Figure 33: T35 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

b) VERTICAL UNITS
The T35 Transformer Protection System is available as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate.
The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains
additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
3-2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
11.015
7.482
15.000
1.329
14.025
13.560
4.000
9.780
843809A1.CDR
Figure 34: T35 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
UR SERIES
Figure 35: T35 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

For details on side mounting T35 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online
from the GE Multilin website.
GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions.
GEK-113181: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device.
GEK-113182: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series
device.
For details on side mounting T35 devices with the standard front panel, refer to the figures below.
3-4
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 36: T35 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-5
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
Figure 37: T35 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows
for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens
completely and allows easy access to all modules in the T35.
3-6
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
842812A1.CDR
Figure 38: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown
below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 39: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current
input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.
When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-7
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
The 4.0x release of the T35 relay includes new hardware modules.The new CPU modules are specified with codes
9E and higher. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the codes 8F and higher.
NOTE
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.:
Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the
CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input and output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are
only compatible with the new hardware modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older hardware modules.
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
GE Multilin
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
Made in
Canada
http://www.GEIndustrial.com/Multilin
R
c
P
b
N
c
M
b
T35H00HCHF8FH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
ZZZZZZ
D
MAZB98000029
D
1998/01/05
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
RATINGS:
J
c
H
b
G
c
F
b
Tx1
2
3
Tx2
IN
OUT
Optional
direct
input/output
module
Rx1
CH1
Tx
Rx
CH2
Tx2
Optional
Ethernet
switch
Optional
Optional
contact
CT/VT or
input/output
contact
module
input/output
module
Optional
contact
input/output
module
CT/VT
module
CPU module
(Ethernet not
available when
ordered with
Ethernet switch)
2
3
4
5
6
Tx2
CH2
Rx2
Tx1
a
1
Rx1
Tx1
b
1
CH1
Rx2
Power
supply
module
828746A3.CDR
Figure 310: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
3-8
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 311: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS
GE Multilin
3-9
F6a
F5c
VA
F5a
VA
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED
GROUND BUS
BNC
com
com
Co-axial
D1b
D2b
D3b
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
IRIG-B
output
IRIG-B
input
RS485
COM 2
RS485
COM 1
SURGE
FILTER
CONTROL
POWER
48 V DC
OUTPUT
CRITICAL
FAILURE
SURGE
H8b
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5a MED
B5b HI
B6b LO
B6a
B8a
B8b
CONTACT INPUT H7a

CONTACT INPUT H7c
CONTACT INPUT H8a
CONTACT INPUT H8c
COMMON H7b
H7a
H7c
H8a
H8c
H7b
BNC
No. 10AWG
minimum
F6c
VB
Co-axial
Co-axial *
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input

only use one
terminal as input
Ground at
remote
device
AC or DC
( DC ONLY )
Shielded
twisted pairs
F7a
VB
VOLTAGE INPUTS
F7c
VC
VC
1
POWER SUPPLY
F7c
VC
F7a
VC
F6c
VB
F6a
VB
F5c
VA
F5a
VA
CONTACTS SHOWN
WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
F3a
F2c
IB1
F1c
IA1
CURRENT INPUTS
F2a
IB5
F1b
IA
F1a
IA5
8F/ 8G
F2b
IB
F8a
VX
VOLTAGE INPUTS
F8c
VX
F3b
IC
IC5
6D
F3c
6
Inputs/
outputs
*
V
T
S
N
L
K
6
Inputs/
outputs
CT
(Rear view)
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
6
Inputs/
outputs
*
9
CPU
D
8
WINDING 1
CT/VT
M1b
IA
M2a
M1a
IA5
6C
M6a
IB5
M5c
IA1
M3a
M2c
IB1
(front)
DB-9
TC 2
TC 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
8
3 RXD
2 TXD
20
7 SGND
6
4
5
22
COMPUTER
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
SGND
TXD
RXD
This diagram is based on the following order code:

T35-E00-HCL-F8F-H6H-M8H-P6C-U6D-WXX
This diagram provides an example of how the device
is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please
refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on
wiring based on various configurations.
828747A5.CDR
RS-232
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1a
H1b
H1c
H2a
H2b
H2c
H3a
H3b
H3c
H4a
H4b
H4c
H5a
H5b
H5c
H6a
H6b
H6c
A
B
C
A
B
C
VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
Power
supply
M4b
IG
TRANSFORMER MANAGEMENT RELAY
M6b
IB
M6c
IB1
H1
M7a
IC5
6H
M7b
IC
WINDING 2
WINDING 3
B
T35
M3b
IC5
GE Consumer & Industrial

Multilin
M5a
CURRENT INPUTS
8H / 8J
M8a
(5 amp CTs)
M7c
IC1
(5 amp CTs)
3.2WIRING
* Optional
CONTACT INPUT U1a

CONTACT INPUT U1c
CONTACT INPUT U2a
CONTACT INPUT U2c
COMMON U1b
DC
A
B
C
9E
CPU
F4a
IC1
U1a
U1c
U2a
U2c
U1b
M8b
IG
IG5
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
P1
F4b
CONTACT INPUT U3a

CONTACT INPUT U3c
CONTACT INPUT U4a
CONTACT INPUT U4c
COMMON U3b
M1c
IA1
P2
IG5
U3a
U3c
U4a
U4c
U3b
M2b
IB
IB5
P3
F4c
CONTACT INPUT U5a

CONTACT INPUT U5c
CONTACT INPUT U6a
CONTACT INPUT U6c
COMMON U5b
M3c
IC
P4
IG
U5a
U5c
U6a
U6c
U5b
M4a
IC1
P5
IG1
CONTACT INPUT U7a

CONTACT INPUT U7c
CONTACT INPUT U8a
CONTACT INPUT U8c
COMMON U7b
SURGE
U7a
U7c
U8a
U8c
U7b
U8b
M4c
IG1
P7
IG5
P6
M5b
IA
IA5
P8
M8c
IG1
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE

P1a
P1b
P1c
P2a
P2b
P2c
P3a
P3b
P3c
P4a
P4b
P4c
P5a
P5b
P5c
P6a
P6b
P6c
P7a
P7b
P7c
P8a
P8b
P8c
VOLTAGE AND
CURRENT SUPERVISION
3-10
I
3
I
OPEN DELTA
VT CONNECTION (ABC)
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
Figure 312: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE
TYPE
MODULE FUNCTION
TERMINALS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
(AC)
FROM
TO
Power supply
High (+); Low (+); ()
Chassis
Power supply
48 V DC (+) and ()
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
Power supply
Relay terminals
Chassis
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
Analog inputs/outputs
All except 8b
Chassis
< 50 V DC
Digital inputs/outputs
All
Chassis
G.703
All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
RS422
All except 6a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
< 50 V DC
CT/VT
All
Chassis
CPU
All
Chassis
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage
transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can
be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CAUTION
NOTE
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR!
The T35 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well
known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be
avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each
range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifications section of chapter 2 for additional details):
Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.
High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is
applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks
detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
For high reliability systems, the T35 has a redundant option in which two T35 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay
of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.
GE Multilin
3-11
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION
POWER SUPPLY
CONTINUOUS ON
OK
ON / OFF CYCLING
Failure
OFF
Failure
NOTE:
14 gauge stranded
wire with suitable
disconnect devices
is recommended.
AC or DC
AC or DC
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b

FILTER SURGE
Switchgear
ground bus
LOW
HIGH
CONTROL
POWER
GND
Heavy copper conductor

or braided wire
OPTIONAL
ETHERNET SWITCH
UR-series
protection system
827759AA.CDR
Figure 313: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1
and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended
for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of
the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
CAUTION
CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to
50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is
ten times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase
VT inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware
failure and take the relay out of service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
3-12
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
UNSHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side
Source
B
C
SHIELDED CABLE
Stress cone
shields
Source
Ground
outside CT
3
LOAD
LOAD
To ground;
must be on
load side
996630A5
Figure 314: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.
Substitute the tilde ~ symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
~ 8c
VX
~ 8a
~ 7c
VC
VX
~ 7b
~ 7c
IC
IC1
~ 7a
~ 6c
VB
VC
~ 6a
~ 5c
VA
VB
~ 4c
~ 5a
VA
IG1
~ 4b
IG
~ 4a
~ 3c
IC1
IG5
~ 3a
~ 3b
IC
IC5
IB
~ 2c
~ 2a
~ 2b
IB5
IB1
~ 1b
~ 1c
IA1
~ 1a
IA
IA5
NOTE
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
IG5
IG
IG1
~ 6c
~ 7a
IB1
IB
IC5
~ 6a
~ 6b
IB5
~ 5b
~ 5c
IA
~ 5a
IA5
IA1
~ 4b
~ 4c
IG
IG1
~ 3c
IC1
~ 4a
~ 3b
IC
IG5
~ 2c
~ 3a
IB1
~ 2b
IB
IC5
~ 1c
~ 2a
IA1
~ 1b
IA
IB5
~ 1a
IA5
Current inputs
Voltage inputs
8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
842766A3.CDR
Figure 315: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
GE Multilin
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
The T35 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin
HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units,
known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic, metering, and communications.
The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits.
Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using
the T35 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations.
Integrates seamlessly with existing T35 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules.
Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.
For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight
rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs,
the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A
output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The T35 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common
return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used.
The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs
sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D
module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open,
and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On =
1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about
80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be
used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow.
Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current
monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.
3-14
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
~#a
~#a
I
If Idc 1mA, Cont Op 1 = VOn
otherwise Cont Op 1 = VOff
~#b
~#c
Voltage monitoring only
~#a
V
If Idc 80mA, Cont Op 1 = IOn
otherwise Cont Op 1 = IOff

V
~#b
Both voltage and current monitoring
~#a
Load
Load
~#c
a) Voltage with optional

current monitoring

I
~#b

~#b
Load
~#c
Load
~#c
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring
Current monitoring only
Both voltage and current monitoring

(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
Load
~#c
c) No monitoring
+
827862A3.CDR
Figure 316: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON,
CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command.
WARNING
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to
be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels!
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input
impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as
an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the formA contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is
used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A
contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number
sign # appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of
the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the
region of the pickup value).
GE Multilin
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
Table 32: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS
~6A MODULE
~6B MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-C
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6E MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6F MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6G MODULE
~6H MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Fast Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Fast Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Fast Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Fast Form-C
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6K MODULE
~6L MODULE
~6M MODULE
~6N MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6P MODULE
~6R MODULE
~6S MODULE
~6T MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
3-16
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
~6U MODULE
~6V MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~67 MODULE
~4A MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Not Used
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Solid-State
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Not Used
~4
Form-A
~4
2 Outputs
~4
Form-A
~4
Solid-State
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~5
Not Used
Solid-State
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-A
~7
Not Used
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-A
~8
Solid-State
3
~4B MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~4C MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~4L MODULE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~1
2 Outputs
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~2
2 Outputs
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~3
2 Outputs
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~4
2 Outputs
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
2 Outputs
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
2 Outputs
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
2 Outputs
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Not Used
GE Multilin
OUTPUT
~4D MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
3-17
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
842762A2.CDR
Figure 317: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
3-18
GE Multilin
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 8c
~1
3.2 WIRING
6K
3 HARDWARE
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6L
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6M
~1
~2
~4
~5
~6
~6
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
DIGITAL I/O
~8
V
I
~3
~5
~7
V
I
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6N
~1
~2
~3
~4
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6P
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6R
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6S
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 5a
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6c
~ 5b
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
6T
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~5
~6
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8b
SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
6U
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
V
I
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 6c
842763A2.CDR
Figure 318: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
3-19
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
CONTACT INPUTS:
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source
must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage
for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
DIGITAL I/O
~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 8c + CONTACT IN
~ 7b COMMON
~ 8b
6B
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
SURGE
B 1b
CRITICAL
B 1a
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a 48 VDC
OUTPUT
B 3b +
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a B 8a
SURGE
B 8b
FILTER
(Wet)
24-250V
DIGITAL I/O
6B
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b
SURGE
(Dry)
POWER SUPPLY
827741A4.CDR
Figure 319: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current
monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We
recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
3-20
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface
of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current
50 to 70 mA
3
3 mA
time
25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR
Figure 320: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to
50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts
when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input
and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON



842751A1.CDR
Figure 321: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish
functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-21
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure
virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Figure 322: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING
3-22
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the T35 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to
use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the
RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 323: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION

3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the T35 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module.
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE
Table 33: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

CPU TYPE
COM1
COM2
9E
RS485
RS485
9G
10Base-F and 10Base-T
RS485
9H
Redundant 10Base-F
RS485
9J
100Base-FX
RS485
9K
Redundant 100Base-FX
RS485
9L
100Base-FX
RS485
9M
Redundant 100Base-FX
RS485
GE Multilin
3-23
BNC
Co-axial cable
BNC
9E
Ground at
remote
device
IRIG-B
input
Shielded twisted-pairs
Ground at
remote
device
10Base-FL
NORMAL
10Base-T
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
COMMON
BNC
Co-axial cable
BNC
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
IRIG-B output
Tx2
Shielded
twisted-pairs
Ground at
remote
device
Rx1
10Base-FL
Rx2 10Base-F
NORMAL
ALTERNATE
10Base-T
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
COMMON
BNC
Co-axial cable
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
COMMON
BNC
SM fiber
optic cable
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1
IRIG-B output
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
IRIG-B output
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1
COMMON
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
Co-axial cable
IRIG-B
input
IRIG-B output
IRIG-B
input
BNC
BNC
BNC
RS485
COM2
Co-axial cable
Ground at
remote
device
RS485
COM2
COMMON
BNC
Co-axial cable
COM1
9H
Tx1
Ground at
remote
device
Co-axial cable
MM fiber
optic cable
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
BNC
COM1
9G
Rx1
ALTERNATE
Co-axial cable
BNC
IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
Rx1
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
Ground at
remote
device
COMMON
BNC
Ground at
remote
device
IRIG-B
input
Co-axial cable
BNC
SM fiber optic cable
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
100Base-FL
NORMAL
100Base-F
ALTERNATE
COMMON
BNC
BNC
Co-axial cable
RS485
COM2
IRIG-B
input
IRIG-B output
CPU
Tx1
9J
MM fiber
optic cable
COM1
9M
Co-axial cable
CPU
Tx1
NORMAL
100Base-F
Co-axial cable
IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
MM fiber
optic cable
100Base-FL
Rx2
CPU
RS485
COM2
Rx1
9S
COMMON
Tx2
9L
Tx1
CPU
COMMON
RS485
COM1
CPU
CPU
Ground at
remote
device
MM fiber optic cable
D1b
D2b
D3b
D1a
D2a
D3a
D4b
D4a
CPU
COM1
9K
3 HARDWARE
CPU
3.2 WIRING
842765A7.CDR
Figure 324: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485
terminals connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared
3-24
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
reference, or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the
shield (drain wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the T35 COM terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the common wire is connected to the T35 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to
be grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding
point. Each relay should also be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible
to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Star or stub connections should
be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
Figure 325: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-25
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode
and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K,
9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and
receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is
designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter, 62.5 m for 100 Mbps.
For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers,
the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3-26
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
RELAY
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
4B
IRIG-B(+)
4A
IRIG-B(-)
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE

+
3
RECEIVER
BNC (IN)
BNC (OUT)
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
REPEATER
827756A5.CDR
Figure 326: IRIG-B CONNECTION

The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal
even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 327: IRIG-B REPEATER

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-27
3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The T35 direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are
also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input and output feature uses the
communications channels provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is
available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four
UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx
to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
UR #1
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 328: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION

The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a
redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required
connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first
ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second
ring.
Tx1
UR #1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #3
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #4
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
842007A1.CDR
Figure 329: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION

The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to crossover from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
3-28
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
UR #1
Tx
Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Channel #2
UR #3
Tx
Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 330: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION
The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
Not all the direct input and output communications modules may be applicable to the T35 relay. Only the modules
specified in the order codes are available as direct input and output communications modules.
NOTE
Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 1 of 2)

MODULE
SPECIFICATION
2A
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B
C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2E
Bi-phase, 1 channel
2F
Bi-phase, 2 channel
2G
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
2H
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
2S
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply
2T
Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply
72
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
73
1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels
74
Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
75
Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
76
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
77
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7A
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7B
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7C
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
7D
1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
7E
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
7F
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G
Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7I
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7J
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
7K
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
7L
Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
GE Multilin
3-29
3 HARDWARE
Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 2 of 2)
MODULE
SPECIFICATION
7N
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P
Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7Q
Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7R
G.703, 1 channel
7S
G.703, 2 channels
7T
RS422, 1 channel
7V
RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs
7W
RS422, 2 channels
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module:
Connection Location:
7A / 7B / 7C
7H / 7I / 7J
Slot X
Slot X
RX1
RX1
TX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 331: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES

3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module:
72/ 7D
73/ 7K
Connection Location:
Slot X
Slot X
TX1
TX1
RX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 332: LASER FIBER MODULES

When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING
3-30
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O DIRECT I/O DATA RATE
setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a
or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Inter-relay communications
7S
Shield
G.703
channel 1
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
Shield
G.703
channel 2
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
842773A2.CDR
Figure 333: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
COMM.
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
7S
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx +
COMM.
7S
Shld.
SURGE
831727A3.CDR
Figure 334: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES
NOTE
Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and
B is equivalent to .
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1.
Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module,
must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control
power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that
the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
GE Multilin
3-31

6.
3 HARDWARE
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 335: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

Table 35: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES
FUNCTION
S1
OFF octet timing disabled

ON octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode

S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING

If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting
to higher order systems. When T35s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off).
d) G.703 TIMING MODES
There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in
the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
3-32
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
842752A1.CDR
e) G.703 TEST MODES

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842774A1.CDR
Figure 336: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842775A1.CDR
Figure 337: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE
GE Multilin
3-33
3 HARDWARE
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is
recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.
Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module
Dual-channel RS422 module
RS422
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
~ indicates the slot position
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 5b
~ 5a
~ 4a
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
7W
Rx
RS422
channel 1
Shield
Tx
Rx
Tx +
Rx +
RS422
channel 2
Shield
Clock
COM
Surge
Inter-relay communications
Tx
7T
~ 3b
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 4b
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8b
~ 2b
~ 8a
Inter-relay comms.
842776A3.CDR
Figure 338: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 339: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES

b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS
The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion
observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications,
certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a
common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion.
In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2.
By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single
clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads
on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
3-34
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Data module 1
Signal name
7W
Tx1(+)
Tx1(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+)
Rx1(-)
Shld.
+
CLOCK
Tx2(+)
Tx2(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+)
Rx2(-)
Shld.
com
SURGE
W 2a
W 3b
W 4b
W 3a
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 4a
W 5b
W 6b
W 5a
W 7b
W 2b
W 8a
SD(A) - Send data

SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive timing
RT(B) - Receive timing
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Figure 340: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data module 1 provides timing to the T35 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSMIT TIMING
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the
positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 341: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS

d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
GE Multilin
3-35
3 HARDWARE
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed
via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
Tx2
Clock
(channel 1)
COM
Tx1 +
Rx1
Tx1
Rx1 +
RS422
channel 1
Shield
Rx2
~ 8a
Fiber
channel 2
Surge
Inter-relay comms.
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4b
~ 6a
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74
WARNING
842777A1.CDR
Figure 342: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to
pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
Shield
Tx
Rx
Tx +
G.703
channel 1
Rx +
Surge
Tx2
Rx2
Fiber
channel 2
7E, 7F, 7G,

Inter-relay
communications
7Q,75
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum
optical input power to the receiver.
842778A1.CDR
Figure 343: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
3-36
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with
IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and
output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either
64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union
(ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at
a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:.
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules).
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber.
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode.
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km.
Fiber optic connector: type ST.
Wavelength: 830 40 nm.
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
GE Multilin
3-37
3 HARDWARE
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76 or 77 module):

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2.
3.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
6.
Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 344: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-38
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode
fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for
synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps).
Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber.
Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver.
Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km.
Fiber optic connector: type ST.
Wavelength: 1300 40 nm.
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The
functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
GE Multilin
3-39
3 HARDWARE
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2.
3.
4.
Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
6.
Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 345: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-40
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3.4.1 OVERVIEW
The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the T35 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as
the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST
100Base-FX ports.
NOTE
The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the T35. Otherwise, the switch
module will not be detected on power up and the EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX self-test warning will be
issued.
3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE
The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX
external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the
front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open).
The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table.
Table 36: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT
PIN
SIGNAL
CD
DESCRIPTION
Carrier detect (not used)
RXD
Receive data (input)
TXD
Transmit data (output)
N/A
Not used
GND
Signal ground
6 to 9
N/A
Not used
Two 10/100Base-T
ports
Four 100Base-FX
multimode ports
with ST connectors
RS232
console port
Independent power
supply. Options:
2S: high-voltage
2T: low-voltage
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842867A2.CDR
Figure 346: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE
GE Multilin
3-41
3 HARDWARE
Tx1
Tx2
Tx1
Tx1
Rx1
100Base-FX
Rx2
100Base-FX
Rx1
100Base-FX
Rx1
100Base-FX
100Base-T cable
10/100Base-T
100Base-T cable
10/100Base-T
110 to 250 V DC
100 to 240 V AC
+
W1a
W2b
W1a GROUND
Fiber
ports
Copper
ports
Power supply
CPU
2S / 2T
The wiring for the managed Ethernet switch module is shown below.
842835A1.CDR
Figure 347: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE WIRING

3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS
The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status.
The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX
ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.
Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
842868A2.CDR
Figure 348: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS

3.4.4 INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE
a) DESCRIPTION
Upon initial power up of a T35 device with an installed Ethernet switch, the front panel trouble LED will be illuminated and
the ENET MODULE OFFLINE error message will be displayed. It will be necessary to configure the Ethernet switch and then
place it online. This involves two steps:
1.
Configuring the network settings on the local PC.
2.
Configuring the T35 switch module through EnerVista UR Setup.
These procedures are described in the following sections. When the T35 is properly configured, the LED will be off and the
error message will be cleared.
3-42
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
b) CONFIGURING LAN COMMUNICATIONS

The following procedure describes how to initially configure the Ethernet switch to work on your LAN.
1.
Initiate communications from a PC to the T35 through a front panel serial connection (refer to the Configuring serial
communications section in chapter 1 for details), or if you are familiar with the UR keypad you can use it to set up the
network IP address and check the Modbus slave address and Modbus TCP port.
2.
Ensure that the PC and the T35 are on the same IP network.
If your computer is on another network or has a dynamic IP address assigned upon a network login, then setup your
own IP address as follows
2.1.
From the Windows Start Menu, select the Settings > Network Connections menu item.
2.2.
Right-click on the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item. This will open the LAN properties window.
2.3.
Click the Properties button as shown below.
Click the Properties button
827790A1.CDR
GE Multilin
3-43

2.4.
3 HARDWARE
The following window is displayed. Select the Use the Following IP Address option and enter appropriate IP
address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway values. It may be necessary to contact your network administrator for assistance.
Click here to setup IP

address
827803A1.CDR
2.5.
Save the settings by clicking the OK button.
2.6.
Click the Close button to exit the LAN properties window.
3.
Connect your PC to port 1 or port 2 of the Ethernet switch module (with an RJ-45 CAT5 cable).
4.
Verify that the two LEDs beside the connected port turn green.
5.
After few seconds you should see your local area connection attempting to connect to the switch. Once connected,
check your IP address by going to bottom of your screen and right-clicking the Local Area Connection icon as shown
below.
3-44
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Alternately, you can open a command window (type cmd from the Run item in the Start menu) and enter the ipconfig
command.
3
6.
Now that the PC should be able to communicate to the UR relay through the UR Setup software.
c) INITIAL ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE SETUP

This procedure describes how to configure the T35 switch module through EnerVista UR Setup. Before starting this procedure, ensure that the local PC is properly configured on the same network as the T35 device as shown in the previous section.
1.
Launch the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2.
Click the Device Setup button.
3.
Click the Add Site button. This will launch the Device Setup window.
4.
Set the Interface option to Ethernet and enter the IP Address, Slave Address, and Modbus Port values as shown
below.
New site
Old site
Interface is Ethernet now
Make sure these settings

are correct
827804A1.CDR
5.
Click the Read Order Code button. You should be able to communicate with the T35 device regardless of the value of
the Ethernet switch IP address and even though the front panel display states that the Ethernet module is offline.
GE Multilin
3-45
3 HARDWARE
6.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item as shown
below.
7.
Enter (or verify) the MAC Address, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address settings.
8.
Click the Save button. It will take few seconds to save the settings to the Ethernet switch module and the following
message displayed.
9.
Verify that the target message is cleared and that the T35 displays the MAC address of the Ethernet switch in the
Actual Values > Status > Ethernet Switch window.
The T35 device and the Ethernet switch module communications setup is now complete.
3.4.5 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE
A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The
Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified.
Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
CAUTION
3-46
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS

In our example configuration of both the Switchs IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and
255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista
UR Setup software, the Switchs Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI.
1.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the
Ethernet switch configuration window.
2.
Enter 3.94.247.229 in the IP Address field and 255.255.252.0 in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK.
The software will send the new settings to the T35 and prompt as follows when complete.
3.
Cycle power to the T35 and switch module to activate the new settings.
b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE

The T35 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard T35 settings file.
This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings
files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files.
The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module.
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.
GE Multilin
3-47
3 HARDWARE
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.
All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned.
c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE
The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file.
It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring
settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE
1.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2.
Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.
The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.
3-48
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE

3.4.6 UPLOADING T35 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE
a) DESCRIPTION
This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module.
There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module:
Using the EnerVista UR Setup software.
Serially using the T35 switch module console port.
Using FTP or TFTP through the T35 switch module console port.
It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a T35 switch module.
Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
NOTE
b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION

The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to
determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch
1.
Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface.

The default switch login ID is manager and the default password is manager.
NOTE
The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.
Version: 2.1 beta
2.
842869A1.CDR
Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch
> Firmware Upload menu item.
GE Multilin
3-49
3 HARDWARE
The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.
It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE
3.
After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning.
Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.
4.
Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.
The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.
If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:
Note
3-50
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE
5.
Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure
described earlier.
3.4.7 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors.
Be sure to enable the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL setting in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS menu
and the relevant PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings under the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH menu.
Table 37: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

ACTIVATION SETTING (SET
AS ENABLED)
EVENT NAME
EVENT CAUSE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL
ETHERNET MODULE
OFFLINE
No response has been

received from the Ethernet
module after five successive
polling attempts.
Loss of switch power.

IP/gateway/subnet.
Incompatibility between the CPU and
the switch module.
UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly
or blocked
Switch IP address assigned to another
device in the same network.
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6

EVENTS
ETHERNET PORT 1
OFFLINE to ETHERNET
PORT 6 OFFLINE
An active Ethernet port has

returned a FAILED status.
Ethernet connection broken.

An inactive ports events have been
enabled.
No setting required; the T35

will read the state of a general
purpose input/output port on
the main CPU upon power-up
and create the error if there is a
conflict between the input/
output state and the order
code.
EQUIPMENT
MISMATCH: Card XXX
Missing
The T35 has not detected the

presence of the Ethernet
switch via the bus board.
The T35 failed to see the switch module

on power-up, because switch wont
power up or is still powering up. To clear
the fault, cycle power to the T35.
GE Multilin
3-51
3 HARDWARE
3-52
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate interface section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line)
or connected (on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device.
In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every T35 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the T35 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the T35
relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any
number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
Device definition
Product setup
System setup
FlexLogic
Grouped elements
Control elements
Inputs/outputs
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the T35 with settings files.
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus IP Port Number
RS485 COM1 Baud Rate
RS485 COM1 Parity
COM1 Minimum Response Time
GE Multilin
4-1
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate

RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number
Network Address NSAP
IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev
When a settings file is loaded to a T35 that is in-service, the following sequence will occur.
1.
The T35 will take itself out of service.
2.
The T35 will issue a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3.
The T35 will close the critical fail contact.
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC

You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following
Event recorder
The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from
most recent to oldest.
Oscillography
The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay
operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a T35 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware.
4-2
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
NOTE
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
GE Multilin
4-3
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
1.
Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view.
2.
Main window menu bar.
3.
Main window tool bar.
4.
Site list control bar window.
5.
Settings list control bar window.
6.
Device data view windows, with common tool bar.
7.
Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar.
8.
Workspace area with data view tabs.
9.
Status bar.
10. Quick action hot links.
3
10
4
842786A2.CDR
Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
4-4
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the T35 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1.
Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
GE Multilin
4-5
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 42: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED
5.
Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 43: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.
Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
4-6
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
Display only those settings available for editing.
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 44: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
GE Multilin
4-7
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 45: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 46: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and
it will be necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
4-8
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.
Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES
The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation.
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.
2.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
3.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
Figure 47: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

4.
Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.
5.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
6.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
GE Multilin
4-9
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via

842861A1.CDR
Figure 48: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
Figure 49: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW

b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired
FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific
serial number.
1.
Select the settings file in the offline window.
2.
Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
4-10
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following window is displayed.
Figure 410: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

3.
Enter the serial number of the T35 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the T35 device specified by the serial
number.
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a T35 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a T35 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the T35 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the T35 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T35
device or obtained from the T35 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 411: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
GE Multilin
4-11
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
1.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a T35 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an T35 device.
The T35 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
4
842863A1.CDR
Figure 412: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 413: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
4-12
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The T35 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 414: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES
The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.
GE Multilin
4-13
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3.1 FACEPLATE
a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
4
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
842810A1.CDR
Figure 415: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE

b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal
arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1
LED panel 2
LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1 to 12
Keypad
827801A7.CDR
Figure 416: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4-14
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
ENTER
VALUE
+/-
KEYPAD
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
827830A1.CDR
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
LED PANEL 1
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
Figure 417: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4.3.2 LED INDICATORS
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event
cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are not used in this unit.
842811A1.CDR
Figure 418: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The status indicators in the first column are described below.
IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed.
GE Multilin
4-15
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved.
CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.
FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.
OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.
PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.
PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.
PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.
NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every T35, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is
used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions
can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection
to a portable PC.
The USER keys are not used in this unit.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Figure 419: LED PANEL 1
4-16
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
STATUS INDICATORS:
IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:

Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.
PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.
PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.
NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:
The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a
customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Figure 420: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:
The default labels are intended to represent:
GE Multilin
4-17
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
NOTE
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the following section.
SETTINGS IN USE
842783A1.CDR
Figure 421: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)

4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below.
EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational.
The T35 settings have been saved to a settings file.
The T35 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http://
www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur and printed.
Small-bladed knife.
This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display.
1.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
4-18
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window
will be displayed.
4
Figure 422: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW
3.
Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.
4.
Feed the T35 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5.
When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6.
Remove the T35 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part
number facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every T35 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet,
and the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.
1.
Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.
GE Multilin
4-19

2.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the T35 enhanced front panel and insert the custom
labels.
1.
Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
2.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED
label.
4-20
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
3.
Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the T35 enhanced front
panel and insert the custom labels.
1.
Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the
bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
GE Multilin
4-21
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will
attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
4-22
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons,
as shown below.
4
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1.
Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
842771A1.CDR
2.
Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic covers.
( LED MODULE )
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
( BLANK MODULE )
842722A1.CDR
3.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4.
Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.
GE Multilin
4-23
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following items are required to customize the T35 display module:
Black and white or color printer (color preferred).
Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
The following procedure describes how to customize the T35 display module:
1.
Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2.
When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3.
Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4.
From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5.
Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.3.4 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
4.3.5 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The T35 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING
Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in
agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is Enabled for each breaker.
4-24
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS
For the following example setup, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
COMMAND PASSWORD
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described above for two breakers.
4.3.7 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
Actual values.
Settings.
Commands.
Targets.
User displays (when enabled).
GE Multilin
4-25
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION

ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE
keys to display the other actual value headers.
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
contains settings to configure the relay.
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN
keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page
header.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT
key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
PASSWORD
SECURITY
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the
remaining setting messages for this sub-header.
Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Display Properties.
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25%
4-26
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown.
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
For example, select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH
setting.
MESSAGE TIME
MINIMUM:
MAXIMUM:
0.5
10.0
Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key
again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is
entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.
While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward
from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
being entered.
Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear
as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places
will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step
value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
"Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the
VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing
ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as
confirmation of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
GE Multilin
4-27
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1.
1.
Press the decimal to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press ENTER to store the text.
5.
If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY

When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have
not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6.
Press the ENTER key.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
7.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

The T35 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
4-28
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
enables this functionality.
To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: --------ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: --------5.
After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the
selection to Yes.
6.
Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7.
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.
8.
When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9.
When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be
active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.
g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY
When an incorrect command or setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a 3-minute
time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the T35 will not allow settings or command level access via the faceplate interface for the next five minutes, or in the event that an incorrect Command Or Set-
GE Multilin
4-29
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
ting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the T35 will not allow settings or command access
via the any external communications interface for the next five minutes.
In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and
the T35 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes.
The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.
4-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
GE Multilin
5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
SECURITY
See page 58.
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
See page 512.
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
See page 514.
COMMUNICATIONS
See page 515.
MODBUS USER MAP
See page 538.
REAL TIME
CLOCK
See page 539.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
FAULT REPORT
See page 540.
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 541.
DATA LOGGER
See page 543.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
See page 544.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
See page 547.
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 548.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 549.
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
See page 554.
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
See page 555.
DIRECT I/O
See page 557.
TELEPROTECTION
See page 565.
INSTALLATION
See page 565.
AC INPUTS
See page 568.
POWER SYSTEM
See page 570.
SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 571.
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
TRANSFORMER
See page 573.
BREAKERS
See page 584.
SWITCHES
See page 588.
FLEXCURVES
See page 591.
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5106.
FLEXLOGIC
TIMERS
See page 5106.
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5107.
NON-VOLATILE
LATCHES
See page 5111.
SETTING GROUP 1
See page 5112.
SETTING GROUP 2
SETTING GROUP 6
SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SETTINGS
INPUTS / OUTPUTS
5-2
TRIP BUS
See page 5126.
SETTING GROUPS
See page 5128.
SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5129.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5135.
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
See page 5137.
CONTACT INPUTS
See page 5143.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5145.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5146.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5148.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
SETTINGS
TESTING
GE Multilin
5.1 OVERVIEW
REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5149.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5150.
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 5151.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA BIT PAIRS
See page 5151.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt BIT PAIRS
See page 5152.
RESETTING
See page 5152.
DIRECT INPUTS
See page 5153.
DIRECT OUTPUTS
See page 5153.
TELEPROTECTION
See page 5156.
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
See page 5158.
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
See page 5159.
DCMA INPUTS
See page 5160.
RTD INPUTS
See page 5161.
DCMA OUTPUTS
See page 5163.
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
See page 5166.
TEST MODE FORCING:

On
See page 5166.
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
See page 5167.
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
See page 5168.
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter
actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT.
Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 =
300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will
be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary.
For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based
on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- 120 = 115 V
14400
(EQ 5.1)
For wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- 120
---------- = 66.4 V
14400
3
(EQ 5.2)
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory
default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the function becomes active and all
options become available.
NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
5-4
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled,
no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
Self-Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element, and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible
after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.
EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The T35 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process
by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources,
in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains
all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some
of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage
from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this
application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location
or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor sum (or
difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT
connections). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net
current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
GE Multilin
5-5
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
CT1
through current
CT2
Winding 1
current
UR-series
relay
Winding 1
Power
transformer
Winding 2
CT3
CT4
827791A3.CDR
Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as Wdg1 I.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION
CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 >
< bank 3 >
< bank 5 >
< bank 2 >
< bank 4 >
< bank 6 >
5-6
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM
MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)
12
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the
user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in
which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
GE Multilin
5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 SECURITY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)
MESSAGE
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
See page 59.
MESSAGE
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
See page 510.
MESSAGE
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
See page 511.
MESSAGE
PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
Changing the state of virtual inputs.
Clearing the event records.
Clearing the oscillography records.
Changing the date and time.
Clearing the data logger.
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
Changing any setting.
Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to 0, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the T35, the remote password must be used. If the connection
is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands.
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
5-8
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE
b) LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according
to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
c) REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 52: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.
GE Multilin
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
1.
Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3.
Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4.
If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password
value.
d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
The following access supervision settings are available.
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon
expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the T35 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The T35 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
5-10
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
MESSAGE
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value.
If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
GE Multilin
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the
FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
LANGUAGE:
English
Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;

English, Chinese
(range dependent on order code)
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%

Visible only if a VFD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled

Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER WAIT

TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1

Visible only if an LCD is installed
CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is
dependent on the order code of the relay.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
5-12
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the T35 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The T35 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The T35 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:
3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.3)
For Wye connections:

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary3-phase power cut-off = 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.4)
CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary

per-phase power cut-off = CURRENT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.5)
where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio.

For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A
PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.
We have:
CT primary = 100 A, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed.
NOTE
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02
pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
GE Multilin
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
CLEAR USER REPORTS:

Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:

Off
MESSAGE
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:

Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS:

Off
Range: FlexLogic operand.

Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the T35 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
2.
Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT
menu:
SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s
5-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
See below.
MESSAGE
NETWORK
See page 516.
MESSAGE
MODBUS PROTOCOL
See page 516.
MESSAGE
DNP PROTOCOL
See page 517.
MESSAGE
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
See page 520.
MESSAGE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
See page 521.
MESSAGE
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 534.
MESSAGE
TFTP PROTOCOL
See page 535.
MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
See page 535.
MESSAGE
SNTP PROTOCOL
See page 536.
MESSAGE
EGD PROTOCOL
See page 536.
MESSAGE
ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 538.
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 PARITY:

None
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU Type E is ordered.
Range: None, Odd, Even
Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE

MIN TIME:
0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 BAUD

RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
RS485 COM2 PARITY:

None
Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE

MIN TIME:
0 ms
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 BAUD

RATE: 19200
The T35 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for
local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet
or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that
GE Multilin
5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of
these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting
files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
NOTE
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
each transmission.
c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format

Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
MESSAGE
SUBNET IP MASK:
0.0.0.0

MESSAGE
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0

MESSAGE
OSI NETWORK
ADDRESS (NSAP)
Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS.

MESSAGE
ETHERNET OPERATION
MODE: Full-Duplex
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.
These messages appear only if the T35 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally
be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays
behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can
map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured
to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
WARNING
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT

NUMBER:
502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see
descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the T35 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each T35 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting will not take effect until the T35 is restarted.
NOTE
5-16
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL
DNP PROTOCOL
GE Multilin
DNP CHANNELS
Range: see sub-menu below
DNP ADDRESS:
65519
MESSAGE
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
DNP TCP/UDP PORT

NUMBER: 20000
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

TIMEOUT: 5 s
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

MAX RETRIES: 10
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE

DEST ADDRESS: 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP PF SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER SCALE

FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP PF DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000
MESSAGE
DNP TIME SYNC IIN

PERIOD: 1440 min
MESSAGE
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 21
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 22
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 23
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED

CONTROL POINTS: 0
MESSAGE
DNP TCP CONNECTION

TIMEOUT: 120 s
MESSAGE
The T35 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The T35 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the T35 maintains two sets of DNP
data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the T35 at one time.
NOTE
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not
become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:

NETWORK
MESSAGE
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:

COM2 - RS485
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,

FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can
be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over
TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol.
Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings will take effect only after power has
been cycled to the relay.
NOTE
The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the T35 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The
settings in this sub-menu are shown below.
5-18
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
CLIENT ADDRESS 2:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 3:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 4:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the T35 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the T35 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the T35 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the T35 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to 1000,
all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000
V on the T35 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10
times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the T35 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the T35 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should
be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to
the T35, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The T35 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR and DNP ENERGY
settings are not applicable.
DEFAULT DEADBAND
NOTE
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the T35.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
NOTE
When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays,
check the DNP Points Lists T35 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web
browser by entering the T35 IP address to access the T35 Main Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP
default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation
response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in
appendix E for additional details.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the T35 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support
the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP
GE Multilin
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The T35 can be configured to support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL
POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on
a one-to-one basis.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the T35 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be
aborted by the T35. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take
effect.
NOTE
f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
DNP / IEC104
POINT LISTS
MESSAGE
BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS
The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can
configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
Point:
Off
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
255
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the full
range of assignable operands.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Point:
Off
MESSAGE
Point:
Off
255
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the
full range of assignable parameters.
5-20
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
NOTE
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP /
IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point
are ignored.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the T35 is restarted.
NOTE
g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO2 CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
REPORT CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
The T35 Transformer Protection System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability.
This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.
The T35 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported
over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The T35 operates as an IEC 61850
server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.
The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
GSSE / GOOSE
CONFIGURATION
TRANSMISSION
MESSAGE
RECEPTION
The main transmission menu is shown below:
GE Multilin
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
GENERAL
MESSAGE
GSSE
MESSAGE
FIXED GOOSE
MESSAGE
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE
The general transmission settings are shown below:

TRANSMISSION GENERAL
GENERAL
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This
setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed T35 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.
The GSSE settings are shown below:

TRANSMISSION GSEE
GSSE
GSSE FUNCTION:
Enabled
GSSE ID:
GSSEOut
Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.
The GSSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This
string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In T35 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
5-22
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:

TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE
FIXED GOOSE
GOOSE FUNCTION:
Disabled
GOOSE ID:
GOOSEOut
MESSAGE
DESTINATION MAC:
000000000000
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY:

4
MESSAGE
GOOSE VLAN ID:

0
MESSAGE
GOOSE ETYPE APPID:

0
MESSAGE
These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.

The GOOSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE
message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string
was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The DESTINATION MAC setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast
address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In T35 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet MAC
address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of the
T35) and setting the multicast bit.
The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to
have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application
ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE VLAN
PRIORITY and GOOSE ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850.
GE Multilin
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.

TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1
CONFIG GSE 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
CONFIG GSE 1 ID:

GOOSEOut_1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC:

010CDC010000
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN PRIORITY: 4
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
VLAN ID:
0
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
ETYPE APPID:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
CONFREV:
CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS

CURVE: Relaxed
Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS

data item references for transmitted data
0
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the T35 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for
intercommunication between T35 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the T35.
The T35 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to
enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The T35 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the T35 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the T35 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The T35 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
For versions 5.70 and higher, the T35 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.
The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow
GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.
5-24
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The details about each scheme are shown in the following table.
Table 51: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES
SCHEME
SQ NUM
TIME FROM THE

EVENT
TIME BETWEEN
MESSAGES
COMMENT
TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE

IN MESSAGE
Aggressive
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
4 ms
4 ms
T1
2000 ms
8 ms
4 ms
T1
2000 ms
16 ms
8 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
16 ms
16 ms
T1
2000 ms
32 ms
16 ms
T1
2000 ms
64 ms
32 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
100 ms
100 ms
T1
2000 ms
200 ms
100 ms
T1
2000 ms
700 ms
500 ms
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
0 ms
0 ms
Event
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T1
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T1
2000 ms
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T2
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Medium
Relaxed
Heartbeat
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup
software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1.
Configure the transmission dataset.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3.
Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.
Configure the reception dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
GE Multilin
5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1.
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION

GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
Set ITEM 1 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.
Set ITEM 2 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
Set ITEM 3 to MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f to indicate the analog frequency magnitude for MMXU1 (the metered frequency for SRC1).
The transmission dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
5
3.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1).
Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match
the configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu:
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
4.
Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
Configure the MMXU1 Hz Deadband by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
settings menu:
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS MMXU1 DEADBANDS
Set MMXU1 HZ DEADBAND to 0.050%. This will result in an update to the MMXU1.MX.mag.f analog value with a
change greater than 45 mHz, from the previous MMXU1.MX.mag.f value, in the source frequency.
The T35 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1.
Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC
61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
Set ITEM 3 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f to indicate the analog magnitude for GGIO3 analog input 1.
The reception dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
5-26
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
3.
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is
0 in the example above.
Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
Configure the Boolean data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE
settings menu:
INPUT 1
4.
Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Configure the analog data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG
settings menu:
INPUTS
Set the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFAULT VALUE to 60.000.
Enter Hz for the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS setting.
The GOOSE analog input 1 can now be used as a FlexAnalog value in a FlexElement or in other settings. The T35
must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of GOOSE analog input 1 in the receiving device will be determined by the MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f value in the
sending device. This MMXU value is determined by the source 1 frequency value and the MMXU Hz deadband setting of
the sending device.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The T35 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
For intercommunication between T35 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the T35
(DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to Disabled when configuration changes are required. Once changes are
entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for

transmitted data
MESSAGE
ITEM 2:
GGIO1.ST.IndPos1.stV

transmitted data
MESSAGE
ITEM
None

transmitted data
3:
MESSAGE
ITEM 64:
None

transmitted data
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q. The T35 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic
operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.
GE Multilin
5-27
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items
for reception:
RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(16) CONFIG GSE 1(32) DATA ITEMS
CONFIG GSE 1
DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1:
GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal

transmitted data
MESSAGE
ITEM 2:
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV

transmitted data
MESSAGE
ITEM
None

transmitted data
3:
MESSAGE
ITEM 32:
None

transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the T35 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to sixteen different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for
intercommunication between T35 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
For intercommunication between T35 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.
To set up a T35 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the
following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal and
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal. The T35 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from
these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting
must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings
must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2. These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in
accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.
Double-point status values may be included in the GOOSE dataset. Received values are populated in the
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal and higher items.
Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 and higher items.
Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).
GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn32 can only be used once for all sixteen reception datasets.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL SERVER CONFIGURATION
SERVER
CONFIGURATION
IED NAME: IECDevice
Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters
LD INST: LDInst
LOCATION: Location
IEC/MMS TCP PORT

NUMBER:
102
MESSAGE
INCLUDE NON-IEC
DATA: Enabled
MESSAGE
SERVER SCANNING:
Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-28
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The IED NAME and LD INST settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical
nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_)
character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The LOCATION is a
variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.
The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE
NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the UR MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC
61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be
Disabled.
The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC
61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the
GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled
to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the T35. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (T35 relay), but most data values will not be updated.
This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
Changes to the IED NAME setting, LD INST setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the T35 is restarted.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
PIOC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES
PTOC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
PTRC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.
For example, the logical node PTOC1 may have the name prefix abc. The full logical node name will then be
abcMMXU1. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the
underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.
Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the T35 is restarted.
The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU1 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU2 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU3 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU4 DEADBANDS
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and
cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values. The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con-
GE Multilin
5-29
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
straint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. Thus, it is important to know the
maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.
The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:
phase current: 46 phase CT primary setting
neutral current: 46 ground CT primary setting
voltage: 275 VT ratio setting
power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 phase CT primary setting 275 VT ratio setting
frequency: 90 Hz
power factor: 2
The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
GGIO1 STATUS
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF STATUS
POINTS IN GGIO1: 8
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION
Off
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION 128

Off
MESSAGE
The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of Ind (single point status indications) that are
instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not take effect until
the T35 is restarted.
The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION
GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
CTLMODEL: 1
Range: 0, 1, or 2
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are 0
(status only), 1 (direct control), and 2 (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the T35
virtual inputs.
5-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF ANALOG
POINTS IN GGIO4:
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 2
MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 3
MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 32
MEASURED VALUE
The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is
changed, the T35 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly
configured number of analog points.
The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MEASURED VALUE
ANALOG IN
Off
1 VALUE:
Range: any FlexAnalog value
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 DB:
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 MIN:
Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

of 0.001
MESSAGE
ANALOG IN
0.000
1 MAX:
Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

of 0.001
These settings are configured as follows.
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).
ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3
for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous
magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.
ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
NOTE
Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point
numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded
to the closest possible floating point number.
GE Multilin
5-31
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINTEGER
CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINT In
Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
GGIO5 UINT In
Off
2:
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT In
Off
3:
MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16:

Off
MESSAGE
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16
unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of
GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger values for each GGIO5 integer value point.
It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the T35. Additional settings are provided to
allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger values to the
GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.
GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value
(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.
The report control configuration settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURABLE REPORT 1 REPORT 1 DATASET ITEMS
REPORT 1
DATASET ITEMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ITEM
1:
Range: all valid MMS data item references
ITEM
2:
Range: as shown above
ITEM
3:
MESSAGE
ITEM 64:
To create the dataset for logical node LN, program the ITEM 1 to ITEM 64 settings to a value from the list of IEC 61850 data
attributes supported by the T35. Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the T35 is restarted. It is recommended
to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some (but not all) data from already existing GGIO1,
GGIO4, and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset.
5-32
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XCBR CONFIGURATION
XCBR
CONFIGURATION
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR2 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR3 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the
XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result
in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1.
GE Multilin
5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is
restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XSWI CONFIGURATION
XSWI
CONFIGURATION
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI2 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI3 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI24 OpCnt:

No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by
opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch
operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XSWI1.
NOTE
Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN
functionality.
h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT

NUMBER:
80
The T35 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the T35 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the T35 Main Menu. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be
accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the T35 into the Address box on the web browser.
5-34
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT

NUMBER:
69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1

NUMBER:
0
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2

NUMBER:
0
MESSAGE
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the T35 over a network. The T35 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the T35 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION: Disabled
IEC TCP PORT

NUMBER: 2404
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
IEC NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU:
0
MESSAGE
IEC CYCLIC DATA

PERIOD:
60 s
MESSAGE
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC POWER DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
IEC OTHER DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
The T35 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The T35 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a
maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the T35 maintains two sets of IEC
60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the T35 at one time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the T35 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the T35 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the T35, the default thresholds will be in effect.
The T35 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not applicable.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-35
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
NOTE
5 SETTINGS
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION
setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not
become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:

0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
SNTP UDP PORT

NUMBER: 123
MESSAGE
The T35 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the T35 can obtain clock time over
an Ethernet network. The T35 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated
product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the T35 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the T35 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the T35 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the T35 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the T35 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The
T35 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The T35 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
l) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL
EGD PROTOCOL
FAST PROD EXCH 1

CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
SLOW PROD EXCH 1

CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
SLOW PROD EXCH 2

CONFIGURATION
The T35 Transformer Protection System is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol feature is not
available if CPU Type E is ordered.
The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items
in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to consume EGD
data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD
exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to
a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of 0 is considered invalid.
5-36
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
FAST PROD EXCH 1

CONFIGURATION
EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA RATE:

1000 ms
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:

0

(Modbus register address range)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 2:

0

MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 3:

0

MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20:

0

Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The T35 has one fast exchange (exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (exchange 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
SLOW PROD EXCH 1

CONFIGURATION
EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA RATE:

1000 ms
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM

0
1:

(Modbus register address range in decimal)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM

0
2:

MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM

0
3:

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50:

0

MESSAGE
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are described below:
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually unicast or broadcast.
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms,
the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be
updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a
setting range of 500 to 1000 ms.
GE Multilin
5-37
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any
data from the T35 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting
Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory
map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format. as such, it will be necessary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values),
only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items
up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid
Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items.
m) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
SWITCH IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format
SWITCH MODBUS TCP

PORT NUMBER: 502
MESSAGE
PORT 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
PORT 2 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
PORT 6 EVENTS:
Disabled
These settings appear only if the T35 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).
The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings
are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these
settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings.
The PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event
recorder.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP
ADDRESS
VALUE:
1:
0
ADDRESS
VALUE:
2:
0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS
VALUE:
3:
0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256:
VALUE:
0
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
5-38
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME
CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:

None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
REAL TIME CLOCK

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
LOCAL TIME OFFSET

FROM UTC:
0.0 hrs
Range: 24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME: Disabled
MESSAGE
DST START MONTH:

April
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
DST START DAY:

Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
DST START DAY

INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
DST START HOUR:

2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
DST STOP MONTH:

April
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
DST STOP DAY:

Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
DST STOP DAY

INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
DST STOP HOUR:

2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same
accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the
current year needs to be entered. See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu to manually set the relay clock.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.
The LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time
(Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the T35 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the T35 is time synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the T35 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time.
The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the T35 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time zone.
Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when the
T35 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used.
Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time settings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-39
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
FAULT REPORT 1
FAULT REPORT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
Off
MESSAGE
FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
Off
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1
Off
#1:
Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1
Off
#2:
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1
Off
#3:
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 #32:

Off
MESSAGE
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the prefault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element
resets and no record is created.
The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware
revision (5.9x, for example) and relay model (T35), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (a specific
FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault
trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
The report includes fault duration times for each of the breakers (created by the breaker arcing current feature). To include
fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure breaker arcing current feature for each of the
breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The
EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when
the report is triggered.
The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from thermal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include
voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this
operand stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.
FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand
stores the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time
of the report.
FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current
magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32
channels can be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.
5-40
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
NUMBER OF RECORDS:
5
TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
MESSAGE
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNELS
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
Table 52: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
RECORDS
CT/VTS
SAMPLE
RATE
DIGITALS
ANALOGS
CYCLES/
RECORD
1872.0
16
16
1685.0
16
16
276.0
16
16
219.5
16
16
93.5
16
63
16
93.5
32
63
16
57.6
64
63
16
32.3
32
64
63
16
9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite.
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of
25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be
any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per
cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
GE Multilin
5-41
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNEL
Off
1:
DIGITAL CHANNEL
Off
2:
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL
Off
3:
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:

Off
MESSAGE
A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNEL
Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

See Appendix A for complete list.
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL
Off
2:

MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL
Off
3:

ANALOG CHANNEL 16:

Off

MESSAGE
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay are dependent on:
The type of relay,
The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value
parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is
used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list
of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will
appear.
5-42
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER MODE:

Continuous
Range: Continuous, Trigger
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:

Off
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER RATE:

60000 ms
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL

Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:

FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL

Off
2:

MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL

Off
3:

MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:

Off

DATA LOGGER CONFIG:

0 CHNL x
0.0 DAYS
Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table.
Table 53: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE
CHANNELS
DAYS
15 ms
0.1
954 s
0.1
120 s
1000 ms
60000 ms
3600000 ms
STORAGE CAPACITY
0.1
107 s
16
0.1
60 s
0.7
65457 s
0.1
8182 s
0.1
7273 s
16
0.1
4091 s
45.4
3927420 s
5.6
490920 s
436380 s
16
2.8
254460 s
2727.5
235645200 s
340.9
29455200 s
303
26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-43
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to Continuous, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The
data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger will begin to
record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic
operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is
full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a
new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset
the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any
FlexLogic operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the
mode is set to Trigger.
DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to Off without over-writing old data.
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
LED TEST
See below
MESSAGE
TRIP & ALARM

LEDS
See page 546.
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED1
See page 546.
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED2
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST
LED TEST
MESSAGE
LED TEST FUNCTION:

Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
LED TEST CONTROL:

Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
5-44
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
1.
All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left
panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from
relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
READY TO TEST
rising edge of the

control input
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
5
Start the software image of
the LEDs
Restore the LED states

from the software image
Set the
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
time-out
(1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
Wait 1 second
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

control input
rising edge
of the control
input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 53: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
GE Multilin
5-45
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS

Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled
LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
MESSAGE
TRIP LED INPUT:

Off
ALARM LED INPUT:

Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
MESSAGE
LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
Self-Reset (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
5-46
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Table 54: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING
PARAMETER
SETTING
PARAMETER
LED 1 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
LED 13 operand
Off
LED 2 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
LED 14 operand
Off
LED 3 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
LED 15 operand
Off
LED 4 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
LED 16 operand
Off
LED 5 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
LED 17 operand
Off
LED 6 operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
LED 18 operand
Off
LED 7 operand
Off
LED 19 operand
Off
LED 8 operand
Off
LED 20 operand
Off
LED 9 operand
Off
LED 21 operand
Off
LED 10 operand
Off
LED 22 operand
Off
LED 11 operand
Off
LED 23 operand
Off
LED 12 operand
Off
LED 24 operand
Off
Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation.
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
DIRECT RING BREAK

FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with

Direct Input/Output module.
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE OFF

FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with

Direct Input/Output module.
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF

FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a

CPU with Ethernet capability.
MESSAGE
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL

FUNCTION: Disabled

CPU with a primary fiber port.
MESSAGE
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL

FUNCTION: Disabled

CPU with a redundant fiber port.
BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled

CPU with Ethernet capability.
IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE

FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display
target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled
mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in
chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION is Enabled in this
menu.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-47
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the T35 is ordered with the twelve userprogrammable pushbutton option.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 55: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by
various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
5-48
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
When applicable
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
Enabled=1
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
CONTROL:
AND
RUN
OFF
ON
TIMER
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
100 msec
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 56: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC

5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:
0.0 s
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 SET:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:
Disabled
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
DELAY: 1.0 s
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:
Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:

Off
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-49
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered
with the relay.
Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons.
Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of
password protection.
The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.
USER
LABEL 1
USER
LABEL 2
USER
LABEL 3
USER
LABEL 4
USER
LABEL 5
USER
LABEL 6
USER
LABEL 7
USER
LABEL 8
USER
LABEL 9
USER
LABEL 10
USER
LABEL 11
USER
LABEL 12
USER
LABEL 13
USER
LABEL 14
USER
LABEL 15
USER
LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 57: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
10
12
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Figure 58: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available
online at http://www.GEmultilin.com. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for the enhanced
faceplate.
Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON
1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is
active, the ANY PB ON operand will be asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN
1 LED CTL setting.
The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET (for latched and
self-reset mode) and PUSHBTN 1 RESET (for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent
on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed.
Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state
until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in
non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
5-50
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.
Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus
the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the
pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
setting expires.
TIME
NOTE
The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands
executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic operands.
The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring one-at-a-time select operation.
The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate
inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined
messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to SelfReset, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically
pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting.
When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of
the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The Off operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding On FlexLogic operand only for the time period specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting.
If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and
Off on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the
Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply
be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be Off upon its release. The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.
This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be
pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.
GE Multilin
5-51
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to
assert PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the
incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is
applicable only if the pushbutton is in the Latched mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in
the latched mode.
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the
operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the
front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to Self-Reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire
activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is
Off, then LED operation is directly linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand.
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to High Priority, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1
and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted.
The high priority option is not applicable to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting.
ID
This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad
inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active.
If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT
settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified
by FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is
displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or
any new target or message becomes active.
The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand and will be displayed in
PUSHBTN 1 ID only if pushbutton element is in the Latched mode. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT message
as Normal if the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE setting is High Priority or Normal.
conjunction with
will be displayed
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into
event recorder.
5-52
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.

TIMER
200 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
0
SETTING
Function
LATCHED
= Enabled
= Latched
OR
= Self-Reset
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
SETTING
Local Lock
Off = 0
Non-volatile latch
AND
TIMER
50 ms
SETTING
Remote Lock
Latch
R
AND
Off = 0
SETTING
OR
TIMER
50 ms
Hold
TPKP
0
0
OR
SETTING
Set
AND
Off = 0
OR
OR
SETTING
Reset
PUSHBUTTON ON
To user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 2, 842024A2
AND
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
Autoreset Function
= Enabled
= Disabled
SETTING
Autoreset Delay
TPKP
AND
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
SETTING
Drop-Out Timer
0
TIMER
200 ms
OR
TRST
842021A3.CDR
AND
Figure 59: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-53
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
Flash Message Time
LATCHED
SETTINGS
Top Text
0
AND
OR
= XXXXXXXXXX
TRST
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
reset *
From user-programmable
pushbuttons logic
sheet 1, 842021A3
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON ON
The message is temporarily removed if

any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10)
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
the message.
SETTING
Message Priority
LCD MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority
SETTINGS
Top Text
= Normal
OR
SETTING
Flash Message Time
= XXXXXXXXXX
On Text
= XXXXXXXXXX
0
AND
Instantaneous reset will be executed if any

front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
TRST
Instantaneous
reset *
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC
1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OR
Pushbutton 1
LED
2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY PB ON
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
= any FlexLogic operand
Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842024A2.CDR
Figure 510: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
NOTE
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered

separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via
EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
PARAMETER
Off
1:
PARAMETER
Off
2:
MESSAGE
PARAMETER
Off
3:
MESSAGE
PARAMETER 256:
Off
MESSAGE
5-54
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the Flex States register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommodate the 256 state bits.
5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
INVOKE AND SCROLL:

Off
USER DISPLAY
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 16
MESSAGE
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
GE Multilin
5-55
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY 1(16)
USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4
0
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start
of a data field the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a
user display the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7.
Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the Yes
option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
5-56
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
An example user display setup and result is shown below:

USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE:

Current X ~
A
Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:

Current Y ~
A
Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register

address, corresponding to first tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register

address, corresponding to second tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding

tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0

MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0

USER DISPLAYS
NOTE
Current X
Current Y
0.850
0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the
bottom line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items
are different.
5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O
DIRECT I/O
GE Multilin
DIRECT OUTPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING

CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING

CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O DATA

RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL

CROSSOVER: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
See page 563.
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH2
See page 563.
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH1
See page 564.
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH2
See page 564.
5-57
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Direct inputs and outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays
connected directly via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE, except that
communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that support two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output
messages both ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are
sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at
the receiver.
Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
1.
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages
sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
2.
DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline). These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct
output messages from at least one direct device are not being received.
Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting identifies the
relay in all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used
to identify the sender of the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
is Yes), all direct output messages should be received back. If not, the direct input/output ring
break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is approximately
0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each bridge.
5-58
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Table 55: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES

MODULE
CHANNEL
SUPPORTED DATA RATES
74
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
7L
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7T
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7W
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7M
7P
7V
2A
Channel 1
64 kbps
2B
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
2G
Channel 1
128 kbps
2H
Channel 1
128 kbps
76
Channel 1
64 kbps
77
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
75
7E
7F
7G
7Q
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
7R
Channel 1
64 kbps
7S
Channel 1
64 kbps
Channel 2
64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to T35s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. Please refer to the
Inputs and outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
GE Multilin
5-59
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic
that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such
as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected
via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 511: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION:
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps
Yes
For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps
Yes
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (for
example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
BLOCK
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 512: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
5-60
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
RX1
TX2
TX2
RX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
UR IED 4
RX2
TX2
TX2
RX1
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1
TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 513: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of bridges between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum communications distance by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle.
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
would be primarily used to address these concerns.
GE Multilin
5-61
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 514: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 515: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs and outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and,
ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
5-62
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX2
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX2
TX2
TX1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2
TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 516: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O CRC ALARM CH1(2)
CRC ALARM CH1
CRC ALARM CH1

FUNCTION: Disabled
CRC ALARM CH1

MESSAGE COUNT: 600
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1

THRESHOLD: 10
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The T35 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
GE Multilin
5-63
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual
value.
Message count and length of the monitoring window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message
per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For
example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at
64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600.
Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits
of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 104 implies 1 bit
error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed
packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 104.
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH1
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1

FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE COUNT: 600
MESSAGE

THRESHOLD: 10
MESSAGE

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The T35 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed
to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM
CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET
ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT
INPUTS UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.
5-64
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP TELEPROTECTION
TELEPROTECTION
TELEPROTECTION
FUNCTION: Disabled
NUMBER OF TERMINALS:
2
Range: 2, 3
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF COMM
CHANNELS: 1
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
LOCAL RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between two or three relays in a secure,
fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct
transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such
as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is
achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
NOTE
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive as such, they cannot be used simulatneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice
versa.
NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is 3 (three-terminal
system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or
2 (redundant channels).
LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installations that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line
is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel.
If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL
FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS CHANNEL TESTS VALIDITY OF
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of 0 for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID
is not to be checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over
both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.
5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
5-65
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.
5-66
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3REMOTE RESOURCES
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When T35 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.
Figure 517: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU

The remote resources settings configure a T35 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the T35
front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to
be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The T35 with a process bus module
has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the T35 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process
bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.
AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
Configure signal sources. This functionality of the T35 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and
voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They
replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.
Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number
GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
GE Multilin
5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(U5)
CURRENT BANK F1
PHASE CT F1
PRIMARY:
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
1 A
PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
PRIMARY:
1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
Six banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M, U} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.
F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio.
M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.
The following rule applies:

SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1
(EQ 5.6)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
5-68
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5(U5)
VOLTAGE BANK F5
PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta
PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
MESSAGE
Three banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M, U} and a = {5}.
See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONmade to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta.
NECTION
NOTE
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
Any ordered module banks containing VTs must be plugged into slot F.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-69
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM
POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY AND PHASE

REFERENCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
Enabled
MESSAGE
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
should only be set to Disabled in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
The frequency tracking feature will function only when the T35 is in the Programmed mode. If the T35 is Not Programmed, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
Systems with an ACB phase sequence require special consideration. Refer to the Phase relationships of
three-phase transformers sub-section of chapter 5.
NOTE
5-70
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(6)
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:

None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of

any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:

None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of

any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:

None
Range: None, F5, M5, U5

Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:

None
Range: None, F5, M5, U5

Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in
a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional
details on this concept.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be
referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.
User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter
may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC input actual values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL):
The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on
the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current
based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme
logic is as follows:
GE Multilin
5-71
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 1
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 1 50DD OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 2 50DD OP
I_0
Where I is 2 cycles old

SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 2
CURRENT PHASOR
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_2
I_0

SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 6
CURRENT PHASOR
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_2
I_0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 6 50DD OP
827092A3.CDR
Figure 518: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM
The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs
CTs
VTs
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1
DSP Bank
F5
Source 1
Source 2
Amps
Amps
51BF-1
51BF-2
Source 3
U1
Volts Amps
A
Var
87T
Var
51P
Volts Amps
M1
Source 4
M1
UR Relay
M5
Figure 519: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
5-72
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.4 TRANSFORMER
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
GENERAL
See page 573.
MESSAGE
WINDING 1
See page 575.
MESSAGE
WINDING 2
See page 575.
MESSAGE
WINDING 3
See page 575.
MESSAGE
WINDING 4
See page 575.
MESSAGE
WINDING 5
See page 575.
MESSAGE
WINDING 6
See page 575.
The T35 Transformer Protection System has been designed to provide primary protection for medium to high voltage power
transformers. It performs this function on a variety of power transformer configurations with up to six sets of three phase
inputs available.
b) GENERAL TRANSFORMER SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL
GENERAL
NUMBER OF WINDINGS:
2
MESSAGE
REFERENCE WINDING:
Automatic Selection
Range: Automatic Selection, Winding 1, Winding 2,...,

Winding 6
PHASE COMPENSATION:
Internal (software)
Range: Internal (software), External (with CTs)
MESSAGE
LOAD LOSS AT RATED

LOAD:
100 kW
Range: 1 to 20000 kW in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
RATED WINDING TEMP

RISE: 65C (oil)
Range: 55C (oil), 65C (oil), 80C (dry), 115C (dry),

150C (dry)
NO LOAD LOSS:
10 kW
Range: 1 to 20000 kW in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TYPE OF COOLING:
OA
Range: OA, FA, Non-directed FOA/FOW, Directed FOA/

FOW
TOP-OIL RISE OVER

AMBIENT: 35C
Range: 1 to 200C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THERMAL CAPACITY:
100.00 kWh/C
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 kWh/C in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
WINDING THERMAL TIME

CONSTANT: 2.00 min
Range: 0.25 to 15.00 min. in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
The general transformer settings apply to all windings. Settings specific to each winding are shown in the following section.
GE Multilin
5-73
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
NUMBER OF WINDINGS: Selects the number of windings for transformer setup.
PHASE COMPENSATION: Selects the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay. If set to Internal
(software), the transformer phase shift is compensated internally by the relay algorithm. If set to External (with CTs),
the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections.
LOAD LOSS AT RATED LOAD: This setting should be taken from the transformer nameplate. If not available from the
2
nameplate, the setting value can be computed as P R = I n ( W ) R , where I n ( W ) is the winding rated current and R is
the three-phase series resistance. The setting is used as an input for the calculation of the hottest-spot winding temperature.
RATED WINDING TEMP RISE: This setting defines the winding temperature rise over 30C ambient temperature. The
setting is automatically selected for the transformer type as shown in the table below.
The loss of life function calculates the insulation aging acceleration factor using the settings entered in this section, by
following equation:
F AA ( t ) = e
15000
15000 -
--------------------------- H_R + 273- -------------------------- H ( t ) + 273
(EQ 5.7)
where H_R is the rated hottest-spot temperature as per the table below,
and H ( t ) is the actual computed winding hottest-spot temperature.
The aging acceleration factor is computed every minute. It has a value of 1.0 when the actual winding hottest spot temperature is equal to the rated temperature, is greater than 1 if the actual temperature is above the rated temperature,
and less than 1 if the actual temperature is below the rated temperature.
RATED WINDING
TEMPERATURE
POWER
CAPACITY
NORMAL LIFE
EXPECTANCY
AT H_R
Oil
500 kVA
180000 hrs
95C
100 MVA
6.5 10 hrs
95C
500 kVA
20 years
110C
100 MVA
6.5 104 hrs
110C
> 100 MVA
6.5 104 hrs
110C
80C
Any
20 years
140C
115C
Any
20 years
175C
150C
Any
20 years
210C
55C
65C
Dry
NO LOAD LOSS: This setting is obtained from the transformer data and is used to calculate the aging acceleration
factor.
TYPE OF COOLING: The setting defines the type of transformer cooling and is used to calculate the aging acceleration factor. The values and their description for this setting are as follows:
OA: oil-air
FA: forced air
Non-directed FOA/FOW: non-directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
Directed FOA/FOW: directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
TOP OIL RISE OVER AMBIENT: This setting should be available from the transformer nameplate data
THERMAL CAPACITY: The setting should be available from the transformer nameplate data. If not, refer to the following calculations. For the OA and FA cooling types:
C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs.) + 0.04 (tank and fittings in lbs.) +1.33 (gallons of oil), Wh/C; or
C = 0.0272 (core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.01814 (tank and fittings in kg) + 5.034 (L of oil), Wh/C
For the Non-directed FOA/FOW (non-directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water) or Directed FOA/FOW (directed
forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water) cooling types, the thermal capacity is given by:
C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs.) + 0.06 (tank and fittings in lbs.) + 1.93 (gallons of oil), Wh/C; or
C =0.0272 (weight of core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.0272 (weight of tank and fittings in kg) + 7.305 (L of oil), Wh/C
For dry-type power transformers:
5-74
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
C = 0.048 (weight of copper winding); or

C = 0.015 (weight of core and copper windings from the nameplate); or
C = 0.12 (weight of aluminum windings); or
C = 0.02 (weight of core and aluminum coils from the nameplate)
WINDING THERMAL TIME CONSTANT: Required for insulation aging calculation. If this value is not available from
the transformer data, select 2 min..
c) WINDINGS 1 TO 6
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 1(6)
WINDING 1
WINDING 1 SOURCE:
SRC 1

(or the user-defined name)
WINDING 1 RATED MVA:

100.000 MVA
Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 MVA in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
WINDING 1 NOM -
VOLTAGE: 220.000 kV
Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 kV in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
WINDING 1
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta, Zig-zag
MESSAGE
WINDING 1 GROUNDING:
Not within zone
Range: Not within zone, Within zone
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
WINDING ~ ANGLE WRT

WINDING 1:
0.0
Range: 359.9 to 0.0 in steps of 0.1, (~ > 1)

(shown when viewed Winding is not Winding 1)
WINDING 1 RESISTANCE
3: 10.0000 ohms
Range: 0.0001 to 100.0000 ohms in steps of 0.0001
MESSAGE
The settings specific to each winding are shown above.

Transformer differential protection uses the following calculated quantities (per phase): fundamental, second harmonic, and
fifth harmonic differential current phasors, and restraint current phasors. This information is extracted from the current
transformers (CTs) connected to the relay by correcting the magnitude and phase relationships of the currents for each
winding, so as to obtain zero (or near zero) differential currents under normal operating conditions. Traditionally, these corrections were accomplished by interposing CTs and tapped relay windings with some combination of CT connections.
The T35 simplifies these configuration issues. All CTs at the transformer are connected wye (polarity markings pointing
away from the transformer). User-entered settings in the relay characterizing the transformer being protected and allow the
relay to automatically perform all necessary magnitude, phase angle, and zero-sequence compensation.
This section describes the algorithms in the relay that perform this compensation and produce the required calculated
quantities for transformer differential protection, by means of the following example of a delta-wye (-Y) connected power
transformer with the following data:
GE Multilin
5-75
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 56: EXAMPLE DELTA-WYE CONNECTED POWER TRANSFORMER DATA

DATA
WINDING 1
WINDING 2
Y (WYE) CONNECTION
Phase Shift
30 lag (i.e. phases of wye winding lag

corresponding phases of delta winding by 30)
Grounding
In-zone grounding bank
Ungrounded
Rated MVA
100/133/166 MVA
100/133/166 MVA
220 kV
69 kV
Wye
Wye
(DELTA) CONNECTION
Voltage Phasor Diagram
Nominal - Voltage
CT Connection
CT Ratio
Auxiliary Cooling
500/5
1500/5
Two stages of forced air
Two stages of forced air
The abbreviated nomenclature for applicable relay settings is as follows:
Rotation
wtotal
Compensation
Source [w]
Prated [w]
Vnominal [w]
Connection [w]
Grounding [w]
[w]
CT primary [w]
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM PHASE ROTATION

= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL NUMBER OF WINDINGS
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL PHASE COMPENSATION
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w SOURCE
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w RATED MVA
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w NOM VOLTAGE
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w CONNECTION
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w GROUNDING
= SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING w WINDING w ANGLE WRT WINDING 1
= the phase CT primary associated with Source [w]
Note that w = winding number, 1 to wtotal

The following transformer setup rules must be observed:
1.
The angle for the first winding from the transformer setup must be 0 and the angles for the following windings must be
entered as negative (lagging) with respect to (WRT) the winding 1 angle.
2.
The Within zone and Not within zone setting values refer to whether the winding is grounded. Select Within zone if
a neutral of a wye type winding, or a corner of a delta winding, is grounded within the zone, or whenever a grounding
transformer falls into the zone of protection.
d) PHASE RELATIONSHIPS OF THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS

Power transformers that are built in accordance with ANSI and IEC standards are required to identify winding terminals and
phase relationships among the windings of the transformer.
ANSI standard C.37.12.70 requires that the terminal labels include the characters 1, 2, 3 to represent the names of the individual phases. The phase relationship among the windings must be shown as a phasor diagram on the nameplate, with the
winding terminals clearly labeled. This standard specifically states that the phase relationships are established for a condition where the source phase sequence of 1-2-3 is connected to transformer windings labeled 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
IEC standard 60076-1 (1993) states that the terminal markings of the three phases follow national practice. The phase relationship among the windings is shown as a specified notation on the nameplate, and there may be a phasor diagram. In this
standard the arbitrary labeling of the windings is shown as I, II and III. This standard specifically states that the phase relationships are established for a condition where a source phase sequence of I-II-III is connected to transformer windings
labeled I, II and III respectively.
The reason the source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase relationships is that these relationships change when the phase sequence changes. The example shown below shows why this happens, using a transformer described in IEC nomenclature as a type Yd1 or in GE Multilin nomenclature as a Y/d30.
5-76
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
B
IA
Ia
IB
Ib
Ia = Ia - Ic
l
Ic
Ib = Ib - Ia
IC
Ic = Ic - I b
c
828716A1.CDR
Figure 520: EXAMPLE TRANSFORMER

The above diagram shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a phase angle in the delta winding
that lag the respective wye winding by 30. The currents in the windings are also identified. Note that the total current out of
the delta winding is described by an equation. Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ABC, is connected to transformer terminals ABC respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown the diagram below.
IA
Ia
Ia
I b
Ic
Ic
Ic
Ib
IB
IC
Ia
Ib
Figure 521: PHASORS FOR ABC SEQUENCE

Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30 (in agreement with the transformer nameplate).
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals A, C, and B, respectively. The
currents present for a balanced load are shown in the Phasors for ACB Phase Sequence diagram.
IA
Ia
Ia
Ic
Ib
Ic
Ib
Ic
IB
IC
Ia
Ib
828718A1.CDR
Figure 522: PHASORS FOR ACB SEQUENCE

Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30, (which is a type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and
a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) which is in disagreement with the transformer nameplate. This is because the
physical connections and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed. The transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated phase sequence.
GE Multilin
5-77
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
It may be suggested that phase relationship for the ACB sequence can be returned the transformer nameplate values by
connecting source phases A, B and C to transformer terminals A, C, and B respectively. Although this restores the nameplate phase shifts, it causes incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay, and is therefore not recommended.
All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A, B and C terminals to the power system
phases A, B, and C respectively. The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase
sequence of ABC, in accordance with the standards for power transformers. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB
must determine the transformer type for this sequence.
If a power system with ACB rotation is connected to the Wye winding terminals 1, 2, and 3, respectively, from a Y/d30 transformer, select a Power Rotation setting of ACB into the relay and enter data for the Y/d330 transformer type.
e) MAGNITUDE COMPENSATION
Transformer protection presents problems in the application of current transformers. CTs should be matched to the current
rating of each transformer winding, so that normal current through the power transformer is equal on the secondary side of
the CT on different windings. However, because only standard CT ratios are available, this matching may not be exact.
In our example, the transformer has a voltage ratio of 220 kV / 69 kV (i.e. about 3.188 to 1) and a compensating CT ratio is
500 A to 1500 A (i.e. 1 to 3). Historically, this would have resulted in a steady state current at the differential relay. Interposing CTs or tapped relay windings were used to minimize this error.
The T35 automatically corrects for CT mismatch errors. All currents are magnitude compensated to be in units of the CTs of
one winding before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities.
The reference winding (wref) is the winding to which all currents are referred. This means that the differential and restraint
currents will be in per unit of nominal of the CTs on the reference winding. This is important to know, because the settings of
the operate characteristic of the percent differential element (pickup, breakpoints 1 and 2) are entered in terms of the same
per unit of nominal.
The reference winding is chosen by the relay to be the winding which has the smallest margin of CT primary current with
respect to winding rated current, meaning that the CTs on the reference winding will most likely begin to saturate before
those on other windings with heavy through currents. The characteristics of the reference winding CTs determine how the
percent differential element operate characteristic should be set.
The T35 determines the reference winding as follows:
1.
Calculate the rated current (Irated) for each winding:

P rated [ w ]
- , where w = 1, 2, w total
I rated [ w ] = -----------------------------------3 V nom [ w ]
(EQ 5.8)
Note: enter the self-cooled MVA rating for the Prated setting.
2.
Calculate the CT margin (Imargin) for each winding:

CT primary [ w ]
I margin = --------------------------------------- , where w = 1, 2, w total
I rated [ w ]
3.
(EQ 5.9)
Choose the winding with the lowest CT margin:
In our example, the reference winding is chosen as follows.

1.
Calculate the rated current for windings 1 and 2:
P rated [ 1 ]
100 MVA = 226.4 A
- = -------------------------------I rated [ 1 ] = ----------------------------------,
3 220 kV
3 V nom [ 1 ]
2.
P rated [ 2 ]
100 MVA - = 836.7 A
- = ---------------------------I rated [ 2 ] = ----------------------------------3 69 kV
3 V nom [ 2 ]
With these rated currents, calculate the CT margin for windings 1 and 2:
500 A - = 1.91
1500 A
primary [ 1 -] = -------------------CT primary [ 2 ]
------------------------------------I margin [ 1 ] = CT
, I margin [ 2 ] = -------------------------------------- = --------------------- = 1.79
262.4 A
836.7 A
I rated [ 1 ]
I rated [ 2 ]
3.
(EQ 5.10)
(EQ 5.11)
Since I margin [ 2 ] < I margin [ 1 ] , the reference winding wref is winding 2.
The reference winding is shown in ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT
REFERENCE WINDING.
5-78
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
The unit for calculation of the differential and restraint currents and base for the differential restraint settings is the CT primary associated with the reference winding. In this example, the unit CT is 1500:5 on winding 2.
Magnitude compensation factors (M) are the scaling values by which each winding current is multiplied to refer it to the reference winding. The T35 calculates magnitude compensation factors for each winding as follows:
I primary [ w ] V nom [ w ]
M [ w ] = ---------------------------------------------------------------------- , where w = 1, 2, w total
I primary [ w ref ] V nom [ w ref ]
(EQ 5.12)
In our example, the magnitude compensation factors are calculated as follows:

I primary [ 1 ] V nom [ 1 ]
A 220 kV- = 1.0628
- = 500
---------------------------------------M [ 1 ] = ------------------------------------------------------1500 A 69 kV
(EQ 5.13)
A 69 kV- = 1.0000
- = 1500
---------------------------------------M [ 2 ] = ------------------------------------------------------1500 A 69 kV
(EQ 5.14)
The maximum allowed magnitude compensation factor (and hence the maximum allowed CT ratio mismatch) is 32.
f) PHASE AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION
Power transformers may be connected to provide phase shift, such as the common -Y connection with its 30 phase shift.
Historically, CT connections were arranged to compensate for this phase error so that the relaying could operate correctly.
In our example, the transformer has the -Y connection. Traditionally, CTs on the Wye connected transformer winding
(winding 2) would be connected in a delta arrangement, which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta
connected winding (winding 1), so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. The Delta connection
of CTs, however, inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents. If there were
a grounding bank on the Delta winding of the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault would result in
differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such a case, it would be necessary to insert a zero sequence current
trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not
the other winding. Transformer windings that are grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow
in that winding, and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.
The T35 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically, based on the settings entered
for the transformer. All CTs are connected Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). All currents are
phase and zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities.
The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0 applied to it. The phase reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding with the lowest winding index, if one exists. For a transformer that
has no delta or zigzag windings, the first winding is chosen.
The phase compensation angle (comp), the angle by which a winding current is shifted to refer it to the phase reference
winding, is calculated by the T60 for each winding as follows:
comp[w] = | [wf ] [w] | where Rotation = ABC
comp[w] = | [w] [wf ] | where Rotation = ACB
In our example, the phase reference winding would be winding 1, the first delta winding (i.e. wf = 1). The phase compensation angle for each winding would then be calculated as follows (assuming Rotation = ABC):
comp[1] = 0 0 = 0
comp[2] = 0 (30) = 30 = 330 lag
The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that achieves the phase shift and zero
sequence removal for typical values of comp:
where:
IA[w] = uncompensated winding w phase A current

IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase A current
GE Multilin
5-79
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 57: PHASE AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION FOR TYPICAL VALUES OF comp
comp[w]
Grounding[w] = Not within zone
0
p
IA [ w ] = IA [ w ]
p
IB [ w ] = IB [ w ]
p
IC [ w ] = IC [ w ]
30 lag
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
----------IC [ w ] =
IC [ w ] - IB [ w ]
3
3
60 lag
p
IA [ w ] = IC [ w ] ,
p
IB [ w ] = IA [ w ] ,
p
IC [ w ] = IB [ w ]
90 lag
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
120 lag
p
IA [ w ] = IB [ w ]
p
IB [ w ] = IC [ w ]
p
IC [ w ] = IA [ w ]
150 lag
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
180 lag
p
IA [ w ] = IA [ w ]
p
IB [ w ] = IB [ w ]
p
IC [ w ] = IC [ w ]
210 lag
5-80
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
Grounding[w] = Within zone

2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
----------IC [ w ] =
IC [ w ] - IB [ w ]
3
3
2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I A [ w ] + --- I B [ w ] + --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I A [ w ] + --- I B [ w ] + --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
Table 57: PHASE AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION FOR TYPICAL VALUES OF comp
comp[w]
Grounding[w] = Not within zone
240 lag
2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I A [ w ] --- I B [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] --- I A [ w ] --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
IA [ w ] = IC [ w ]
p
IB [ w ] = IA [ w ]
p
IC [ w ] = IB [ w ]
270 lag
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
----------IB [ w ] =
IA [ w ] - IC [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
300 lag
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
----------IB [ w ] =
IA [ w ] - IC [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
2
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = --- I B [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I C [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = --- I C [ w ] + --- I A [ w ] + --- I B [ w ]
3
3
3
2
1
1
p
---IC [ w ] = IA [ w ] + IB [ w ] + - IC [ w ]
3
3
3
IA [ w ] = IB [ w ]
p
IB [ w ] = IC [ w ]
p
IC [ w ] = IA [ w ]
330 lag
Grounding[w] = Within zone
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I A [ w ] ------- I B [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I B [ w ] = ------- I B [ w ] ------- I C [ w ]
3
3
1
1
p
I C [ w ] = ------- I C [ w ] ------- I A [ w ]
3
3
In our example, the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would be used:
For Winding 1:
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
p
p
p
I A [ 1 ] = --- I A [ 1 ] --- I B [ 1 ] --- I C [ 1 ] ; I B [ 1 ] = --- I B [ 1 ] --- I A [ 1 ] --- I C [ 1 ] ; I C [ 1 ] = --- I C [ 1 ] --- I A [ 1 ] --- I B [ 1 ]
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
(EQ 5.15)
For Winding 2:
1
1
1
1
1
1
p
p
p
I A [ w ] = ------- I A [ 2 ] ------- I B [ 2 ] ; I B [ w ] = ------- I B [ 2 ] ------- I C [ 2 ] ; I C [ w ] = ------- I C [ 2 ] ------- I A [ 2 ]
3
3
3
3
3
3
(EQ 5.16)
g) MAGNITUDE, PHASE ANGLE, AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION

Complete magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation is as follows:
c
I A [ w ] = M [ w ] I A [ w ] , where w = 1, 2, , w total
I B [ w ] = M [ w ] I B [ w ] , where w = 1, 2, , w total
I C [ w ] = M [ w ] I C [ w ] , where w = 1, 2, , w total
where:
c
c
IA [ w ] , IB [ w ] ,
(EQ 5.17)
(EQ 5.18)
(EQ 5.19)
c
IC [ w ]
and
= magnitude, phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents
M [ w ] = magnitude compensation factor for winding w (see previous sections)
p
c
c
I A [ w ] , I B [ w ] , and I C [ w ] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents (see earlier)
GE Multilin
5-81
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
h) DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS

Differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
c
Id A = I A [1 ] + I A [ 2 ] + + I A [ w total ]
Id B = I B [1 ] + I B [ 2 ] + + I B [ w total ]
Id C = I C [1 ] + I C [ 2 ] + + I C [ w total ]
c
Ir A = max ( I A [1 ] , I A [ 2 ] , , I A [ w total ] )
Ir B = max ( I B [1 ] , I B [ 2 ] , , I B [ w total ] )
Ir C = max ( I C [1 ] , I C [ 2 ] , , I C [ w total ] )
(EQ 5.20)
(EQ 5.21)
(EQ 5.22)
(EQ 5.23)
(EQ 5.24)
(EQ 5.25)
where Id A , Id B , and Id C are the phase differential currents and Ir A , Ir B , and Ir C are the phase restraint currents.
i) TRANSFORMER WINDINGS BETWEEN TWO BREAKERS
When the relay is to protect a transformer with windings connected between two breakers, such as in a ring bus or breakerand-a-half station configuration, one of the methods for configuring currents into the relay presented below should be used
(see the Breaker-and-a-Half Scheme diagram in the Overview section of this chapter).
For this example it is assumed that winding 1 is connected between two breakers and winding 2 is connected to a single
breaker. The CTs associated with winding 1 are CTX, at 1200/5 A and CTY, at 1000/5 A. CTX is connected to current input
channels 1 through 3 inclusive and CTY is connected to current input channels 5 through 7 inclusive on a type 8H CT/VT
module in relay slot F. The CT2 on winding 2 is 5000/5 A and is connected to current input channels 1 through 4 inclusive
on a type 8F CT/VT module in relay slot M.
SETUP METHOD A (PREFERRED)
This approach is preferred because it provides increased sensitivity as the current from each individual set of CTs participates directly in the calculation of CT ratio mismatch, phase compensation, zero-sequence removal (if required) and the
differential restraint current. The concept used in this approach is to consider that each set of CTs connected to winding 1
represents a connection to an individual winding. For our example we consider the two-winding transformer to be a threewinding transformer.
1.
Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK settings menu.
PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY: 1200 A
PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: 5 A
GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: 1 A (default value)
GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A (default value)
PHASE CT F5 PRIMARY: 1000 A
PHASE CT F5 SECONDARY: 5 A
GROUND CT F5 PRIMARY: 1 A (default value)
GROUND CT F5 SECONDARY: 1 A (default value)
PHASE CT M1 PRIMARY: 5000 A
PHASE CT M1 SECONDARY: 5 A
GROUND CT M5 PRIMARY: 5000 A
GROUND CT M5 SECONDARY: 5 A
2.
Configure source n (source 1 for this example) as the current from CTX in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
settings menu.
SOURCES SOURCE 1(6)
SOURCE 1 NAME: WDG 1X

SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: F1
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: None
5-82
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
3.
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
Configure source n (source 2 for this example) as the current from CTY in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
settings menu.
SOURCES SOURCE 1(6)
SOURCE 2 NAME: WDG 1Y

SOURCE 2 PHASE CT: F5
4.
Configure source n (source 3 for this example) to be used as the current in Winding 2 in the SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
settings menu.
SOURCES SOURCE 1(6)
SOURCE 3 NAME: WDG 2"

SOURCE 3 PHASE CT: M1
SOURCE 3 GROUND CT: M1
5.
Configure the source setting of the transformer windings in the SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING n settings menu.
WINDING 1 SOURCE:
WINDING 2 SOURCE:
WINDING 3 SOURCE:
WDG 1X
WDG 1Y
WDG 2"
SETUP METHOD B (ALTERNATE)

This approach adds the current from each phase of the CT1 and CT2 together to represent the total winding 1 current. The
procedure is shown below.
1.
Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK settings menu, as shown for
Method A above.
2.
Configure Source n (Source 1 for this example) to be used as the summed current in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP
SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE n settings menu.
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: F1 + F5
3.
Configure Source n (Source 2 for this example) to be used as the Winding 2 current in the SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
settings menu.
SOURCES SOURCE n

SOURCE 2 PHASE CT: M1
SOURCE 2 GROUND CT: M1
GE Multilin
5-83
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(6)
BREAKER 1
5-84
BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON

CONTROL: Disabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 B CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 B OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 C CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 C OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 ALARM
DELAY:
0.000 s
MESSAGE
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1

TIME:
0.000 s
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:

Off
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more
breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the T35. The following settings are available for each breaker control element.
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to Enable to allow faceplate push button operations.
BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash
messages related to breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-Pole mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or 1Pole mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay
to close breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the
breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned above
is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C,
respectively.
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the
inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
BREAKER 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.
BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker
alarm reporting contact.
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among
the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after
an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
GE Multilin
5-85
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
= Disabled
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
AND
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
AND
D60, L60, and L90 devices only from trip output

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP 3-POLE
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OPEN
Off = 0
OR
61850 Select & Open

BKR ENABLED
USER 3 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
To breaker control
logic sheet 2,
842025A1
AND
SETTING
CONTROL
= Enabled
USER 2 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
AND
OR
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 CLOSE
Off = 0
OR
61850 Select & Close
SETTING
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
AND
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
AND
C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
SETTING
BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
827061AS.CDR
Figure 523: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the T35 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
5-86
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
from breaker
controlsheetlogic1,
BKR ENABLED
827061AS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
OR
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 OPEN
OR
BREAKER 1
CLOSED
(DEFAULT)
BREAKER 1
OPEN
(DEFAULT)
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
AND
AND
AND
AND
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
0
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED
can be latched using FlexLogic
= Off
BREAKER 1
TROUBLE
(DEFAULT)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD
= Off
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND
= Off
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
OR
AND
AND
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 B OPND
OR
AND
= Off
AND
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 B INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 C OPND
OR
AND
= Off
AND
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 C INTERM
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
XOR
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN

BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
AND
= Off
842025A2.CDR
Figure 524: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-87
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SWITCHES SWITCH 1(24)
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:

Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off
MESSAGE
SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD:

Off
MESSAGE
SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND:

Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 B OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 C OPENED:
Off
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 Toperate:
0.070 s
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 ALARM
DELAY:
0.000 s
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of
disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to create an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b
auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches
depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the T35.
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.
SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used
in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-Pole mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously,
or 1-Pole mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
5-88
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
close disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch
auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when
the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input
as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the
input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to
track phases B and C, respectively.
SWITCH 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation
of the poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the T35 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-89
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
= Disabled
= Enabled
SWITCH 1 OPEN
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
OR
AND
OR
AND
61850 Select & Open
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
61850 Select & Close
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
OR
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SWITCH 1 OPEN
OR
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
SETTING
SWITCH 1 MODE
AND
AND
AND
AND
= 3-Pole
= 1-Pole
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 A/3P CLSD
AND
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
SWITCH 1 A/3P OPND
= Off
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
OR
AND
AND
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST
SWITCH 1 A CLSD
SWITCH 1 A OPEN
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
AND
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
SWITCH 1 B OPND
OR
AND
= Off
AND
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
SWITCH 1 B OPEN
SWITCH 1 B INTERM
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
AND
= Off
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
AND
0
SETTING
SWITCH 1 C OPND
OR
AND
= Off
AND
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
SWITCH 1 C OPEN
SWITCH 1 C INTERM
AND
AND
AND
842026A4.CDR
Figure 525: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC
5-90
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.7 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D)
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP:
0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a
custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 58: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET
TIME
MS
RESET
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
0.00
0.68
1.03
2.9
4.9
10.5
0.05
0.70
1.05
3.0
5.0
11.0
0.10
0.72
1.1
3.1
5.1
11.5
0.15
0.74
1.2
3.2
5.2
12.0
0.20
0.76
1.3
3.3
5.3
12.5
0.25
0.78
1.4
3.4
5.4
13.0
0.30
0.80
1.5
3.5
5.5
13.5
0.35
0.82
1.6
3.6
5.6
14.0
0.40
0.84
1.7
3.7
5.7
14.5
0.45
0.86
1.8
3.8
5.8
15.0
0.48
0.88
1.9
3.9
5.9
15.5
0.50
0.90
2.0
4.0
6.0
16.0
0.52
0.91
2.1
4.1
6.5
16.5
0.54
0.92
2.2
4.2
7.0
17.0
0.56
0.93
2.3
4.3
7.5
17.5
0.58
0.94
2.4
4.4
8.0
18.0
0.60
0.95
2.5
4.5
8.5
18.5
0.62
0.96
2.6
4.6
9.0
19.0
0.64
0.97
2.7
4.7
9.5
19.5
0.66
0.98
2.8
4.8
10.0
20.0
NOTE
TIME
MS
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
GE Multilin
5-91
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING
Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is
clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple

from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 526: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE
5-92
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 527: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 528: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard recloser curves available for the T35 are displayed in the following graphs.
GE Multilin
5-93
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
2
1
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.5
0.2
GE103
GE104
0.1
GE105
0.05
GE102
GE101
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842723A1.CDR
Figure 529: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
GE142
20
10
5
TIME (sec)
GE138
2
GE120
1
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842725A1.CDR
Figure 530: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
5-94
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
TIME (sec)
10
GE201
GE151
2
GE140
GE134
GE137
0.5
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 531: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
TIME (sec)
20
GE141
10
GE131
GE200
2
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842728A1.CDR
Figure 532: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
GE Multilin
5-95
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50
20
GE164
10
TIME (sec)
5
2
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
GE163
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842729A1.CDR
Figure 533: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
5
TIME (sec)
2
1
0.5
GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE117
GE118
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842726A1.CDR
Figure 534: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
5-96
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
20
10
5
GE122
TIME (sec)
1
0.5
GE114
0.2
0.1
GE111
GE121
0.05
GE107
GE115
GE112
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842724A1.CDR
Figure 535: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
TIME (sec)
10
5
GE135
GE119
1
0.5
0.2
1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
15
20
842727A1.CDR
Figure 536: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
GE Multilin
5-97
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 537: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the T35 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described
later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and
human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
5-98
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 59: T35 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE
STATE
EXAMPLE FORMAT
CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input
On
Cont Ip On
Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact

closed).
Off
Cont Ip Off
Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external

contact open).
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Current On
Cont Op 1 Ion
Current is flowing through the contact.
Voltage On
Cont Op 1 VOn
Voltage exists across the contact.
Voltage Off
Cont Op 1 VOff
Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Direct Input
On
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element
(Analog)
Pickup
PHASE TOC1 PKP
The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting

of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout
PHASE TOC1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP

operand.
Operate
PHASE TOC1 OP
The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup

setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Block
PHASE TOC1 BLK
Higher than
Counter 1 HI
The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
Equal to
Counter 1 EQL
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than
Counter 1 LO
The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
On
On
Logic 1
Off
Off
Logic 0
Remote Input
On
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input
On
Virt Ip 1 On
The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output
On
Virt Op 1 On
The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.

evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").
Element
(Digital Counter)
Fixed
GE Multilin
5-99
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 510: T35 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed

DIRECT DEVICES
DIRECT DEVICE 1On
DIRECT DEVICE 16On

DIRECT DEVICE 1Off
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off
Flag is set, logic=1

DIRECT INPUT/
OUTPUT
CHANNEL
MONITORING
DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM

DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM
ELEMENT:
Breaker arcing
BKR ARC 1 OP
BKR ARC 2 OP
Breaker arcing current 1 has operated

Breaker arcing current 2 has operated
ELEMENT:
Breaker control
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD

BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
Breaker 1 open command initiated

Breaker 1 close command initiated
Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase A is open
Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is open
Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is open
Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 2...
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Digital counter 1 output is more than comparison value

Digital counter 1 output is equal to comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is less than comparison value
Counter 2 to Counter 8
Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FlexElement 1 has picked up

FlexElement 1 has operated
FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to FxE 16
Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
GROUND TOC1 PKP

GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
ELEMENT:
Digital counters
ELEMENT:
FlexElements
ELEMENT:
Ground time
overcurrent
5-100
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT
Non-volatile latches
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)

Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
LATCH 2 to LATCH 16
Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT:
Phase time
overcurrent
PHASE TOC1 PKP

PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 to TOC6
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
ELEMENT:
Selector switch
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)

First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM

SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
ELEMENT:
Setting group
SELECTOR 2
Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
SETTING GROUP ACT 1

SETTING GROUP ACT 2
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Setting group 1 is active

ELEMENT:
SH STAT GND STG1 PKP
Sub-harmonic stator SH STAT GND STG1 DPO
ground fault detector SH STAT GND STG1 OP
SH STAT GND STG2 PKP
SH STAT GND STG2 DPO
SH STAT GND STG2 OP
SH STAT GND OC PKP
SH STAT GND OC DPO
SH STAT GND OC OP
SH STAT GND TRB PKP
SH STAT GND TRB DPO
SH STAT GND TRB OP
-------------------------
ELEMENT:
Disturbance
detector
Source 1 disturbance detector has operated

GE Multilin
SRC1 50DD OP
SRC2 50DD OP
SRC3 50DD OP
SRC4 50DD OP
SRC5 50DD OP
SRC6 50DD OP
5-101
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Disconnect switch
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD

SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
SWITCH 1 C OPEN
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated

Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Disconnect switch 1 is closed
Disconnect switch 1 is open
Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
SWITCH 2...
Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
channel tests
TELEPRO CH1 FAIL

TELEPRO CH2 FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST
Channel 1 failed
Channel 2 failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
CRC detected lost packet on channel 2
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
inputs/outputs
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On

Flag is set, Logic =1

ELEMENT
Trip bus
TRIP BUS 1 PKP

TRIP BUS 1 OP
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up.

Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates.
TRIP BUS 2...
Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
ELEMENT:
Transformer
instantaneous
differential
XFMR INST DIFF OP

XFMR INST DIFF OP A
XFMR INST DIFF OP B
XFMR INST DIFF OP C
At least one phase of transformer instantaneous differential has operated

Phase A of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
Phase B of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
Phase C of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
ELEMENT:
Transformer percent
differential
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A

XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP A
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C
Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase A

Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase B
Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase C
The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A
The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B
The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase C
The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A
The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B
The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase C
At least one phase of transformer percent differential has operated
Phase A of transformer percent differential has operated
Phase B of transformer percent differential has operated
Phase C of transformer percent differential has operated
FIXED OPERANDS
Off
Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;

used as Disable by other features.
On
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 A CLSD
SWITCH 1 A OPEN
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
SWITCH 1 B OPEN
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact inputs
5-102
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
On
On
Off
Off
(will not appear unless ordered)


GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
current
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
IOn
IOn

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
voltage
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
VOn
VOn

Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
VOff
VOff

INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Direct inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
DIRECT INPUT 32 On
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote doublepoint status inputs
RemDPS Ip 1 BAD
RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM
RemDPS Ip 1 OFF
RemDPS Ip 1 ON
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate
state.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off.
Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on.
REMDPS Ip 2...
Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote inputs
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
REMOTE INPUT 2 On
REMOTE INPUT 2 On
REMOTE INPUT 32 On

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual inputs
Virt Ip 1 On
Virt Ip 2 On
Virt Ip 3 On
Virt Ip 64 On

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual outputs
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Op 3 On
Virt Op 96 On

LED INDICATORS:
Fixed front panel
LEDs
LED IN SERVICE
LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on.
Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on.
LED INDICATORS:
LED test
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LEDs
LED USER 1
Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on.
LED USER 2 to 48
The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF

ACCESS LOC SETG ON
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF
ACCESS LOC CMND ON
ACCESS REM SETG OFF
ACCESS REM SETG ON
ACCESS REM CMND OFF
ACCESS REM CMND ON
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Asserted when local setting access is disabled.

Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
Asserted when local command access is disabled.
Asserted when local command access is enabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the T35.
GE Multilin
5-103
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS

OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 On
REMOTE DEVICE 2 On
REMOTE DEVICE 2 On
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On

REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off

REMOTE DEVICE 2 Off
REMOTE DEVICE 3 Off
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off

RESETTING
RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below).

Communications source of the reset command.
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command.
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command.
SELFDIAGNOSTICS
ANY MAJOR ERROR

ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
BATTERY FAIL
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
MAINTENANCE ALERT
PORT 1 OFFLINE
PORT 2 OFFLINE
PORT 3 OFFLINE
PORT 4 OFFLINE
PORT 5 OFFLINE
PORT 6 OFFLINE
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
PROCESS BUS FAILURE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
RRTD COMM FAIL
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
TEMP MONITOR
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)

Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR
TEMP MONITOR
Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum

operating temperature (80C)
USERPROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
Pushbutton number 1 is in the On position

Pushbutton number 1 is in the Off position
Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the On position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12
Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name
or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic operators table.
5-104
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Table 511: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES
NUMBER OF INPUTS
OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...
NOT
input is 0
OR
2 to 16
any input is 1
AND
2 to 16
all inputs are 1
NOR
2 to 16
all inputs are 0
NAND
2 to 16
any input is 0
XOR
only one input is 1
Table 512: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE
SYNTAX
DESCRIPTION
Editor
INSERT
Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE
Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End
END
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in

the list of processed FlexLogic parameters.
One-shot
Logic
gate
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge.
NOTES
NEGATIVE ONE
SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge.
DUAL ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and

negative going edges.
A one shot refers to a single input gate

that generates a pulse in response to an
edge on the input. The output from a one
shot is True (positive) for only one pass
through the FlexLogic equation. There is
a maximum of 64 one shots.
NOT
Logical NOT
Operates on the previous parameter.
OR(2)
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
AND(2)
AND(16)
2 input AND gate
16 input AND gate
NOR(2)
NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate
16 input NOR gate
NAND(2)
NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate
16 input NAND gate
XOR(2)
2 input Exclusive OR gate
LATCH (S,R)
Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is

the reset input. The parameter preceding
the reset input is the set input.
Timer
TIMER 1
TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings.
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings.
The timer is started by the preceding

parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
virtual
output
= Virt Op 1
= Virt Op 96
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual

output 1.
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual

output 96.
The virtual output is set by the preceding

parameter
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES

When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used
once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.
GE Multilin
5-105
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
NOTE
FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
1:
Range: FlexLogic operands
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
2:
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:

END
MESSAGE
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
FLEXLOGIC
TIMER 1
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY:
0
MESSAGE
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5-106
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.6 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: Signed
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: Level
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: Over
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: milliseconds
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.
GE Multilin
5-107
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
AND
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY:
RUN
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Actual Value
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
tPKP
+
-
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 OP
tRST
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A3.CDR
Figure 538: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC
The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the
Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.
5-108
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 539: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 540: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING
GE Multilin
5-109
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 513: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
dcmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and IN inputs.
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

(Xfmr Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag)
IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
differential currents)
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL
HARMONIC CONTENT
(Xfmr Harm2 Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag)
BASE = 100%
XFMR RESTRAINING CURRENT

(Xfmr Iar, Ibr, and Icr Mag)
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.
5-110
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.7 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC NON-VOLATILE LATCHES LATCH 1(16)
LATCH 1
LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 SET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:
LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING
LATCH N
TYPE
LATCH N
SET
LATCH N
RESET
LATCH N
ON
LATCH N
OFF
Reset
Dominant
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Set
Dominant
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SETTING
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LATCH 1 SET:
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Off=0
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SETTING
LATCH 1 TYPE:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SET
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
SETTING
LATCH 1 SET:
Off=0
RESET
842005A1.CDR
Figure 541: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-111
5 SETTINGS
5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the
Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SETTING GROUP 1
TRANSFORMER
See below.
MESSAGE
PHASE CURRENT
See page 5118.
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT
See page 5125.
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if
no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).
5.6.3 TRANSFORMER ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
MESSAGE
PERCENT
DIFFERENTIAL
See page 5113.
INSTANTANEOUS
DIFFERENTIAL
See page 5117.
This menu contains the settings for the transformer percent and instantaneous differential elements.
5-112
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
b) PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
PERCENT
DIFFERENTIAL
FUNCTION: Disabled
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
MESSAGE
SLOPE 1: 25%
MESSAGE
BREAK 1: 2.000 pu
MESSAGE
BREAK 2: 8.000 pu
MESSAGE
SLOPE 2: 100%
MESSAGE
INRUSH INHIBIT
FUNCTION: Adapt. 2nd
Range: Disabled, Adapt. 2nd, Trad. 2nd
MESSAGE
INRUSH INHIBIT
MODE: Per phase
Range: Per phase, 2-out-of-3, Average
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
INRUSH INHIBIT
LEVEL: 20.0% fo
Range: 1.0 to 40.0% of f0 in steps of 0.1
OVEREXCITN INHIBIT
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, 5th
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
OVEREXCITN INHIBIT
LEVEL: 10.0% fo
Range: 1.0 to 40.0% of f0 in steps of 0.1
PERCENT DIFF BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The calculation of differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents for the purposes of the percent differential element is described
by the following block diagram, where has as its output the vector sum of inputs, and max has as its output the input of
maximum magnitude; these calculations are performed for each phase.
The differential current is calculated as a vector sum of currents from all windings after magnitude and angle compensation.
I d = I 1 comp + I 2 comp + I 3 comp + I 4 comp + I 5 comp + I 6 comp
(EQ 5.26)
The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated currents.
I r = K max ( I 1comp , I 2 comp , I 3comp , I 4comp , I 5 comp , I 6 comp )
(EQ 5.27)
The element operates if Id > PKP and Id > Ir, where PKP represents a differential pickup setting and K is a restraint factor.
GE Multilin
5-113
5 SETTINGS
Winding 1
current
waveform
Winding 2
current
waveform
Magnitude
phase angle, and
zero sequence
compensation
(as required)
Magnitude
phase angle, and
zero sequence
compensation
(as required)
Magnitude
phase angle, and
zero sequence
compensation
(as required)
Decaying dc
offset filter
Decaying dc
offset filter
Decaying dc
offset filter
Discrete Fourier
Transform
Discrete Fourier
Transform
Discrete Fourier
Transform
Winding n
current
waveform
...
MAX
Differential
phasor
Restraint
phasor
828714A1.CDR
Figure 542: PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL CALCULATIONS

The T35 percent differential element is based on a configurable dual-breakpoint / dual-slope differential restraint characteristic. The purpose of the preset characteristic is to define the differential restraint ratio for the transformer winding currents
at different loading conditions and distinguish between external and internal faults. Differential restraint ratio variations
occur due to current unbalance between primary and secondary windings and can be caused by the following:
1.
Inherent CT inaccuracies.
2.
Onload tap changer operation: it adjusts the transformer ratio and consequently the winding currents.
3.
CT saturation.
10
Breakpoint 2
8
Id (Ir)
Transition region
(cubic spline)
Slope 2
region
Breakpoint 1
2
Pickup
Ir
10
828750A1.CDR
Figure 543: PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC
5-114
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. It is
chosen, based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal operating conditions. Two factors
may create differential current during the normal transformer operation: errors due to CT inaccuracies and current variation due to onload tap changer operation.
A setting of 0.1 to 0.3 is generally recommended (the factory default is 0.1 pu).
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 1: This setting defines the differential restraint during normal operating conditions
to assure sensitivity to internal faults. The setting must be high enough, however, to cope with CT saturation errors during saturation under small current magnitudes but significant and long lasting DC components (such as during distant
external faults in vicinity of generators).
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 1 and PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 2: The settings for break 1 and break
2 depend very much on the capability of CTs to correctly transform primary into secondary currents during external
faults. Break 2 should be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate some CTs due to an AC component
alone. Break 1 should be set below a current that would cause CT saturation due to DC components and/or residual
magnetism. The latter may be as high as 80% of the nominal flux, effectively reducing the CT capabilities by the factor
of 5.
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 2: The slope 2 setting ensures stability during heavy through fault conditions,
where CT saturation results in high differential current. Slope 2 should be set high to cater for the worst case where
one set of CTs saturates but the other set doesn't. In such a case the ratio of the differential current to restraint current
can be as high as 95 to 98%.
INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION: This setting provides a choice for 2nd harmonic differential protection blocking during
magnetizing inrush conditions. Two choices are available: Adapt. 2nd adaptive 2nd harmonic, and Trad. 2nd traditional 2nd harmonic blocking. The adaptive 2nd harmonic restraint responds to magnitudes and phase angles of the
2nd harmonic and the fundamental frequency component. The traditional 2nd harmonic restraint responds to the ratio
of magnitudes of the 2nd harmonic and fundamental frequency components. If low second harmonic ratios during
magnetizing inrush conditions are not expected, the relay should be set to traditional way of restraining.
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE: This setting specifies mode of blocking on magnetizing inrush conditions. Modern transformers may produce small 2nd harmonic ratios during inrush conditions. This may result undesired tripping of the protected transformer. Reducing the 2nd harmonic inhibit threshold may jeopardize dependability and speed of protection.
The 2nd harmonic ratio, if low, causes problems in one phase only. This may be utilized as a mean to ensure security
by applying cross-phase blocking rather than lowering the inrush inhibit threshold.
If set to Per phase, the relay performs inrush inhibit individually in each phase. If used on modern transformers, this
setting should be combined with adaptive 2nd harmonic function.
If set to 2-out-of-3, the relay checks 2nd harmonic level in all three phases individually. If any two phases establish a
blocking condition, the remaining phase is restrained automatically.
If set to Average, the relay first calculates the average 2nd harmonic ratio, then applies the inrush threshold to the
calculated average. This mode works only in conjunction with the traditional 2nd harmonic function.
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL: This setting specifies the level of 2nd harmonic component in the transformer magnetizing
inrush current above which the percent differential element will be inhibited from operating. The value of the INRUSH
INHIBIT MODE setting must be taken into account when programming this value. The INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL is typically
set to 20%.
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT MODE: An overexcitation condition resulting from an increased volts/hertz ratio poses a
danger to the protected transformer, hence the volts/hertz protection. A given transformer can, however, tolerate an
overfluxing condition for a limited time, as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. Instantaneous
tripping of the transformer from the differential protection is not desirable. The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic
ratio for inhibiting its differential function during overexcitation conditions.
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT LEVEL: This setting is provided to block the differential protection during overexcitation.
When the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked. The
overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis.
GE Multilin
5-115
5 SETTINGS
The relay produces three FlexLogic operands that may be used for testing or for special applications such as building
custom logic (1-out-of-3) or supervising some protection functions (ground time overcurrent, for example) from the 2nd harmonic inhibit.
SETTING
SETTINGS
FUNCTION:
PICKUP:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SLOPE 1:
SETTING
BREAK 1:
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A
Off = 0
SLOPE 2:
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C
ACTUAL VALUES
BREAK 2:
PERCENT DIFF BLOCK:
AND
DIFF PHASOR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP A
RUN
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B
Iad
Iad
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C
Ibd
Iar
Icd
AND
AND
RUN
Ibd
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ACTUAL VALUES
Ibr
REST PHASOR
AND
Iar
Icr
SETTING
SETTING
INRUSH INHIBIT
FUNCTION:
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL:
Disabled
Trad. 2nd
ACTUAL VALUES
DIFF 2ND HARM
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP
RUN
Icr
Adapt. 2nd
OR
Icd
Ibr
AND
=0
=1
AND
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE:

RUN
RUN
RUN
Iad2
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad2 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A
Ibd2 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B
Icd2 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C
Ibd2
Icd2
SETTING
OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Disabled = 0
OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT

LEVEL:
5th = 1
RUN
ACTUAL VALUES
RUN
DIFF 5TH HARM

Iad5
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad5 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A
Ibd5 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B
Icd5 > LEVEL
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C
Ibd5
Icd5
828001A6.CDR
Figure 544: PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC
5-116
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
c) INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) TRANSFORMER INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
INSTANTANEOUS
DIFFERENTIAL
INST DIFFERENTIAL
FUNCTION: Disabled
INST DIFFERENTIAL
PICKUP: 8.000 pu
MESSAGE
INST DIFF BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
INST DIFFERENTIAL
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
INST DIFFERENTIAL
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The instantaneous differential element acts as an instantaneous overcurrent element responding to the measured differential current magnitude (filtered fundamental frequency component) and applying a user-selectable pickup threshold. The
pickup threshold should be set greater than the maximum spurious differential current that could be encountered under
non-internal fault conditions (typically magnetizing inrush current or an external fault with extremely severe CT saturation).
SETTING
INST DIFFERENTIAL
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
RUN
INST DIFF BLOCK:

RUN
Off=0
ACTUAL VALUE
RUN
XFMR INST DIFF OP A
INST DIFFERENTIAL
PICKUP:
XFMR INST DIFF OP B

XFMR INST DIFF OP C
Iad > PICKUP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Ibd > PICKUP
OR
XFMR INST DIFF OP
Icd > PICKUP

828000A1.CDR
DIFF PHASOR
Iad
Ibd
Icd
Figure 545: INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-117
5 SETTINGS
5.6.4 PHASE CURRENT
a) INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics.
The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 514: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE
IEC
GE TYPE IAC
OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse
IEC Curve A (BS142)
IAC Extremely Inverse
I2t
IEEE Very Inverse
IEC Curve B (BS142)
IAC Very Inverse
FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEC Curve C (BS142)
IAC Inverse
Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
Definite Time
IEEE Moderately Inverse
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
5-118
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A
tr
---------------------------------- + B
----------------------------------2
I - p
T = TDM --------------,
T
TDM
=
I
RESET
1 ----------------
I pickup 1
I pickup
where:
(EQ 5.28)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 515: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE
TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse
28.2
0.1217
2.0000
29.1
IEEE Very Inverse
19.61
0.491
2.0000
21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.1140
0.02000
4.85
Table 516: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5
11.341
4.761
1.823
1.001
0.648
0.464
0.355
0.285
0.237
0.203
1.0
22.682
9.522
3.647
2.002
1.297
0.927
0.709
0.569
0.474
0.407
2.0
45.363
19.043
7.293
4.003
2.593
1.855
1.418
1.139
0.948
0.813
4.0
90.727
38.087
14.587
8.007
5.187
3.710
2.837
2.277
1.897
1.626
6.0
136.090
57.130
21.880
12.010
7.780
5.564
4.255
3.416
2.845
2.439
8.0
181.454
76.174
29.174
16.014
10.374
7.419
5.674
4.555
3.794
3.252
10.0
226.817
95.217
36.467
20.017
12.967
9.274
7.092
5.693
4.742
4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE

0.5
8.090
3.514
1.471
0.899
0.654
0.526
0.450
0.401
0.368
0.345
1.0
16.179
7.028
2.942
1.798
1.308
1.051
0.900
0.802
0.736
0.689
2.0
32.358
14.055
5.885
3.597
2.616
2.103
1.799
1.605
1.472
1.378
4.0
64.716
28.111
11.769
7.193
5.232
4.205
3.598
3.209
2.945
2.756
6.0
97.074
42.166
17.654
10.790
7.849
6.308
5.397
4.814
4.417
4.134
8.0
129.432
56.221
23.538
14.387
10.465
8.410
7.196
6.418
5.889
5.513
10.0
161.790
70.277
29.423
17.983
13.081
10.513
8.995
8.023
7.361
6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE

0.5
3.220
1.902
1.216
0.973
0.844
0.763
0.706
0.663
0.630
0.603
1.0
6.439
3.803
2.432
1.946
1.688
1.526
1.412
1.327
1.260
1.207
2.0
12.878
7.606
4.864
3.892
3.377
3.051
2.823
2.653
2.521
2.414
4.0
25.756
15.213
9.729
7.783
6.753
6.102
5.647
5.307
5.041
4.827
6.0
38.634
22.819
14.593
11.675
10.130
9.153
8.470
7.960
7.562
7.241
8.0
51.512
30.426
19.458
15.567
13.507
12.204
11.294
10.614
10.083
9.654
10.0
64.390
38.032
24.322
19.458
16.883
15.255
14.117
13.267
12.604
12.068
GE Multilin
5-119
5 SETTINGS
IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K
tr
---------------------------------------------------------------------------2
T = TDM ( I I pickup ) E 1 , T RESET = TDM 1 ( I I
pickup )
where:
(EQ 5.29)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 517: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE
IEC Curve A (BS142)
TR
0.140
0.020
9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142)
13.500
1.000
43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142)
80.000
2.000
58.2
IEC Short Inverse
0.050
0.040
0.500
Table 518: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.05
0.860
0.501
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.192
0.176
0.165
0.156
0.149
0.10
1.719
1.003
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.384
0.353
0.330
0.312
0.297
0.20
3.439
2.006
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.767
0.706
0.659
0.623
0.594
0.40
6.878
4.012
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.535
1.411
1.319
1.247
1.188
0.60
10.317
6.017
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.302
2.117
1.978
1.870
1.782
0.80
13.755
8.023
5.042
3.984
3.424
3.070
2.822
2.637
2.493
2.376
1.00
17.194
10.029
6.302
4.980
4.280
3.837
3.528
3.297
3.116
2.971
0.05
1.350
0.675
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.135
0.113
0.096
0.084
0.075
0.10
2.700
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.270
0.225
0.193
0.169
0.150
0.20
5.400
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.540
0.450
0.386
0.338
0.300
0.40
10.800
5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
1.080
0.900
0.771
0.675
0.600
0.60
16.200
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
1.350
1.157
1.013
0.900
0.80
21.600
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.800
1.543
1.350
1.200
1.00
27.000
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
2.250
1.929
1.688
1.500
0.05
3.200
1.333
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.114
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.040
0.10
6.400
2.667
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.229
0.167
0.127
0.100
0.081
0.20
12.800
5.333
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.457
0.333
0.254
0.200
0.162
0.40
25.600
10.667
4.000
2.133
1.333
0.914
0.667
0.508
0.400
0.323
0.60
38.400
16.000
6.000
3.200
2.000
1.371
1.000
0.762
0.600
0.485
0.80
51.200
21.333
8.000
4.267
2.667
1.829
1.333
1.016
0.800
0.646
1.00
64.000
26.667
10.000
5.333
3.333
2.286
1.667
1.270
1.000
0.808
0.026
IEC CURVE A
IEC CURVE B
IEC CURVE C
IEC SHORT TIME

0.05
0.153
0.089
0.056
0.044
0.038
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.10
0.306
0.178
0.111
0.088
0.075
0.067
0.062
0.058
0.054
0.052
0.20
0.612
0.356
0.223
0.175
0.150
0.135
0.124
0.115
0.109
0.104
0.40
1.223
0.711
0.445
0.351
0.301
0.269
0.247
0.231
0.218
0.207
0.60
1.835
1.067
0.668
0.526
0.451
0.404
0.371
0.346
0.327
0.311
0.80
2.446
1.423
0.890
0.702
0.602
0.538
0.494
0.461
0.435
0.415
1.00
3.058
1.778
1.113
0.877
0.752
0.673
0.618
0.576
0.544
0.518
5-120
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D
E
B
tr
T = TDM A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM ------------------------------(
C
I
I
2
I
I
I
I
(
(
C
)
(
(
C
)
pkp
pkp
pkp
1 ( I I pkp )
where:
(EQ 5.30)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is Timed)
Table 519: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE
TR
IAC Extreme Inverse
0.0040
0.6379
IAC Very Inverse
0.0900
0.7955
0.6200
1.7872
0.2461
6.008
0.1000
1.2885
7.9586
IAC Inverse
0.2078
4.678
0.8630
0.8000
0.4180
0.1947
0.990
IAC Short Inverse
0.0428
0.0609
0.6200
0.0010
0.0221
0.222
Table 520: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5
1.699
0.749
0.303
0.178
0.123
0.093
0.074
0.062
0.053
0.046
1.0
3.398
1.498
0.606
0.356
0.246
0.186
0.149
0.124
0.106
0.093
2.0
6.796
2.997
1.212
0.711
0.491
0.372
0.298
0.248
0.212
0.185
4.0
13.591
5.993
2.423
1.422
0.983
0.744
0.595
0.495
0.424
0.370
6.0
20.387
8.990
3.635
2.133
1.474
1.115
0.893
0.743
0.636
0.556
8.0
27.183
11.987
4.846
2.844
1.966
1.487
1.191
0.991
0.848
0.741
10.0
33.979
14.983
6.058
3.555
2.457
1.859
1.488
1.239
1.060
0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE

0.5
1.451
0.656
0.269
0.172
0.133
0.113
0.101
0.093
0.087
0.083
1.0
2.901
1.312
0.537
0.343
0.266
0.227
0.202
0.186
0.174
0.165
2.0
5.802
2.624
1.075
0.687
0.533
0.453
0.405
0.372
0.349
0.331
4.0
11.605
5.248
2.150
1.374
1.065
0.906
0.810
0.745
0.698
0.662
6.0
17.407
7.872
3.225
2.061
1.598
1.359
1.215
1.117
1.046
0.992
8.0
23.209
10.497
4.299
2.747
2.131
1.813
1.620
1.490
1.395
1.323
10.0
29.012
13.121
5.374
3.434
2.663
2.266
2.025
1.862
1.744
1.654
0.5
0.578
0.375
0.266
0.221
0.196
0.180
0.168
0.160
0.154
0.148
1.0
1.155
0.749
0.532
0.443
0.392
0.360
0.337
0.320
0.307
0.297
2.0
2.310
1.499
1.064
0.885
0.784
0.719
0.674
0.640
0.614
0.594
4.0
4.621
2.997
2.128
1.770
1.569
1.439
1.348
1.280
1.229
1.188
6.0
6.931
4.496
3.192
2.656
2.353
2.158
2.022
1.921
1.843
1.781
8.0
9.242
5.995
4.256
3.541
3.138
2.878
2.695
2.561
2.457
2.375
10.0
11.552
7.494
5.320
4.426
3.922
3.597
3.369
3.201
3.072
2.969
0.025
IAC INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE

0.5
0.072
0.047
0.035
0.031
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.026
0.025
1.0
0.143
0.095
0.070
0.061
0.057
0.054
0.052
0.051
0.050
0.049
2.0
0.286
0.190
0.140
0.123
0.114
0.108
0.105
0.102
0.100
0.099
4.0
0.573
0.379
0.279
0.245
0.228
0.217
0.210
0.204
0.200
0.197
6.0
0.859
0.569
0.419
0.368
0.341
0.325
0.314
0.307
0.301
0.296
8.0
1.145
0.759
0.559
0.490
0.455
0.434
0.419
0.409
0.401
0.394
10.0
1.431
0.948
0.699
0.613
0.569
0.542
0.524
0.511
0.501
0.493
GE Multilin
5-121
5 SETTINGS
I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100
100
----------------------------------------------------I 2 , T RESET = TDM I 2
T = TDM ----------------------------- I pickup
I pickup
where:
(EQ 5.31)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 521: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.01
0.44
0.25
0.11
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.10
4.44
2.50
1.11
0.63
0.40
0.28
0.20
0.16
0.12
0.10
1.00
44.44
25.00
11.11
6.25
4.00
2.78
2.04
1.56
1.23
1.00
10.00
444.44
250.00
111.11
62.50
40.00
27.78
20.41
15.63
12.35
10.00
100.00
4444.4
2500.0
1111.1
625.00
400.00
277.78
204.08
156.25
123.46
100.00
600.00
26666.7
15000.0
6666.7
3750.0
2400.0
1666.7
1224.5
937.50
740.74
600.00
FLEXCURVES:
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM FlexCurve Time at ----------------
I pickup
I
when ---------------- 1.00
I pickup
I
T RESET = TDM FlexCurve Time at ----------------
I pickup
where:
I
when ---------------- 0.98
I pickup
(EQ 5.32)
(EQ 5.33)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
where:
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup
(EQ 5.34)
T RESET = TDM in seconds
(EQ 5.35)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The T35 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for additional details.
5-122
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
b) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE

RESTRAINT: Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:

Off
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
1.00
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse Time overcurrent
curves characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is
blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
GE Multilin
5-123
Multiplier for Pickup Current
5 SETTINGS
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage

818784A4.CDR
Figure 546: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
INPUT:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off=0
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP:
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
CURVE:
PHASE TOC1
SOURCE:
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
RESET:
IB
IC
AND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
VAB
VBC
VCA
VAC
VBA
VCB
RUN
MULTIPLY INPUTS
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase A
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase B
Set
Calculate Multiplier
Set
Set
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase C
RUN
IA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE TOC1 A PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 A DPO
t
AND
RUN
IB
PHASE TOC1 A OP
PHASE TOC1 B PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 B DPO
t
AND
RUN
IC
PHASE TOC1 B OP
PHASE TOC1 C PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 C DPO
PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING
OR
PHASE TOC1 VOLT

RESTRAINT:
PHASE TOC1 PKP
OR
PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND
PHASE TOC1 DPO

827072A4.CDR
Figure 547: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-124
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.6.5 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1(6)
GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
1.00
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to
the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from
0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP:
GROUND TOC1
CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1
RESET:
RUN
IG PICKUP
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC1 OP
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827036A3.VSD
Figure 548: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-125
5 SETTINGS
5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.7.2 TRIP BUS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS TRIP BUS 1(6)
TRIP BUS 1
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 RESET

DELAY:
0.00 s
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING: Disabled
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 RESET:

Off
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 TARGET:

Self-reset
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary
is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the
desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned
to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.
5-126
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Figure 549: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY

The following settings are available.
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is
used.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be
set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an
input to the trip bus.
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when
lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the
RESET OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via
communications will reset the trip bus output.
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
***
OR
AND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP

DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
TPKP
Latch
= Off
TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
842023A1.CDR
Figure 550: TRIP BUS LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-127
5 SETTINGS
5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
FUNCTION: Disabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK:

Off
MESSAGE
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

Off
GROUP 1 NAME:
GROUP 2 NAME:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 NAME:
SETTING GROUP
EVENTS: Disabled
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED
ELEMENTS settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the
particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a
given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lowernumbered groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically
becomes active if no other group is active.
The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings
groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular
settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.
5-128
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)
CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)
OR (2)
PHASE TOC1 PKP
NOT
PHASE TOC2 PKP
NOT
AND (3)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10
END
OR (2)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
AND (3)
842789A1.CDR
Figure 551: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

Off
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-129
5 SETTINGS
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out
of range.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct threebit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word
is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established
by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPUP MODE is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
5-130
A2
A1
A0
POSITION
rest
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is
applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is
Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging
input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2)
lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit
control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The preselected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under
the Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and
three-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up
the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and
an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to Synchronize selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the
selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR
ALARM).
The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in
redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:

EVENT NAME
DESCRIPTION
SELECTOR 1 POS Z
Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.
GE Multilin
5-131
5 SETTINGS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 552: TIME-OUT MODE
5-132
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 553: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of
the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS
2"
3"

SELECTOR 1 POS 4"

Off
Off
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH
menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
GE Multilin
5-133
5 SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled

SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
ON
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"

SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT
SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:

SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
ACTUAL VALUE
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1
RUN
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off = 0
step up
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 POS 1
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off = 0
three-bit control input
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 POS 2
acknowledge
ON
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

3-bit acknowledge

3-bit position out
OR
Off = 0
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
Figure 554: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
5-134
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.7.5 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS COUNTER 1(8)
COUNTER 1
COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
MESSAGE
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:

Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set
value.
COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.
GE Multilin
5-135
5 SETTINGS
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1.
2.
When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
PRESET
3.
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
AND
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off = 0
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
SETTING
CALCULATE
VALUE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off = 0
Count more than Comp.

Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0
SET TO PRESET VALUE

SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
OR
STORE DATE & TIME
Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 555: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
5-136
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.7.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
BREAKER 2
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
BREAKER 3
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
BREAKER 4
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
BREAKER 5
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
BREAKER 6
ARCING CURRENT
MESSAGE
THERMAL OVERLOAD
PROTECTION
See below.
See page 5140.
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS BREAKER 1(6) ARCING CURRENT
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
BKR 1 ARC AMP

FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 ARC AMP

SOURCE: SRC 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-B:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-C:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:

1000 kA2-cyc
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
There is one breaker arcing current element available per CT bank, with a minimum of two elements. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing
through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand
to 1. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
GE Multilin
5-137
5 SETTINGS
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the
operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured
current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations. Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of
the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature, and reset of an internal low-set overcurrent function. Correction is implemented to account for a non-zero reset time of the overcurrent function.
Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE
BREAKER 1(6) menus.
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A(C): Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used to
trip the breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, the same operand should be configured to initiate arcing current
calculations for poles A, B and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, per-pole tripping operands should
be configured to initiate the calculations for the poles that are actually tripped.
BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is
initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
Initiate
Breaker
Contacts
Part
Arc
Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kAcycle)
Programmable
Start Delay
Start
Integration
100 ms
Stop
Integration
Figure 556: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
5-138
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP FUNCTION:
AND
SETTING
Disabled=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP DELAY:
Enabled=1
OR
SETTING
100 ms
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK:
Off=0
AND
SETTINGS
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-A:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-B:
Off=0
OR
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT-C:
Off=0
AND
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP SOURCE:
RUN
Integrate
SETTING
AND
RUN
Integrate
IB
IB 2 -Cycle
IC 2 -Cycle
IC
AND
SETTING
Add to
Accumulator
IA 2 -Cycle
IA
Select
Highest
Value
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP LIMIT:
2
KA * Cycle Limit
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BKR1 ARC OP
BKR1 ARC DPO
RUN
COMMAND
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS:
Integrate
ACTUAL VALUE
Set All To Zero
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A
NO=0
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B
YES=1
BKR 1 ARCING AMP C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A
827071A3.CDR
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME
Figure 557: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-139
5 SETTINGS
c) THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL
PROTECTION 1(2)
THERMAL
PROTECTION 1
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
SOURCE: SRC1
MESSAGE
BASE CURR: 0.80 pu
MESSAGE
k FACTOR: 1.10
MESSAGE
THERM PROT 1 TRIP

TIME CONST: 45 min.
MESSAGE
THERM PROT 1 RESET

TIME CONST: 45 min.
MESSAGE
THERM PROT 1 MINIM

RESET TIME: 20 min.
MESSAGE
THERM PROT 1 RESET:

Off
MESSAGE
THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:

Off
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal overload
conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be used to protect different elements of the power system. The cold curve characteristic is applied when the previous averaged load current over
the last 5 cycles is less than 10% of the base current. If this current is greater or equal than 10% than the base current, then
the hot curve characteristic is applied.
The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:
2
I
-
t op = op ln ------------------------2
2
I ( kI B )
(EQ 5.36)
The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:

2
I Ip
-
t op = op ln ------------------------ I 2 ( kI B ) 2
(EQ 5.37)
In the above equations,
top = time to operate.
op = thermal protection trip time constant.
I = measured overload RMS current.
Ip = measured load RMS current before overload occurs.
k= IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to IB, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current.
IB = protected element base (nominal) current.
5-140
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:
2
( kI B )
- + T min
t rst = rst ln ---------------------------2
2
I ( kI B )
(EQ 5.38)
In the above equation,
rst = thermal protection trip time constant.
Tmin is a minimum reset time setting

100
Tmin = 10
10
rst = 30
op = 30
t (min)
5
1
0.1
0.01
0.1
10
1
I / Ipkp
100
827724A1.CDR
Figure 558: IEC 255-8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES

The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated
each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, In > k IB, element starts increasing the thermal energy:
t E n = E n 1 + -------------t op ( In )
(EQ 5.39)
When current is less than the dropout level, In > 0.97 k IB, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:
GE Multilin
5-141
5 SETTINGS
t E n = E n 1 -------------t rst ( In )
(EQ 5.40)
In the above equations,
t is the power cycle duration.
n is the power cycle index.
top(In) is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations.
trst(In) is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation.
In is the measured overload RMS current at index n.
En is the accumulated energy at index n.
En 1 is the accumulated energy at index n 1.
The thermal overload protection element removes the THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand when E < 0.05. In case of
emergency, the thermal memory and THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand can be reset using THERM PROT 1 RESET setting.
All calculations are performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase, the thermal overload
protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases.
Table 522: TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS
PROTECTED EQUIPMENT
TIME CONSTANT
MINIMUM RESET TIME
Capacitor bank
10 minutes
30 minutes
Overhead line
10 minutes
20 minutes
Air-core reactor
40 minutes
30 minutes
Busbar
60 minutes
20 minutes
Underground cable
20 to 60 minutes
60 minutes
The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below.
SETTINGS
Function
Enabled = 1
Block
AND
Off = 0
SETTINGS
Base Current
K Factor
SETTING
Source
IA RMS
IB RMS
IC RMS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL PROT 1 PKP
AND
IA > k Ib
IB > k Ib
IC > k Ic
SETTING
OR
Trip Time Constant

RUN
E > 0.1
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL PROT 1 OP
Reset-dominant
SETTINGS
Reset Time Constant
Minimum Reset Time
RUN
E < 0.1
SETTING
Reset
Off = 0
Reset E to 0
827013A1.CDR
Figure 559: THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC
5-142
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT H5a
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:

Cont Ip 1
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a

DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a

EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT xxx
CONTACT INPUT
THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the T35 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
GE Multilin
5-143
5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
INPUT
VOLTAGE
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
3
TM
At this time, the

new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
The FlexLogic
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
Time stamp of the first

scan corresponding to the
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
At this time, the new

(LOW) contact state is
validated
RAW CONTACT
STATE
7
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
FLEXLOGICTM
OPERAND
SCAN TIME
(0.5 msec)
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand

changes reflecting the
validated contact state
The FlexLogicTM operand

changes reflecting the
validated contact state
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 560: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
5-144
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
VIRTUAL INPUT
Virt Ip 1
1 ID:
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT
TYPE: Latched
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMmenu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received.
MANDS
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to Enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the input signal transits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return
to off. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
NOTE
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
S
AND
Latch
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1
Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0
SETTING
AND
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:

OR
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
SETTING
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
AND
Self - Reset
827080A2.CDR
Figure 561: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-145
5 SETTINGS
5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
MESSAGE
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized in the T35 using the CONT OP 1 ION FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
operand
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:

Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a RESET:

Off
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a TYPE:

Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:

Disabled
MESSAGE
The T35 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module.
5-146
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:

A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2

OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:
GE Multilin
5-147
5 SETTINGS
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTand CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2

OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTmenu (assuming an H4L module):
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
Virt Op 1
1 ID
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
5-148
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES

a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW
Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.
The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) standards are used.
The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet.
For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided on all CPU modules except type 9E.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic, allowing distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other
information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from
messages that have originated in selected devices.
IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC
61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages.
Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional
advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality.
The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850
specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All
remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The T35 implementation
provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when
the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not
occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set greater than three times the programmed default
time required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it
has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so
it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a
remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the
message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can
be displayed.
The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES
In a T35 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each
GOOSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE GOOSE ID setting.
Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE
CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSSE GSSE ID setting.
In T35 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
GE Multilin
5-149
5 SETTINGS
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:

Remote Device 1
REMOTE DEVICE 1
ETYPE APPID: 0
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 1
DATASET: Fixed
Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 16
MESSAGE
Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only
those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row)
the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE messages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corresponding settings on the sending device.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the T35 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing
DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets.
Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this reason, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the
received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic
operands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
REMOTE INPUT 1
REMOTE INPUT
Remote Ip 1
1 ID:
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:
Remote Device 1
Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN
None
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32,

Config Item 1 to Config Item 32
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT
STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
1 ITEM:
Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of: DNA-1 through DNA-32, UserSt-1
through UserSt-32, and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850
specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section. The function of
UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE
message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting
selects the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting
REMOTE DEVICE (16) ID (see the Remote devices section). The REMOTE IN 1 ITEM setting selects the specific bits of the
GSSE/GOOSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
5-150
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to logic 1.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to logic 0.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote devices section in this chapter.
NOTE
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)
REMOTE DPS INPUT 1
REM DPS IN 1 ID:

RemDPS Ip 1
REM DPS IN 1 DEV:

Remote Device 1
Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16
MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM:

None
Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 32
MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote
double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings.
REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input.
REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is
selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section.
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.
The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset
(changes are made in the SETTINGS COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGIGURABLE GOOSE 1(16) CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS menus). Dataset
items configured to receive any of GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV to GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV will accept double-point status
information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item.
The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the RemDPS
Ip 1 BAD, RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM, RemDPS Ip 1 OFF, and RemDPS Ip 1 ON FlexLogic operands. These operands can then be
used in breaker or disconnect control schemes.
5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
DNA- 1 OPERAND:
Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
5-151
5 SETTINGS
Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 523: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS
DNA
IEC 61850 DEFINITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Test
IEC 61850 TEST MODE
ConfRev
IEC 61850 CONF REV
b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 OPERAND:
Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the
message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of
state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION settings menu.
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, refer to Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the
Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5.8.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING
RESETTING
RESET OPERAND:
Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5-152
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
DIRECT INPUT
DIRECT INPUT 1
NAME: Dir Ip 1
DIRECT INPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 1
Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
DEFAULT STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to
assign a descriptive name to the direct input. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID represents the source of direct input 1. The
specified direct input is driven by the device identified here.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
DIRECT OUTPUT
DIRECT OUT
Dir Out 1
1 NAME:
DIRECT OUT
Off
1 OPERAND:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIRECT OUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output. The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is
the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct inputs and outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
GE Multilin
5-153
5 SETTINGS
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A T35 RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic
that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such
as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via
single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 562: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Assume contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1:
UR IED 2:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2

DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND
= Cont Ip 1 On
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
BLOCK
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 563: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 3:
UR IED 4:
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"

DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability

5-154
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to On), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off).
EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 564: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 565: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a bridge. The following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
UR IED 3:
UR IED 2:
GE Multilin
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"

DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from
IED 3)

DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from
IED 1)

5-155
5 SETTINGS

DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5"
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"
(forward a message from 1 to 3)

(forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6

DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6

842717A1.CDR
Figure 566: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT EXAMPLE 3
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).
5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

a) OVERVIEW
The relay provides sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and sixteen
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only, numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by assigning
FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional comparison pilot
schemes and direct transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection
functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
b) TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT INPUTS
TELEPROT INPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
TELEPROT INPUT 1-2

DEFAULT: Off
TELEPROT INPUT 1-16

DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1

DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 2-2

DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-156
TELEPROT INPUT 2-16

DEFAULT: Off
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to On defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of Off
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The Latest/On and Latest/Off values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for Latest/On
and logic 0 for Latest/Off.
c) TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT OUTPUTS
TELEPROT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:

Off

Off

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE

Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

Off
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand on
both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end). On
three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of channel
failure between any pair of relays.
GE Multilin
5-157
5 SETTINGS
UR-1
UR-2
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
SETTING
(same for 1-2...1-16)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
(Teleprotection I/O Enabled)
SETTING
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Fail
Off
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
OK
SETTING
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 2-2...2-16)
Fail
OK
On
OR
On
Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
(same for 2-2...2-16)
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16)
UR-2 or UR-3
ACTUAL VALUES
CHANNEL 2 STATUS:

(same for 1-2...1-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Communication channel #1
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
On
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
ACTUAL VALUES
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Off
OK
SETTING
On
Fail
CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
Communication channel #2
(On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal
with redundant channel)
SETTING
(same for 2-2...2-16)
Fail
Off
OK
842750A2.CDR
Figure 567: TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING
5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(32)
GOOSE ANALOG
INPUT 1
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT:
1000.000
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT
MODE: Default Value
Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
GOOSE ANALOG
UNITS:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU:

1.000
The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series
devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input.
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline
and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating
point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be
rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the
GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT setting.
GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual
values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value.
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values in other T35 features, such as FlexElements. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input
FlexAnalog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.
5-158
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Table 524: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS

ELEMENT
BASE UNITS
dcmA
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
SOURCE POWER
SOURCE VOLTAGE

XFMR DIFFERENTIAL
HARMONIC CONTENT
BASE = 100%

The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values are available for use in other T35 functions that use FlexAnalog values.
5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)
GOOSE UINTEGER
INPUT 1
MESSAGE
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT:
1000
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT
MODE: Default Value
Range: Default Value, Last Known
The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger values between any two URseries devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input.
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is
offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer
number.
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the
GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting.
The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other T35 functions that use FlexInteger values.
GE Multilin
5-159
5 SETTINGS
5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT F1(W8)
DCMA INPUT F1
DCMA INPUT F1
FUNCTION: Disabled
DCMA INPUT F1 ID:

DCMA Ip 1
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT F1
UNITS: A
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT F1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,

0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
DCMA INPUT F1 MIN

VALUE:
0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT F1 MAX

VALUE:
0.000
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot F.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT F1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1 MIN
VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a watts transducer with a
span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX
VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
5-160
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.9.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT F1(W8)
RTD INPUT F1
RTD INPUT F1
FUNCTION: Disabled
RTD INPUT F1 ID:

RTD Ip 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT F1 TYPE:

100 Nickel
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum,

120 Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature.
In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100C. For example, a trip level of 150C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.
Refer to the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.
GE Multilin
5-161
5 SETTINGS
Table 525: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE
RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
100 PT
(DIN 43760)
120 NI
100 NI
10 CU
50
58
80.31
86.17
71.81
7.10
40
40
84.27
92.76
77.30
7.49
30
22
88.22
99.41
82.84
7.88
20
92.16
106.15
88.45
8.26
10
14
96.09
113.00
94.17
8.65
32
100.00
120.00
100.00
9.04
10
50
103.90
127.17
105.97
9.42
20
68
107.79
134.52
112.10
9.81
30
86
111.67
142.06
118.38
10.19
40
104
115.54
149.79
124.82
10.58
50
122
119.39
157.74
131.45
10.97
60
140
123.24
165.90
138.25
11.35
70
158
127.07
174.25
145.20
11.74
80
176
130.89
182.84
152.37
12.12
90
194
134.70
191.64
159.70
12.51
100
212
138.50
200.64
167.20
12.90
110
230
142.29
209.85
174.87
13.28
120
248
146.06
219.29
182.75
13.67
130
266
149.82
228.96
190.80
14.06
140
284
153.58
238.85
199.04
14.44
150
302
157.32
248.95
207.45
14.83
160
320
161.04
259.30
216.08
15.22
170
338
164.76
269.91
224.92
15.61
180
356
168.47
280.77
233.97
16.00
190
374
172.46
291.96
243.30
16.39
200
392
175.84
303.46
252.88
16.78
210
410
179.51
315.31
262.76
17.17
220
428
183.17
327.54
272.94
17.56
230
446
186.82
340.14
283.45
17.95
240
464
190.45
353.14
294.28
18.34
250
482
194.08
366.53
305.44
18.73
5-162
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

5.9.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA OUTPUTS DCMA OUTPUT F1(W8)
DCMA OUTPUT F1
DCMA OUTPUT F1
SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT F1
RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT F1
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT F1
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The following equation is applied:
I out
where:
I min if x < MIN VAL
= I max if x > MAX VAL
k ( x MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise
(EQ 5.41)
x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting

Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max I min
k = -----------------------------------------------MAX VAL MIN VAL
(EQ 5.42)
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL MIN
< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
VAL
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imax
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL
MAX VAL
842739A1.CDR
Figure 568: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
5-163
5 SETTINGS
The dcmA output settings are described below.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set independently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if
the DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples are described below.

EXAMPLE: POWER MONITORING
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1
output of the range of 1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:

3 13.8 kV 0.8 kA 0.9 = 17.21 MW
P =
(EQ 5.43)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:

P max = 1.2 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW
(EQ 5.44)
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
P BASE = 115 V 120 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW
(EQ 5.45)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
20.65 MW = 1.247 pu,
minimum power = -----------------------------16.56 MW
MW- = 1.247 pu
maximum power = 20.65
-------------------------16.56 MW
(EQ 5.46)
The following settings should be entered:

DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 1.247 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.247 pu
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 ( 1 ) ) 20.65 MW = 0.207 MW
1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
5-164
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS

I max = 1.5 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA
(EQ 5.47)
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA
(EQ 5.48)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
kA- = 0 pu,
minimum current = 0
----------5 kA
kA- = 1.26 pu
maximum current = 6.3
---------------5 kA
(EQ 5.49)

DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 20 4 ) 6.3 kA = 0.504 kA
0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 4.2 kA, 0.001 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
Delta. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV
V min = 0.7 ------------------- = 161.66 kV,
3
400 kV
V max = 1.1 ------------------- = 254.03 kV
3
(EQ 5.50)
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV 6024 = 400 kV
(EQ 5.51)
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
kV- = 0.404 pu,
minimum voltage = 161.66
-------------------------400 kV
kV- = 0.635 pu
maximum voltage = 254.03
-------------------------400 kV
(EQ 5.52)

DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1
mag
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in Delta (refer to the Metering conventions section
in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in
this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 0 ) 254.03 kV = 1.27 kV
0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.
GE Multilin
5-165
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5.10TESTING
5.10.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE
SETTINGS
TESTING
MESSAGE
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible
TEST MODE FORCING:

On
The T35 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication channels and
the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a Test Mode LED indicator.
The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible.
In the Disabled mode, T35 operation is normal and all test features are disabled.
In the Isolated mode, the T35 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs.
All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain
usable on applicable UR-series models.
In the Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the
test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is Off, the T35 inputs and outputs operate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is On, the T35 contact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manually
changing the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-programmable pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests
remain usable on applicable UR-series models.
Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed
using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.
NOTE
When in Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the T35 to
testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set TEST MODE FORCING to On. To force contact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FORCING to the desired operand. The contact input
or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state.
The T35 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and
control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be
forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the test
mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test
functions described in the following sections.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED
indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.
5-166
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.10 TESTING
Table 526: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE
FUNCTION
TEST MODE
FORCING
OPERAND
IN-SERVICE
LED
TEST MODE
LED
CRITICAL
FAIL
RELAY
INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
Disabled
No effect
Unaffected
Off
Unaffected
Contact outputs and inputs are under normal

operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not
operational (where applicable).
Isolated
No effect
Off
On
Deenergized
Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs

are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests
are also operational (where applicable).
Forcible
On (logic 1)
Off
Flashing
Deenergized
Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the

force contact input and force contact output
functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are
Off (logic 0)
Off
Flashing
Deenergized
Contact outputs and inputs are under normal

operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also
The TEST MODE FUNCTION setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings
upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a T35 that has been
placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the TEST MODE FORCING
setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states.
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip xx
:Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways:
If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
GE Multilin
5-167
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op 2
:Disabled
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op xx
:Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode.
If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to Energized, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energized, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the
operand configured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the
test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1
For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, digital input 1
should remain operational, digital inputs 2 and 3 should open, and digital input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1 should
freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully operational.
The required settings are shown below.
To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS
TESTING TEST MODE menu: TEST MODE FUNCTION: Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS and FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4:
FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Energized,
and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled
Closed
Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1

In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1.
Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. Write the following FlexLogic equation:
Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote
input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu:
PUSHBUTTONS
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
5-168
Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
GE Multilin
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
CONTACT INPUTS
See page 6-3.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-3.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-3.
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 6-4.
TELEPROTECTION
INPUTS
See page 6-4.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-5.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
See page 6-5.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATISTICS
See page 6-5.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-6.
SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-6.
FLEX STATES
See page 6-6.
ETHERNET
See page 6-6.
DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-7.
DIRECT DEVICES
STATUS
See page 6-7.
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
See page 6-8.
EGD PROTOCOL
STATUS
See page 6-8.
TELEPROT CH TESTS
See page 6-9.
ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 6-9.
TRANSFORMER
See page 6-13.
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES
SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-14.
SOURCE SRC 2
SOURCE SRC 3
SOURCE SRC 4
SOURCE SRC 5
SOURCE SRC 6
ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFO
6-2
TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-17.
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-17.
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
See page 6-18.
TRANSDUCER I/O
DCMA INPUTS
See page 6-18.
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
See page 6-18.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
FAULT REPORTS
See page 6-19.
EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-19.
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-19.
DATA LOGGER
See page 6-20.
MAINTENANCE
See page 6-20.
MODEL INFORMATION
See page 6-21.
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-21.
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off
Cont Ip 2
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Cont Ip xx
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off
Virt Ip 2
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Virt Ip 64
Off
The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
GE Multilin
6-3
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DPS INPUTS
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT

STATUS: Bad
The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote doublepoint status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state.
6.2.5 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
TELEPROTECTION
INPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 1-1: Off
Range: Off, On
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 1-2: Off
Range: Off, On
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 1-16: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 2-1: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 2-2: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 2-16: Off
Range: Off, On
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will
be that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.
6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1
Off
Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
Cont Op 2
Off
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
6-4
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff,
On, IOn, and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Op
Off
Range: On, Off
Virt Op
Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Virt Op 96
Off
The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
All REMOTE DEVICES

ONLINE: No
Range: Yes, No
REMOTE DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates
whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required
remote device is not online.
b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE
StNum:
REMOTE DEVICE
SqNum:
0
0
Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here.
The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented
whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4 294 967 295 is incremented.
GE Multilin
6-5
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
DIGITAL COUNTERS
Counter 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Counter 1
ACCUM:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1
MICROS:
0
The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and
time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCHES
MESSAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.11 FLEX STATES
6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES
MESSAGE
PARAM
Off
1: Off
Range: Off, On
PARAM
Off
2: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off

Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6.2.12 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET
ETHERNET
MESSAGE
ETHERNET PRI LINK

STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK

STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.
6-6
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2.13 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
AVG MSG RETURN

TIME CH1: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH1: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT

CH1: 0
MESSAGE
AVG MSG RETURN

TIME CH2: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH2: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT

CH2: 0
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT
On
1:
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT
On
2:
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 32:

On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last
ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT (32) values represent the state of each direct input.
6.2.14 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES
STATUS
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Offline, Online
DIRECT DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
GE Multilin
6-7
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.15 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
IEC 61850
GOOSE UINTEGERS
MESSAGE
UINT INPUT
0
UINT INPUT
0
MESSAGE
UINT INPUT 16
0
The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.2.16 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS
a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS FAST EXCHANGE 1
FAST EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
FAST EXCHANGE 1
SIGNATURE: 0
FAST EXCHANGE 1
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange is displayed.
b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
SIGNATURE: 0
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed.
6-8
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2.17 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS
TELEPROT CH TESTS
CHANNEL 1
STATUS: n/a
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
CHANNEL 1 LOST
PACKETS:
1
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2
STATUS: n/a
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 2 LOST
PACKETS:
1
MESSAGE
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL
CONFIGURATION: FAIL
MESSAGE
The status information for two channels is shown here.
CHANNEL 1 STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is OK, teleprotection is
enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, teleprotection enabled and data is
not being received from the remote terminal. If n/a, teleprotection is disabled.
CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per
cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu.
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: This value displays the current state of the communications channel
identification check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the
FAIL message will be displayed. The N/A value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0, the channel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.
6.2.18 ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
SWITCH 2 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
SWITCH 6 PORT
STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
SWITCH MAC ADDRESS:

00A0F40138FA
Range: standard MAC address format
MESSAGE
These actual values appear only if the T35 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The status information for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu.
SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: These values represents the receiver status of each port on
the Ethernet switch. If the value is OK, then data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL,
then data is not being received from the remote terminal or the port is not connected.
SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: This value displays the MAC address assigned to the Ethernet switch module.
GE Multilin
6-9
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS
Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
BY THE UR RELAY
G
Voltage
+Q
VCG
IC
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
IA
PF = Lag
-P
VAG
Current
IB
+P
IA
PF = Lag
PF = Lead
UR RELAY
LOAD
Inductive
Resistive
VBG
-Q
-
S=VI
Generator
G
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
-P
VAG
+P
IA
Current
PF = Lag
IB
UR RELAY
-Q
S=VI
-
Resistive
Inductive
Resistive
LOAD
PF = Lead
VBG
LOAD
PF = Lag
IA
IC
VARS = Negative
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative
PF = Lag
-P
PF = Lag
+P
IA
PF = Lag
IC
Current
PF = Lead
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G
-
Generator
S=VI
3
Resistive
LOAD
+Q
VCG
Voltage
IB
PF = Lead
VARS = Positive
-P
VAG
PF = Lead
IA
G
Generator
+P
IC
PF = Lag
Current
VBG
UR RELAY
PF = Lag
IA
WATTS = Negative
PF = Lead
-Q
827239AC.CDR
S=VI
Figure 61: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS
6-10
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
b) PHASE ANGLES
All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o
0o
-45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
Figure 62: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION

c) SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
ABC phase rotation:
1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
ACB phase rotation:

1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
The above equations apply to currents as well.
GE Multilin
6-11
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
ABC phase rotation:
ACB phase rotation:

V_0 = N/A
1 30
2
V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
1 30
2
V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
V_0 = N/A
1 30
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
1
30
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V *
RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V
SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
F5AC
F6AC
F7AC
V0
V1
V2
85.4
241
WYE
13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
19.5
192
56.5
7
23.3
187
85.4
288
DELTA
84.9
0
138.3
144
85.4
288
N/A
56.5
54
23.3
234
VBG
VCG
VAB
VBC
VCA
13.9
0
76.2
125
79.7
250
84.9
313
138.3
97
84.9
0
138.3
144
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2

can be determined)
VT
CONN.
VAG
The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the T35 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
UR phase angle
reference
SYMMETRICAL
COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
reference
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
WYE VTs
C
B
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A
DELTA VTs
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 63: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
6-12
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
6.3.2 TRANSFORMER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT
DIFFERENTIAL AND
RESTRAINT
REFERENCE WINDING:
Winding 1
MESSAGE
DIFF PHASOR Iad:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
REST PHASOR Iar:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 2ND HARM Iad:

0.0% fo
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 5TH HARM Iad:

0.0% fo
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF PHASOR Ibd:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
REST PHASOR Ibr:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 2ND HARM Ibd:

0.0% fo
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 5TH HARM Ibd:

0.0% fo
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF PHASOR Icd:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
REST PHASOR Icr:

0.000 pu
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 2ND HARM Icd:

0.0% fo
0.0
MESSAGE
DIFF 5TH HARM Icd:

0.0% fo
0.0
The metered differential current, restraint current, second harmonic current, and fifth harmonic current are displayed for
each phase. Refer to the Percent differential section in chapter 5 for details on how these values are calculated.
GE Multilin
6-13
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.3 SOURCES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC1
SOURCE SRC 1
PHASE CURRENT
SRC 1
See page 614.
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT
SRC 1
See page 615.
MESSAGE
PHASE VOLTAGE
SRC 1
See page 615.
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
SRC 1
See page 616.
MESSAGE
POWER
SRC 1
See page 616.
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY
SRC 1
See page 617.
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.
Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments
for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power values will be unavailable.
b) PHASE CURRENT METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT
SRC 1
6-14
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ib:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ic:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS In:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR In:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

0.000 A
0.0
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
6.3 METERING
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
0.000 A
0.0
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
c) GROUND CURRENT METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 GROUND CURRENT
GROUND CURRENT
SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ig:

0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

0.000 A
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:

0.000 A
0.0
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
d) PHASE VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE
PHASE VOLTAGE
SRC 1
GE Multilin
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vag:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vbg:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vcg:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vab:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vbc:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vca:
V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

0.000 V
0.0
6-15
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

0.000 V
0.0
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

0.000 V
0.0
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
SRC 1
MESSAGE
SRC 1
0.00
RMS Vx:
V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:

0.000 V
0.0
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
f) POWER METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER
POWER
SRC 1
6-16
SRC 1 REAL POWER

3: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

a: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

b: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER

c: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

3: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

a: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

b: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

c: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

3: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

a: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

b: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

c: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1
3:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
MESSAGE
SRC 1
a:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
b:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
c:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
The metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor, are displayed in this menu. The "SRC
1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
g) FREQUENCY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
SRC 1
SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY:
60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM menu. Refer to the
Power System section of chapter 5 for additional details.
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1
OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS (Sheet 1 of 2)
dcmA
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100C
SOURCE CURRENT
SOURCE POWER
SOURCE VOLTAGE
GE Multilin
6-17
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS (Sheet 2 of 2)

XFMR DIFFERENTIAL
HARMONIC CONTENT
BASE = 100%

6.3.6 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
IEC 61850
GOOSE ANALOGS
ANALOG INPUT
0.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT
0.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT
0.000
MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT 32
0.000
The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.3.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
-50 C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and
the bottom line as the value.
6-18
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS
6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
FAULT REPORT
NEWEST RECORD
NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:

2002/8/11 14:23:57
MESSAGE
LAST REPORT DATE:

2002/10/09 08:25:27
This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section in
chapter 5 for additional information on this feature.
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT: XXXX
RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3
POWER ON
EVENT 3
DATE: 2000/07/14
MESSAGE
EVENT: 2
POWER OFF
EVENT 3
TIME: 14:53:00.03405
MESSAGE
EVENT: 1
EVENTS CLEARED
Date and Time Stamps
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order
from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is
added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the
event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0
MESSAGE
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
0
MESSAGE
CYCLES PER RECORD:

0.0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:

2000/07/14 15:40:16
Range: No, Yes
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
CYCLES PER RECORD value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of chapter 5 for additional details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting Yes to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS
menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
CLEAR RECORDS
GE Multilin
6-19
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 13:45:51
MESSAGE
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log
gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the
most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then
both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1(6)
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A:

0.00 kA2-cyc
BREAKER 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B:

0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP C:

0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE

A:
0 ms
MESSAGE

B:
0 ms
MESSAGE

C:
0 ms
MESSAGE
BKR 1 OPERATING
TIME:
0 ms
There is an identical menu for each of the breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2-cycles. Refer to the
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records. The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is
defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open.
6-20
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
ORDER CODE LINE 1:

T60-E00-HCH-F8H-H6A
Range: standard GE multilin order code format;

example order code shown
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
Range: standard GE multilin order code format
ORDER CODE LINE 3:
ORDER CODE LINE 4:
SERIAL NUMBER:
Range: standard GE multilin serial number format
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

000000000000
Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format
MESSAGE
MANUFACTURING DATE:
0
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG

ACTIVE: No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
OPERATING TIME:
0:00:00
Range: opearting time in HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
LAST SETTING CHANGE:

1970/01/01 23:11:19
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
T60 TransformerRelay
REVISION:
5.9x
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the application firmware.
MESSAGE
MODIFICATION FILE
NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
MESSAGE
BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION:
3.01
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the boot program firmware.
MESSAGE
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM

REVISION:
0.08
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
MESSAGE
COMPILE DATE:
2004/09/15 04:55:16
Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when product firmware was built.
MESSAGE
BOOT DATE:
2004/09/15 16:41:32
Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when the boot program was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.
GE Multilin
6-21
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6-22
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip
Off
Range: Off, On
Virt Ip
Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 64
Off
Range: Off, On
The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).
GE Multilin
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS

7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR USER FAULT

REPORTS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DATA LOGGER?

No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR BREAKER 2
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DIRECT I/O

COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes. Valid only for units with Direct Input/
Output module.
CLEAR TELEPROTECT
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR ALL RELAY

RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME:

2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time
setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked.
7-2
GE Multilin
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST?
No
Range: No, Yes
UPDATE ORDER CODE?

No
Range: No, Yes
SERVICE COMMAND:
0
Range: 0, 101
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated
by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert
to No. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific T35 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action available.
Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than 101 is
entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in the
background while the T35 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time
based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the T35 is shipped from the factory,
the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be
desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all selfchecking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.
GE Multilin
7-3
7.2 TARGETS
7.2TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL COUNTER
LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL COUNTER 16:

LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.
MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read NO
ACTIVE TARGETS:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY
ACTIVE STATUS
DESCRIPTION
OP
element operated and still picked up
PKP
element picked up and timed out
LATCHED
element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
a) DESCRIPTION
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized.
All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation.
The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off.
A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded.
7-4
GE Multilin
7.2 TARGETS
b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

The major self-test errors are listed and described below.
MODULE FAILURE___:
Contact Factory (xxx)
Latched target message: Yes.
Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected.
How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).
INCOMPATIBLE H/W:
Contact Factory (xxx)
Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the T35 order code.
How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:
with 2nd line detail
Latched target message: No.
Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the T35.
How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five seconds.
What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If
the problem persists, contact the factory.
FLEXLOGIC ERROR:
with 2nd line detail
Description of problem: A FlexLogic equation is incorrect.
How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified.
What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:
Check Settings
Description of problem: The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the T35 is not programmed.
How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
setting is altered.
What to do: Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS to Programmed.
GE Multilin
7-5
7.2 TARGETS
c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-programmable self-tests section in the
Settings chapter for additional details.
IEC 61850 DATA SET:
LLN0 GOOSE# Error
Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is not supported by the T35 order code.
How often the test is performed: On power up.
What to do: Verify that all the items in the GOOSE data set are supported by the T35. The EnerVista UR Setup software will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the T35.
IEC 61850 DATA SET:

LLN0 BR# Error
Description of problem: A data item in a configurable report data set is not supported by the T35 order code.
How often the test is performed: On power up.
What to do: Verify that all the items in the configurable report data set are supported by the T35. The EnerVista UR
Setup software will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the T35.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Replace Battery
Description of problem: The battery is not functioning.
How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message is displayed after 60
seconds if the problem persists.
What to do: Replace the battery located in the power supply module (1H or 1L).
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Direct I/O Ring Break
Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.
How often the test is performed: Every second.
What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET MODULE OFFLINE
Description of problem: The T35 has failed to detect the Ethernet switch.
How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. An error is issued after five consecutive failures.
What to do: Check the T35 device and switch IP configuration settings. Check for incorrect UR port (port 7) settings on
the Ethernet switch. Check the power to the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET PORT # OFFLINE
7-6
GE Multilin
7.2 TARGETS
Description of problem: The Ethernet connection has failed for the specified port.
How often the test is performed: Every five seconds.
What to do: Check the Ethernet port connection on the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
**Bad IRIG-B Signal**
Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected.
How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received.
What to do: Ensure the following:
The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.
Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test).
The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).
If none of these apply, then contact the factory.

MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Port ## Failure
Description of problem: An Ethernet connection has failed.
How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds.
What to do: Check Ethernet connections. Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
SNTP Failure
Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding.
How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds.
What to do: Check SNTP configuration and network connections.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy
Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact
output of an installed type 4L module.
How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change.
What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
GGIO Ind xxx oscill
Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating.
GE Multilin
7-7
7.2 TARGETS
How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set.
What to do: The xxx text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to
this item.
DIRECT I/O FAILURE:

COMM Path Incomplete
Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected.
How often the test is performed: Every second.
What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
REMOTE DEVICE FAIL:

COMM Path Incomplete
Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.
How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets.
What to do: Check GOOSE setup.
TEMP MONITOR:
OVER TEMPERATURE
Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80C).
How often the test is performed: Every hour.
What to do: Remove the T35 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.
UNEXPECTED RESTART:
Press RESET key
Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the T35 is powered-up, when
there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure.
How often the test is performed: Event driven.
What to do: Contact the factory.
7-8
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
8 SECURITY 8.1PASSWORD SECURITY
8.1.1 OVERVIEW
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
Changing the state of virtual inputs.
Clearing the event records.
Clearing the oscillography records.
Changing the date and time.
Clearing the data logger.
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
Changing any setting.
Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to 0, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands.
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE
GE Multilin
8-1
8 SECURITY
8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)
MESSAGE
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
See page 82.
MESSAGE
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
See page 83.
MESSAGE
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
See page 84.
MESSAGE
PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE LOCAL
PASSWORDS
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according
to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
8-2
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY

8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 81: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.
1.
Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3.
Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4.
If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password
value.
8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS
SUPERVISION
GE Multilin
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
MESSAGE
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
MESSAGE
8-3
8 SECURITY
The following access supervision settings are available.
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon
expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the T35 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The T35 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL
TIMEOUTS
MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
DUAL PERMISSION
SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On
MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
MESSAGE
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value.
If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
8-4
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the
FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
GE Multilin
8-5
8 SECURITY
8.2SETTINGS SECURITY
8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the T35 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1.
Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
3.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.
3.
Enter the template password then click OK.
4.
Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
8-6
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 82: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

5.
Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 83: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.
Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
7.
Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.
1.
Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
8-7
8 SECURITY
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
Display only those settings available for editing.
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
8

842858A1.CDR
Figure 84: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
8-8
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 85: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
1.
2.
Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.
3.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 86: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and
it will be necessary to define a new settings template.
1.
Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2.
Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.
3.
Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
8-9

4.
8 SECURITY
Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES
The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation.
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.
2.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
3.
Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
8
Figure 87: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE
4.
Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.
5.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
6.
Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
8-10
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via

842861A1.CDR
Figure 88: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
8
Figure 89: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW
b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired
FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific
serial number.
1.
Select the settings file in the offline window.
2.
Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
8-11
8 SECURITY
The following window is displayed.
Figure 810: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

3.
Enter the serial number of the T35 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the T35 device specified by the serial
number.
8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a T35 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a T35 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the T35 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the T35 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T35
device or obtained from the T35 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
8
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 811: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
8-12
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
1.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a T35 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2.
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an T35 device.
The T35 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 812: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 813: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
GE Multilin
8-13
8 SECURITY
b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The T35 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 814: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.
8-14
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
8.3ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.3.1 OVERVIEW
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows a security administrator to easily manage the security privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of URPlus-series devices by
multiple personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The
EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default. This allows access to the device immediately after
installation. When security is disabled, all users are granted administrator access.
1.
Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window.
2.
Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. It will now be necessary to enter a username and password
upon starting the software.
8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER
The following pre-requisites are required to add new users to the EnerVista security management system.
The user adding the new user must have administrator rights.
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to add new users.

1.
2.
Enter a username in the User field. The username must be between 4 and 20 characters in length.
GE Multilin
8-15

3.
8 SECURITY
Select the user access rights by checking one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 81: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
4.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry
Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values
Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings
Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands
Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder
Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic
Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values.
Update Info
Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin
When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to add the new user to the security management system.

8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system.
The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights.
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to modify user privileges.

1.
2.
Locate the username in the User field.
8-16
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
3.
Modify the user access rights by checking or clearing one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 82: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
4.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry
Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values
Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings
Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands
Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder
Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic
Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values.
Update Info
Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin
When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to save the changes to user to the security management system.
GE Multilin
8-17
8 SECURITY
8-18
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING
9 COMMISSIONING 9.1DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST
9.1.1 DESCRIPTION
a) OVERVIEW
The following commissioning tests are organized in two parts: general procedures for testing points of the differentialrestraint characteristics, and examples of the percent differential element response, based on different transformer configurations and fault current distribution. The following tests can be performed by using either 2 or 3 individually adjustable currents, and do not require additional specialized equipment.
PREPARATION:
1.
Select a 0 or 180 transformer phase shift and identical winding connection type into the relay.
2.
Select the Not Within Zone setting value for each winding grounding setting.
3.
Select and set the CT ratios for each winding.
4.
Calculate the magnitude compensation factors M[1] and M[2] for each winding.
5.
Enable the Transformer Percent Differential element, and enter the required test settings to shape the differential
restraint characteristic.
6.
Connect the relay test set to inject x current (Ix) into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input, and y current (IY) into the Winding 2 Phase A CT input.
TESTING:
The tests of the differential restraint characteristic verify the minimum pickup point, the intersection point of Breakpoint 1
and Slope 1, and the intersection point of Breakpoint 2 and Slope 2.
For simplicity, enter the following settings for each winding:
SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 1(4) WINDING 1(4) CONNECTION: Wye
SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 1(4) WINDING 1(4) GROUNDING: Not Within Zone
SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 2(4) WINDING 2(4) ANGLE WRT WINDING 1: 0
If the power transformer phase shift is 0, the two currents to be injected to the relay should be 180 apart. The 180 phase
shift results from the inversion of the field CT, as their positive marks are away from the protected transformer terminals and
are connected to the positively marked terminals on the relay.
b) MINIMUM PICKUP
Inject current (Ix) into Winding 1 Phase A and monitor the per-unit Phase A differential current until it exceeds the minimum
pickup setting. The theoretical injected current for minimum pickup verification can be computed as follows:
CT
I x = minimum pickup ----------M[1]
(EQ 9.1)
where CT is the 1 A or 5 A tap, and M[1] is the calculated magnitude compensation factor (see the Transformer section in
Chapter 5 for details on calculating the M[1] and M[2] factors).
GE Multilin
9-1
9 COMMISSIONING
c) SLOPE 1 / BREAKPOINT 1
The point of Slope 1 and Breakpoint 1 is tested as follows. Refer to the Differential Restraint Characteristic diagram below
for details.
1.
Inject current (Iy) into Winding 2 Phase A as follows:

CT
I YB1 = Breakpoint 1 ----------M[2]
2.
(EQ 9.2)
At Breakpoint 1, the injected current IXOP1 is determined by:

CT
I XOP1 = Breakpoint 1 ( 1 Slope 1 ) ----------M[1]
(EQ 9.3)
and the differential current should be equal to:

I d = Slope 1 (in %) Breakpoint 1 (in pu)
(EQ 9.4)
3.
Preset the Ix current to 1.05 I XOP1 . Switch on the test set. The relay should restraint, as the differential to restraint
ratio will become less than the Slope 1 setting. Switch off the current.
4.
Preset the Ix current to 0.95 I XOP1 . Switch on the test set. The relay should operate. Switch off the current.
To test any other point from the Slope 1 section of the curve, inject a per-unit restraint current smaller than the Breakpoint 1
current and repeat the steps above by substituting the Breakpoint 1 value with the new per-unit restraint current value into
the equations above.
d) SLOPE 2 / BREAKPOINT 2
The point of Slope 2 and Breakpoint 2 is tested as follows. Refer to the diagram below for details.
1.
Preset the Iy current to a magnitude that results in the restraint current being equal to Breakpoint 2. Use the following
calculation to define the magnitude of the injected current:
CT
I YB2 = Breakpoint 2 ----------M[2]
2.
(EQ 9.5)
At the above current (restraint), the IXOP2 current required to operate the element is calculated as:
CT
I XOP2 = Breakpoint 2 ( 1 Slope 2 ) ----------M[1]
(EQ 9.6)
3.
Preset the Ix current to 1.05 I XOP1 and switch on the test set. The relay should restrain, as the differential to restraint
ratio will become less than the Slope 2 setting. Switch off the current.
4.
Preset the Ix current to 0.95 I XOP1 . Switch on the test set and verify relay operation. Switch off the current.
To test any point from the Slope 2 portion of the characteristic, inject a per-unit restraint current greater than the Breakpoint
2 current as restraint and repeat the steps above by substituting the Breakpoint 2 value in the equations above with the new
per-unit restraint current value.
The above two tests can be repeated for Phases B and C.
Id (pu)
S2
9
S1
PKP
B1 B2
Ir (pu)
Figure 91: DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
9-2
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING
9.2DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST EXAMPLES
9.2.1 INTRODUCTION
The T35 commissioning tests are based on secondary current injections, where two or three individually adjustable currents are required. The differential protection compares the magnitudes of the varying HV and LV currents in real time.
Therefore, the test set currents and their angles must be an exact replica of the HV and LV currents and angles shown on
the diagrams, along with the correct CT polarity and orientation.
Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded. Stopping the injection of the currents to the relay
by using contact outputs triggered by protection operation can prevent this from occurring.
Due to the complexity of the mathematics defining the operating characteristic of the region between Breakpoint 1 and 2,
the use of a factory-supplied Microsoft Excel simulation utility is highly recommended. This utility indicates graphically
whether the relay should operate, based on the settings and winding current injection. This allows the tester to define and
confirm various points on the operating characteristic. The spreadsheet can be found at GE Multilin website at http://
www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
Y/y0
Transformer
~c
~b
~b
IA = 0 pu
Ia = 0 pu
~b
~c
~c
~b
~c
BC Fault
Ib = 0.866 270 pu
IB = 0.866 90 pu
~c ~b
~b
IC = 0.866 270 pu
~c
Ic = 0.866 90 pu
828736A1.CDR
Figure 92: CURRENT DISTRIBUTION ON A Y/YG0 TRANSFORMER WITH b-c FAULT ON LV SIDE
Consider the above system, which illustrates the importance of CT orientation, polarity and relay connection. These factors
will also apply when performing the tests outlined in the next examples.
The transformer high voltage (HV) and low voltage (LV) side fault currents, and angles are all related. More specifically, the
HV and LV primary fault currents are displaced by 180. The CT polarity marks point away from the protected zone and are
connected to the ~a terminals of the relay. The displayed current is what is reported by the relay.
The ~a and ~b terminal identifications are illustrative only. Refer to CT/VT Modules section in Chapter 3 for specific
terminal identification.
NOTE
GE Multilin
9-3
9 COMMISSIONING
9.2.2 TEST EXAMPLE 1
a) DESCRIPTION
TRANSFORMER DATA:
20 MVA, 115/12.47 kV, CT (HV) = 200:1, CT (LV) = 1000:1, Y/y0 with a grounded LV neutral
TEST SET CONFIGURATION:

The fault current distribution for an external b-c fault is identical for the HV and LV transformer sides and can be simulated
easily with two current sources. Connect the first current source to the relay Phase B and C terminals, corresponding to
the HV winding CTs in series, and the second source to the Phase b and c relay terminals, corresponding to the LV CTs.
Ensure the polarity is correct and the relative phase angles are similar to the shown in the figure; that is, 180 between IB
and IC, 180 between Ib and Ic, 180 between IB and Ib, and 180 between IC and Ic. Follow the magnitudes and angles of
the injected currents from the tables below to ensure the test will be performed correctly
OPERATING CRITERIA:
The differential element operates if the differential current (Id) exceeds the characteristic defined by the relay settings for
restraint current magnitude (Ir). The differential current Id is the vector sum of the compensated currents, and Ir is the largest compensated current. Compensation refers to vector and magnitude corrections applied to the currents from the HV
and LV transformer sides.
The tests verify the operation and no-operation response for points from all regions of the percentage differential characteristic. These tests are:
Test for zero differential current
Minimum Pickup
Slope 1
The region between Slope 1 and Slope 2
Slope 2
RELAY CONFIGURATION:
The AC Inputs and Source are configured as follows:
AC INPUTS SETTING
Phase CT Primary
CT F1
CT M1
200
1000
SOURCE SETTING
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 2
SRC 1
SRC 2
Name
Phase CT Secondary
Phase CT
F1
M1
Ground CT Primary
Ground CT
Ground CT Secondary
Phase VT
Aux VT
TWO WINDING TRANSFORMER CONFIGURATION:
WINDING 1 SETTINGS
VALUE
WINDING 2 SETTINGS
VALUE
PERCENT DIFF
VALUE
Source
SRC 1
Source
SRC 2
Minimum PKP
0.1 pu
Rated MVA
20 MVA
Rated MVA
20 MVA
Slope 1
15%
Nom Ph-Ph Voltage
115 kV
Nom Ph-Ph Voltage
2 pu
12.47 kV
Breakpoint 1
Connection
Wye
Connection
Wye
Breakpoint 2
8 pu
Grounding
Not within zone
Grounding
Within zone
Slope 2
95%
Angle WRT
Angle WRT
Resistance 3Ph
10.000 ohms
Resistance 3Ph
10.000 ohms
APPLICATION OF EXCESSIVE CURRENT (> 3 In) FOR EXTENTED PERIODS WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE RELAY!
WARNING
9-4
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING
b) TEST FOR ZERO DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

1.
2.
Inject the following currents into the relay:

WINDING 1
WINDING 2
PHASE
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
0.434 A 0
0.8 A 180
0.434 A 180
0.8 A 0
These are determined as follows:

6
20 10 VA - = 100.4 A,
I n ( w 1 ) = -------------------------------------------3
3 115 10 V
20 10 VA - = 925.98 A
I n ( w 2 ) = ------------------------------------------------3
3 12.47 10 V
(EQ 9.7)
From the Current Distribution diagram above, there is a 0.866 pu 100.4 A 200 = 0.434 A secondary current for HV
phases B and C, and a 0.866 pu 925.98 A 1000 = 0.8 A secondary current for LV phases b and c.
3.
The relay should display the following differential and restraint currents and the element should not operate:
PHASE
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Id)
PHASE
RESTRAINT CURRENT (Ir)
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.801 pu 180
0 0
0.801 pu 0
c) MINIMUM PICKUP TEST

Reduce the restraint current Ir to a value lower than 0.67 pu (the restraint corresponding to the intersection of Slope 1 and
the pickup). This is obtained from I r = 0.1 0.15 = 0.67 pu , where 0.1 is the differential setting of minimum pickup, and
0.15 is the setting of Slope 1. Note that
0 < I r < I r ( intersection of Minimum PKP and Slope 1 )
4.
Change the current magnitude as follows:

WINDING 1
PHASE
5.
(EQ 9.8)
WINDING 2
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)

0 A 0
0 A 0
0.15 A 0
0.23 A 180
0.15 A 180
0.23 A 0
The following differential and restraint current should be read from the T35 actual values menu:
PHASE
PHASE
0 0

0 0
0.044 pu 0
0.275 pu 180
0.044 pu 0
0.275 pu 0
The relay will not operate since Id is still lower that the 0.1 pu MINIMUM PICKUP setting.
6.
Increase I1 to 0.2 A. The differential current increases to I d = 0.136 pu > Min PKP and I r < 0.67 pu .
7.
Verify that the Percent Differential element operates and the following are displayed in the actual values menu:
PHASE
0 0
0 0
0.136 0
0.367 pu 180
0.136 0
0.367 pu 0
GE Multilin
PHASE
9-5
9 COMMISSIONING
d) SLOPE 1 TEST
Inject current in such a manner that the magnitude of Ir is larger than the restraint current of 0.67 pu, corresponding to the
intersection of the minimum PKP and Slope 1 and smaller than the Breakpoint 1 setting; that is,
I r ( intersection of Min PKP and Slope 1 ) < I r ( actual ) < I r ( Break 1 )
1.
Change the current magnitudes as follows:

WINDING 1
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
0.48 A 0
1 A 180
0.48 A 180
1 A 0
PHASE
PHASE
0 0
0 0
0.113 pu 0
1 pu 180
0.113 pu 0
1 pu 0
NOTE
3.
WINDING 2
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
2.
The Percent Differential element will not operate even though Id is larger than the Minimum Pickup, because Id
is not large enough to make the I d I r ratio larger than the Slope 1 setting of 15%. The actual ratio is 11.3%.
Adjust the I1 current as shown below (thereby increasing Id) and verify that the element operates.
WINDING 1
4.
5.
(EQ 9.9)
WINDING 2
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
0.45 A 0
1 A 180
0.45 A 180
1 A 0
The following differential and restraint current should appear in the T35 actual values menu:
PHASE
PHASE
0 0
0 0
0.170 pu 0
1 pu 180
0.170 pu 0
1 pu 0
The actual I d I r ratio is now 17%. Verify that the element operates correctly.
9-6
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING
e) INTERMEDIATE CURVE BETWEEN BREAKPOINT 1 AND BREAKPOINT 2

This procedure tests the intermediate section of the differential characteristic curve that lies between the Breakpoint 1 and
Breakpoint 2 points (points B1 and B2 on the Differential Restraint Characteristic diagram).
1.
Inject currents so that the magnitude of Ir is between the restraint magnitudes defined by Breakpoint 1 and Breakpoint
2; that is:
I r ( at Breakpoint 1 ) < I r < I r ( at Breakpoint 2 )
(EQ 9.10)
For this example, 2 pu < I r < 8 pu . Remember that the maximum current is the restraint current I r = 3.5 pu .
WINDING 1
2.
WINDING 2
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
1.2 A 0
3.5 A 180
1.2 A 180
3.5 A 0
PHASE
PHASE
0 0
0 0
1.287 pu 180
3.5 pu 180
1.287 pu 0
3.5 pu 0
The I d I r ratio is 36.77% and the Differential element does not operate because the actual I d = 1.287 pu is still too
low at I r = 3.5 pu .
NOTE
3.
Due to the mathematical complexity involved in shaping the curve between Breakpoint 1 and Breakpoint 2, an
Excel-based simulation tool is available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
With this tool, the user can see the preset I d I r curve point ratios and the actual I d I r ratio as per the entered
test currents. The tool graphically indicates differential and restraint current magnitudes and indicates whether
the relay should operate.
In this example, a ratio of I d I r > 38% causes the element to trip. Decreasing I1 as shown in the table below increases
the differential current Id, causing the element to operate.
WINDING 1
PHASE
4.
WINDING 2
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
1.1 A 0
3.5 A 180
1.1 A 180
3.5 A 0
PHASE
PHASE
0 0

0 0
1.471 pu 180
3.5 pu 180
1.471 pu 0
3.5 pu 0
GE Multilin
9-7
9 COMMISSIONING
f) SLOPE 2 TEST
Inject currents in such a manner that the magnitude of Ir is larger than the restraint current at Breakpoint 2; that is,
I r > I r ( Break 2 ) = 8 pu
1.
2.
(EQ 9.11)
Change the current magnitudes as follows:

WINDING 1
WINDING 2
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
0.5 A 0
9 A 180
0.5 A 180
9 A 0
PHASE
PHASE
0 0

0 0
8.078 pu 180
9 pu 180
8.078 pu 0
9 pu 0
Since I d I r = 89.8% and lower than the required 95%, the Percent Differential element will not operate.
3.
Adjust the I1 current as shown below (thereby increasing Id) and verify that the relay operates.
WINDING 1
4.
5.
WINDING 2
SINGLE CURRENT (I1)
PHASE
SINGLE CURRENT (I2)
0 A 0
0 A 0
0.2 A 0
9 A 180
0.2 A 180
9 A 0
PHASE
The following differential and restraint current should appear in the T35 actual values menu:
PHASE
PHASE
0 0

0 0
8.631 pu 180
9 pu 180
8.631 pu 0
9 pu 0
The actual I d I r ratio is now 95.9%. Verify that the element operates correctly.
g) SUMMARY
The above tests describe the principles of testing the differential element for all regions from the operating characteristic.
For verification of more points, one should consider adjusting the magnitude of the restraint current Ir to the desired portion
of the characteristic and change the other current to vary Id until the relay operates. Use the Excel tool to compare the
actual and expected operating values.
A blank result table is provided at the end of this chapter for convenience.
9-8
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING

D/YG30 TRANSFORMER WITH PHASE A TO GROUND FAULT ON THE GROUNDED WYE.

Transformer: D/y30, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)
D/y30 Transformer
Ia(f) = 1 pu 0
IA(f) = 0.577 pu 0
A
Fault
Ib(f) = 0
IB(f) = 0 pu
B
B
C
C
IC(f) = 0.577 pu 180
Ic(f) = 0
828737A1.CDR
Figure 93: CURRENT DISTRIBUTION ON A D/YG30 TRANSFORMER WITH A LV-SIDE GROUND FAULT
TEST
Balanced
Condition
Minimum
Pickup
Minimum
Pickup
Slope 1
Slope 1
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Slope 2
Slope 2
GE Multilin
PHASE
INJECTED CURRENT
DISPLAYED CURRENT
W1 CURRENT
W2 CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
RESTRAINT
0.29 0
0.926 180
0 0
0.5349 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.29 180
0 0
0 0
0.5349 0
0.137 0
0.521 180
0.048 0
0.3 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.137 180
0 0
0.048 0
0.3 0
0.108 0
0.521 180
0.102 0
0.3 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.108 180
0 0
0.102 0
0.3 0
0.4435 0
1.6 180
0.110 0
0.9026 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.4435 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.4425 0
1.7 180
0.165 0
0.979 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.4425 180
0 0
0.165 0
0.979 0
1.2 0
5 180
0.675 180
2.882 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
1.2 180
0 0
0.675 0
2.882 0
1.1 0
5 180
0.860 180
2.882 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
1.1 180
0 0
0.860 0
2.882 0
0.4 0
15 180
7.915 180
8.646 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.4 180
0 0
7.915 0
8.646 0
0.2 0
15 180
7.918 180
8.650 180
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.2 180
0 0
7.916 0
8.650 0
STATUS
Not Applicable
Block
Id = 0.048 < Min PKP
Operate
Id = 0.102 > Min PKP
Block
Id /Ir = 11.9%
Operate
Id /Ir = 16.8%
Block
Id /Ir = 23.4%
Operate
Id /Ir = 29.8%
Block
Id /Ir = 91.5%
Operate
Id /Ir = 95.7%
9-9
9 COMMISSIONING
Yg/D30 TRANSFORMER WITH PHASE B TO C FAULT ON THE DELTA SIDE.

Transformer: Y/D30, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)
Y/d30 Transformer
IA(f) = 0.5 pu 270
Ia(f) = 0
IB(f) = 1 pu 90
Ib(f) = 0.866 pu 90
B
F
C
C
IC(f) = 0.5 pu 270
Ic(f) = 0.866 pu 270

828738A1.CDR
Figure 94: CURRENT DISTRIBUTION ON A YG/D30 TRANSFORMER WITH AN a TO b FAULT ON THE LV SIDE
Three adjustable currents are required in this case. The Phase A and C Wye-side line currents, identical in magnitude but
displaced by 180, can be simulated with one current source passed through these relay terminals in series. The second
current source simulates the Phase B primary current. The third source simulates the delta b and c phase currents, also
equal in magnitude but displaced by 180.
TEST
Balanced
Condition
Min Pickup
change the
Min PKP to
0.2 pu
Minimum
Pickup
Slope 1
return the
Min PKP to
0.1 pu
Slope 1
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Slope 2
Slope 2
9-10
PHASE
INJECTED CURRENT
DISPLAYED CURRENT
W1 CURRENT
W2 CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
0.25 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.5 180
0.8 0
0 0
0.8 0
0.25 0
0.8 180
0 0
0.8 180
STATUS
RESTRAINT
0.25 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.5 180
0.95 0
0.154 0
0.948 0
0.25 0
0.95 180
0.155 0
0.950 180
0.25 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.5 180
1.05 0
0.253 0
1.049 0
0.25 0
1.05 180
0.255 0
1.050 180
0.25 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.5 180
0.92 0
0.123 0
0.919 0
0.25 0
0.92 180
0.123 0
0.919 180
0.25 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.5 180
0.95 0
0.153 0
0.948 0
0.25 0
0.95 180
0.153 0
0.948 180
2 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
4 180
1 0
5.37 180
6.37 0
2 0
1 180
5.37 0
6.37 180
2 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
4 180
0.8 0
5.57 180
6.37 0
2 0
0.8 180
5.57 0
6.37 180
4 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
8 180
0.8 0
11.93 180
12.73 0
4 0
0.8 180
11.93 0
12.73 180
4 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
8 180
0.6 0
12.13 180
12.73 0
4 0
0.6 180
12.13 0
12.73 180
Not Applicable
Block

Operate
Block
Id /Ir = 13.2%
Operate
Id /Ir = 15.9%
Block
Id /Ir = 84.3%
< 86.6% computed
Operate
Id /Ir = 87.5%
> 86.6% computed
Block
Id /Ir = 93.7%
< Slope 2 = 95%
Operate
Id /Ir = 95.7%
> Slope 2 = 95%
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING

D/D0 TRANSFORMER WITH PHASE B TO C FAULT ON THE SECONDARY DELTA WINDING.

Transformer: D/D0, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)
D/d0 Transformer
IA(f) = 0
Ia(f) = 0
IB(f) = 0.866 pu 90
H winding
X winding
Ib(f) = 0.866 pu 90
B
F
C
C
IC(f) = 0.866 pu 270.
Ic(f) = 0.866 pu 270

828739A1.CDR
Figure 95: CURRENT DISTRIBUTION OF D/D TRANSFORMER WITH AN a TO b FAULT ON THE LV SIDE
TEST
PHASE
INJECTED CURRENT
W1 CURRENT
Balanced
Condition
Min Pickup
Min Pickup
Slope 1
Slope 1
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Slope 2
Slope 2
GE Multilin
W2 CURRENT
DISPLAYED CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
STATUS
RESTRAINT
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.435 90
0.8 270
0 0
0.8 270
0.435 270
0.8 90
0 0
0.8 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.09 90
0.23 270
0.065 0
0.230 270
0.09 270
0.23 90
0.065 0
0.230 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.21 90
0.486 270
0.102 0
0.486 270
0.21 270
0.486 90
0.101 0
0.486 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.651 90
1.39 270
0.195 0
1.39 270
0.651 270
1.39 90
0.195 0
1.39 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.63 90
1.39 270
0.233 0
1.39 270
0.63 270
1.39 90
0.233 0
1.39 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
1.2 90
4.63 270
2.44 270
4.63 270
1.2 270
4.63 90
2.44 90
4.63 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.8 90
4.63 270
3.18 270
4.63 270
0.8 270
4.63 90
3.18 90
4.63 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.315 90
8.33 270
7.77 270
8.33 270
0.315 270
8.33 90
7.77 90
8.33 90
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0.18 90
8.33 270
8 270
8.33 270
0.18 270
8.33 90
8 90
8.33 90
Not Applicable
Block
Operate
Block
Id /Ir = 14% < 15%
Operate
Id /Ir = 16.8% > 15%
Block
Id /Ir = 52.6%
< 60% computed
Operate
Id /Ir = 68.8%
> 60% computed
Block
Id /Ir = 93.2%
< Slope 2 = 95%
Operate
Id /Ir = 96%
> Slope 2 = 95%
9-11
9.3 INRUSH INHIBIT TEST
9 COMMISSIONING
9.3INRUSH INHIBIT TEST
9.3.1 INRUSH INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE
The Inrush Inhibit Test requires a secondary injection test capable of producing a current with an adjustable second
harmonic component. Use the appropriate commissioning tables at the end of this chapter to record values.
NOTE
This procedure is based upon the example provided in the Differential Characteristic Test Example section. The transformer parameters are as follows:
Transformer: Y/y0, 230/69 kV, CT1 (300:1), CT2 (1000:1)
2nd Harmonic Setting = 20%
1.
Connect the relay test set to inject current into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input.
2.
Inject currents into the relay as shown in the table below until the biased differential element picks up.
3.
Confirm that only the percent differential element has operated.
4.
Increase the harmonic content until the element drops out. Record this value as the Inrush Inhibit Level Pickup.
5.
Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up. Record this value as the Inrush Inhibit
Level Dropout.
6.
Switch off the current.
7.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 for phases B and C.
8.
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for Winding 2 (and Windings 3 and 4 if necessary).
Table 91: INRUSH INHIBIT TEST SUMMARY

PHASE
INECTED
DISPLAYED
STATUS
W1
CURRENT
W1 2ND
HARMONIC
W2
CURRENT
W2 2ND
HARMONIC
Id
2ND
HARMONIC
1 A 0
18.01%
0 A 0
0.997 pu
18%
0.997 pu
1 A 0
19.97%
0 A 0
0.997 pu
20%
0.997 pu
Block
4 A 0
16.72%
2 A 180
15%
2 pu
18%
4 pu
Operate
4 A 0
17.60%
2 A 180
15%
2 pu
20%
4 pu
Block
2 A 0
15%
4 A 180
16.3%
2 pu
18%
4 pu
Operate
2 A 0
15%
4 A 180
17.3%
2 pu
20%
4 pu
Block
Ir
Operate
The second harmonic inhibit feature can be verified by setting the INRUSH INHIBIT MODE setting as follows:
For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to "2-out-of-3":
1.
Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to "Trad. 2nd" and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to "20%".
2.
Inject currents into one CT bank (one winding only) until the biased differential operates for all three phases.
3.
Apply a second harmonic to Phase A higher than the set threshold and monitor operation of Phases A, B, and C. The
element should stay operated on all three phases.
4.
Apply a second harmonic to Phase B with a level less than the set threshold.
5.
Increase the second harmonic level in Phase B. When it passes the set threshold, all three phases of differential protection should drop out.
For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to "Average":

1.
Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to "Trad. 2nd" and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to "20%".
2.
Inject currents into one CT bank (one winding only) until the biased differential operates for all three phases.
3.
Apply a second harmonic to Phase A with a level greater than the set threshold and monitor the operation of the Percent Differential element. The element should drop out when the injected second harmonic level becomes three times
larger than the set threshold.
9-12
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING
9.4 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST
9.4OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST
9.4.1 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST PROCEDURE
The Overexcitation Inhibit Test requires a secondary injection from a source capable of producing an adjustable 5th
harmonic component. Use the appropriate commissioning tables at the end of this chapter to record values.
NOTE
This procedure is based upon the example provided in the Differential Characteristic Test Example section. The transformer parameters are as follows:
Transformer: Y/y0, 230/69 kV, CT1 (300:1), CT2 (1000:1)
5th Harmonic Setting = 10%
1.
Connect the relay test set to inject current into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input.
2.
Inject a current into the relay until the biased Differential element operates.
3.
Confirm that ONLY the differential element has operated.
4.
Increase the 5th harmonic content level until the element drops out. Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit
Level Pickup.
5.
Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up. Record this value as the Overexcitation
Inhibit Level Dropout.
6.
Switch off the current.
7.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 for phases B and C.
8.
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for winding 2 (and windings 3 and 4 if necessary).
Table 92: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST SUMMARY

PHASE
INECTED
W1
CURRENT
A
B
C
DISPLAYED
5TH
HARMONIC
STATUS
Ir
W1 5TH
HARMONIC
W2
CURRENT
W2 5TH
HARMONIC
Id
1 A 0
8%
0 A 0
1 pu
8%
1 pu
1 A 0
10%
0 A 0
1 pu
10%
1 pu
Block
4 A 0
8.5%
2 A 180
9%
2 pu
8%
4 pu
Operate
4 A 0
9.5%
2 A 180
9%
2 pu
10%
4 pu
Block
2 A 0
9%
4 A 180
8.5%
2 pu
8%
4 pu
Operate
2 A 0
9%
4 A 180
9.5%
2 pu
10%
4 pu
Block
Operate
GE Multilin
9-13
9 COMMISSIONING
9.5COMMISSIONING TEST TABLES
9.5.1 DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINT TESTS
Table 93: DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST TABLE

TEST
PHASE
INJECTED CURRENT
W1 CURRENT
Balanced
Condition
DISPLAYED CURRENT
W2 CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL
STATUS
RESTRAINT
Not Applicable
B
C
Min Pickup
Status: ____________
Id = _______________
C
Min Pickup
Status: ____________
Id = _______________
C
Slope 1
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Slope 1
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Intermediate
Slope 1 & 2
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Slope 2
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Slope 2
Status: ____________
Id /Ir = _____________
9.5.2 INRUSH INHIBIT TESTS
Table 94: INRUSH INHIBIT TEST TABLE

PHASE
INECTED
W1
CURRENT
(A)
W1 2ND
HARMONIC
(%)
DISPLAYED
W2
CURRENT
(A)
W2 2ND
HARMONIC
(%)
Id (PU)
2ND
HARMONIC
(%)
Ir (PU)
STATUS
(BLOCK/
OPERATE)
B
C
9-14
GE Multilin
9 COMMISSIONING

9.5.3 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TESTS
Table 95: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST RESULTS

PHASE
INECTED
W1
CURRENT
(A)
W1 5TH
HARMONIC
(%)
DISPLAYED
W2
CURRENT
(A)
W2 5TH
HARMONIC
(%)
Id (PU)
5TH
HARMONIC
(%)
STATUS
Ir (PU)
(BLOCK/
OPERATE)
A
B
C
GE Multilin
9-15
9 COMMISSIONING
9-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
AppendicesAPPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists
A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS
A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 12)
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6144
SRC 1 Ia RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase A current RMS
6146
SRC 1 Ib RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase B current RMS
6148
SRC 1 Ic RMS
Amps
Source 1 phase C current RMS
6150
SRC 1 In RMS
Amps
Source 1 neutral current RMS
6152
SRC 1 Ia Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase A current magnitude
6154
SRC 1 Ia Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase A current angle
6155
SRC 1 Ib Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase B current magnitude
6157
SRC 1 Ib Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase B current angle
6158
SRC 1 Ic Mag
Amps
Source 1 phase C current magnitude
6160
SRC 1 Ic Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase C current angle
6161
SRC 1 In Mag
Amps
Source 1 neutral current magnitude
6163
SRC 1 In Angle
Degrees
Source 1 neutral current angle
6164
SRC 1 Ig RMS
Amps
Source 1 ground current RMS
6166
SRC 1 Ig Mag
Degrees
Source 1 ground current magnitude
6168
SRC 1 Ig Angle
Amps
Source 1 ground current angle
6169
SRC 1 I_0 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude
6171
SRC 1 I_0 Angle
Amps
Source 1 zero-sequence current angle
6172
SRC 1 I_1 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
6174
SRC 1 I_1 Angle
Amps
Source 1 positive-sequence current angle
6175
SRC 1 I_2 Mag
Degrees
Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
6177
SRC 1 I_2 Angle
Amps
Source 1 negative-sequence current angle
6178
SRC 1 Igd Mag
Degrees
Source 1 differential ground current magnitude
6180
SRC 1 Igd Angle
Amps
Source 1 differential ground current angle
6208
SRC 2 Ia RMS
Amps
6210
SRC 2 Ib RMS
Amps
6212
SRC 2 Ic RMS
Amps
6214
SRC 2 In RMS
Amps
6216
SRC 2 Ia Mag
Amps
6218
SRC 2 Ia Angle
Degrees
6219
SRC 2 Ib Mag
Amps
6221
SRC 2 Ib Angle
Degrees
6222
SRC 2 Ic Mag
Amps
6224
SRC 2 Ic Angle
Degrees
6225
SRC 2 In Mag
Amps
6227
SRC 2 In Angle
Degrees
6228
SRC 2 Ig RMS
Amps
6230
SRC 2 Ig Mag
Degrees
6232
SRC 2 Ig Angle
Amps
6233
SRC 2 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6235
SRC 2 I_0 Angle
Amps
6236
SRC 2 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6238
SRC 2 I_1 Angle
Amps
6239
SRC 2 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6241
SRC 2 I_2 Angle
Amps
6242
SRC 2 Igd Mag
Degrees
GE Multilin
A-1
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6244
SRC 2 Igd Angle
Amps
6272
SRC 3 Ia RMS
Amps
6274
SRC 3 Ib RMS
Amps
6276
SRC 3 Ic RMS
Amps
6278
SRC 3 In RMS
Amps
6280
SRC 3 Ia Mag
Amps
6282
SRC 3 Ia Angle
Degrees
6283
SRC 3 Ib Mag
Amps
6285
SRC 3 Ib Angle
Degrees
6286
SRC 3 Ic Mag
Amps
6288
SRC 3 Ic Angle
Degrees
6289
SRC 3 In Mag
Amps
6291
SRC 3 In Angle
Degrees
6292
SRC 3 Ig RMS
Amps
6294
SRC 3 Ig Mag
Degrees
6296
SRC 3 Ig Angle
Amps
6297
SRC 3 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6299
SRC 3 I_0 Angle
Amps
6300
SRC 3 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6302
SRC 3 I_1 Angle
Amps
6303
SRC 3 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6305
SRC 3 I_2 Angle
Amps
6306
SRC 3 Igd Mag
Degrees
6308
SRC 3 Igd Angle
Amps
6336
SRC 4 Ia RMS
Amps
6338
SRC 4 Ib RMS
Amps
6340
SRC 4 Ic RMS
Amps
6342
SRC 4 In RMS
Amps
6344
SRC 4 Ia Mag
Amps
6346
SRC 4 Ia Angle
Degrees

6347
SRC 4 Ib Mag
Amps
6349
SRC 4 Ib Angle
Degrees
6350
SRC 4 Ic Mag
Amps
6352
SRC 4 Ic Angle
Degrees
6353
SRC 4 In Mag
Amps
6355
SRC 4 In Angle
Degrees
6356
SRC 4 Ig RMS
Amps
6358
SRC 4 Ig Mag
Degrees
6360
SRC 4 Ig Angle
Amps
6361
SRC 4 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6363
SRC 4 I_0 Angle
Amps
6364
SRC 4 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6366
SRC 4 I_1 Angle
Amps
6367
SRC 4 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6369
SRC 4 I_2 Angle
Amps
6370
SRC 4 Igd Mag
Degrees
6372
SRC 4 Igd Angle
Amps
A-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6400
SRC 5 Ia RMS
Amps
6402
SRC 5 Ib RMS
Amps
6404
SRC 5 Ic RMS
Amps
6406
SRC 5 In RMS
Amps
6408
SRC 5 Ia Mag
Amps
6410
SRC 5 Ia Angle
Degrees
6411
SRC 5 Ib Mag
Amps
6413
SRC 5 Ib Angle
Degrees
6414
SRC 5 Ic Mag
Amps
6416
SRC 5 Ic Angle
Degrees
6417
SRC 5 In Mag
Amps
6419
SRC 5 In Angle
Degrees
6420
SRC 5 Ig RMS
Amps
6422
SRC 5 Ig Mag
Degrees
6424
SRC 5 Ig Angle
Amps
6425
SRC 5 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6427
SRC 5 I_0 Angle
Amps
6428
SRC 5 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6430
SRC 5 I_1 Angle
Amps
6431
SRC 5 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6433
SRC 5 I_2 Angle
Amps
6434
SRC 5 Igd Mag
Degrees
6436
SRC 5 Igd Angle
Amps
6464
SRC 6 Ia RMS
Amps
6466
SRC 6 Ib RMS
Amps
6468
SRC 6 Ic RMS
Amps
6470
SRC 6 In RMS
Amps
6472
SRC 6 Ia Mag
Amps
6474
SRC 6 Ia Angle
Degrees
6475
SRC 6 Ib Mag
Amps
6477
SRC 6 Ib Angle
Degrees
6478
SRC 6 Ic Mag
Amps
6480
SRC 6 Ic Angle
Degrees
6481
SRC 6 In Mag
Amps
6483
SRC 6 In Angle
Degrees
6484
SRC 6 Ig RMS
Amps
6486
SRC 6 Ig Mag
Degrees
6488
SRC 6 Ig Angle
Amps
6489
SRC 6 I_0 Mag
Degrees
6491
SRC 6 I_0 Angle
Amps
6492
SRC 6 I_1 Mag
Degrees
6494
SRC 6 I_1 Angle
Amps
6495
SRC 6 I_2 Mag
Degrees
6497
SRC 6 I_2 Angle
Amps
6498
SRC 6 Igd Mag
Degrees
6500
SRC 6 Igd Angle
Amps
6656
SRC 1 Vag RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS
GE Multilin
A-3
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6658
SRC 1 Vbg RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS
6660
SRC 1 Vcg RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS
6662
SRC 1 Vag Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude
6664
SRC 1 Vag Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase AG voltage angle
6665
SRC 1 Vbg Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude
6667
SRC 1 Vbg Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase BG voltage angle
6668
SRC 1 Vcg Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude
6670
SRC 1 Vcg Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase CG voltage angle
6671
SRC 1 Vab RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS
6673
SRC 1 Vbc RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS
6675
SRC 1 Vca RMS
Volts
Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS
6677
SRC 1 Vab Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude
6679
SRC 1 Vab Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase AB voltage angle
6680
SRC 1 Vbc Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude
6682
SRC 1 Vbc Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase BC voltage angle
6683
SRC 1 Vca Mag
Volts
Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude
6685
SRC 1 Vca Angle
Degrees
Source 1 phase CA voltage angle
6686
SRC 1 Vx RMS
Volts
Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS
6688
SRC 1 Vx Mag
Volts
Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
6690
SRC 1 Vx Angle
Degrees
Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle
6691
SRC 1 V_0 Mag
Volts
Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude
6693
SRC 1 V_0 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle
6694
SRC 1 V_1 Mag
Volts
Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude
6696
SRC 1 V_1 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle
6697
SRC 1 V_2 Mag
Volts
Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude
6699
SRC 1 V_2 Angle
Degrees
Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle
6720
SRC 2 Vag RMS
Volts
6722
SRC 2 Vbg RMS
Volts
6724
SRC 2 Vcg RMS
Volts
6726
SRC 2 Vag Mag
Volts
6728
SRC 2 Vag Angle
Degrees
6729
SRC 2 Vbg Mag
Volts
6731
SRC 2 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6732
SRC 2 Vcg Mag
Volts
6734
SRC 2 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6735
SRC 2 Vab RMS
Volts
6737
SRC 2 Vbc RMS
Volts
6739
SRC 2 Vca RMS
Volts
6741
SRC 2 Vab Mag
Volts
6743
SRC 2 Vab Angle
Degrees
6744
SRC 2 Vbc Mag
Volts
6746
SRC 2 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6747
SRC 2 Vca Mag
Volts
6749
SRC 2 Vca Angle
Degrees
6750
SRC 2 Vx RMS
Volts
6752
SRC 2 Vx Mag
Volts
6754
SRC 2 Vx Angle
Degrees
A-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6755
SRC 2 V_0 Mag
Volts
6757
SRC 2 V_0 Angle
Degrees

6758
SRC 2 V_1 Mag
Volts
6760
SRC 2 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6761
SRC 2 V_2 Mag
Volts
6763
SRC 2 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6784
SRC 3 Vag RMS
Volts
6786
SRC 3 Vbg RMS
Volts
6788
SRC 3 Vcg RMS
Volts
6790
SRC 3 Vag Mag
Volts
6792
SRC 3 Vag Angle
Degrees
6793
SRC 3 Vbg Mag
Volts
6795
SRC 3 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6796
SRC 3 Vcg Mag
Volts
6798
SRC 3 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6799
SRC 3 Vab RMS
Volts
6801
SRC 3 Vbc RMS
Volts
6803
SRC 3 Vca RMS
Volts

6805
SRC 3 Vab Mag
Volts
6807
SRC 3 Vab Angle
Degrees
6808
SRC 3 Vbc Mag
Volts
6810
SRC 3 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6811
SRC 3 Vca Mag
Volts
6813
SRC 3 Vca Angle
Degrees
6814
SRC 3 Vx RMS
Volts
6816
SRC 3 Vx Mag
Volts
6818
SRC 3 Vx Angle
Degrees
6819
SRC 3 V_0 Mag
Volts
6821
SRC 3 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6822
SRC 3 V_1 Mag
Volts
6824
SRC 3 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6825
SRC 3 V_2 Mag
Volts
6827
SRC 3 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6848
SRC 4 Vag RMS
Volts
6850
SRC 4 Vbg RMS
Volts
6852
SRC 4 Vcg RMS
Volts
6854
SRC 4 Vag Mag
Volts
6856
SRC 4 Vag Angle
Degrees
6857
SRC 4 Vbg Mag
Volts
6859
SRC 4 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6860
SRC 4 Vcg Mag
Volts
6862
SRC 4 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6863
SRC 4 Vab RMS
Volts
6865
SRC 4 Vbc RMS
Volts
6867
SRC 4 Vca RMS
Volts
6869
SRC 4 Vab Mag
Volts
6871
SRC 4 Vab Angle
Degrees
GE Multilin
A-5
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6872
SRC 4 Vbc Mag
Volts
6874
SRC 4 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6875
SRC 4 Vca Mag
Volts
6877
SRC 4 Vca Angle
Degrees
6878
SRC 4 Vx RMS
Volts
6880
SRC 4 Vx Mag
Volts
6882
SRC 4 Vx Angle
Degrees
6883
SRC 4 V_0 Mag
Volts
6885
SRC 4 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6886
SRC 4 V_1 Mag
Volts

6888
SRC 4 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6889
SRC 4 V_2 Mag
Volts
6891
SRC 4 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6912
SRC 5 Vag RMS
Volts
6914
SRC 5 Vbg RMS
Volts
6916
SRC 5 Vcg RMS
Volts
6918
SRC 5 Vag Mag
Volts
6920
SRC 5 Vag Angle
Degrees

6921
SRC 5 Vbg Mag
Volts
6923
SRC 5 Vbg Angle
Degrees
6924
SRC 5 Vcg Mag
Volts
6926
SRC 5 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6927
SRC 5 Vab RMS
Volts
6929
SRC 5 Vbc RMS
Volts
6931
SRC 5 Vca RMS
Volts
6933
SRC 5 Vab Mag
Volts
6935
SRC 5 Vab Angle
Degrees
6936
SRC 5 Vbc Mag
Volts
6938
SRC 5 Vbc Angle
Degrees
6939
SRC 5 Vca Mag
Volts
6941
SRC 5 Vca Angle
Degrees
6942
SRC 5 Vx RMS
Volts
6944
SRC 5 Vx Mag
Volts
6946
SRC 5 Vx Angle
Degrees
6947
SRC 5 V_0 Mag
Volts
6949
SRC 5 V_0 Angle
Degrees
6950
SRC 5 V_1 Mag
Volts
6952
SRC 5 V_1 Angle
Degrees
6953
SRC 5 V_2 Mag
Volts
6955
SRC 5 V_2 Angle
Degrees
6976
SRC 6 Vag RMS
Volts
6978
SRC 6 Vbg RMS
Volts
6980
SRC 6 Vcg RMS
Volts
6982
SRC 6 Vag Mag
Volts
6984
SRC 6 Vag Angle
Degrees
6985
SRC 6 Vbg Mag
Volts
6987
SRC 6 Vbg Angle
Degrees
A-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
6988
SRC 6 Vcg Mag
Volts
6990
SRC 6 Vcg Angle
Degrees
6991
SRC 6 Vab RMS
Volts
6993
SRC 6 Vbc RMS
Volts
6995
SRC 6 Vca RMS
Volts
6997
SRC 6 Vab Mag
Volts
6999
SRC 6 Vab Angle
Degrees
7000
SRC 6 Vbc Mag
Volts
7002
SRC 6 Vbc Angle
Degrees
7003
SRC 6 Vca Mag
Volts
7005
SRC 6 Vca Angle
Degrees
7006
SRC 6 Vx RMS
Volts
7008
SRC 6 Vx Mag
Volts
7010
SRC 6 Vx Angle
Degrees
7011
SRC 6 V_0 Mag
Volts
7013
SRC 6 V_0 Angle
Degrees
7014
SRC 6 V_1 Mag
Volts
7016
SRC 6 V_1 Angle
Degrees
7017
SRC 6 V_2 Mag
Volts
7019
SRC 6 V_2 Angle
Degrees
7168
SRC 1 P
Watts
Source 1 three-phase real power
7170
SRC 1 Pa
Watts
Source 1 phase A real power
7172
SRC 1 Pb
Watts
Source 1 phase B real power
7174
SRC 1 Pc
Watts
Source 1 phase C real power
7176
SRC 1 Q
Vars
Source 1 three-phase reactive power
7178
SRC 1 Qa
Vars
Source 1 phase A reactive power
7180
SRC 1 Qb
Vars
Source 1 phase B reactive power
7182
SRC 1 Qc
Vars
Source 1 phase C reactive power
7184
SRC 1 S
VA
Source 1 three-phase apparent power
7186
SRC 1 Sa
VA
Source 1 phase A apparent power
7188
SRC 1 Sb
VA
Source 1 phase B apparent power
7190
SRC 1 Sc
VA
Source 1 phase C apparent power
7192
SRC 1 PF
---
Source 1 three-phase power factor
7193
SRC 1 Phase A PF
---
Source 1 phase A power factor
7194
SRC 1 Phase B PF
---
Source 1 phase B power factor
7195
SRC 1 Phase C PF
---
Source 1 phase C power factor
7200
SRC 2 P
Watts
7202
SRC 2 Pa
Watts
7204
SRC 2 Pb
Watts
7206
SRC 2 Pc
Watts
7208
SRC 2 Q
Vars
7210
SRC 2 Qa
Vars
7212
SRC 2 Qb
Vars
7214
SRC 2 Qc
Vars
7216
SRC 2 S
VA
7218
SRC 2 Sa
VA
7220
SRC 2 Sb
VA
GE Multilin
A-7
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
7222
SRC 2 Sc
VA
7224
SRC 2 PF
---
7225
SRC 2 Phase A PF
---
7226
SRC 2 Phase B PF
---
7227
SRC 2 Phase C PF
---
7232
SRC 3 P
Watts
7234
SRC 3 Pa
Watts
7236
SRC 3 Pb
Watts
7238
SRC 3 Pc
Watts
7240
SRC 3 Q
Vars
7242
SRC 3 Qa
Vars
7244
SRC 3 Qb
Vars
7246
SRC 3 Qc
Vars
7248
SRC 3 S
VA
7250
SRC 3 Sa
VA
7252
SRC 3 Sb
VA
7254
SRC 3 Sc
VA
7256
SRC 3 PF
---
7257
SRC 3 Phase A PF
---
7258
SRC 3 Phase B PF
---
7259
SRC 3 Phase C PF
---
7264
SRC 4 P
Watts
7266
SRC 4 Pa
Watts
7268
SRC 4 Pb
Watts
7270
SRC 4 Pc
Watts
7272
SRC 4 Q
Vars
7274
SRC 4 Qa
Vars
7276
SRC 4 Qb
Vars
7278
SRC 4 Qc
Vars
7280
SRC 4 S
VA
7282
SRC 4 Sa
VA
7284
SRC 4 Sb
VA
7286
SRC 4 Sc
VA
7288
SRC 4 PF
---
7289
SRC 4 Phase A PF
---
7290
SRC 4 Phase B PF
---
7291
SRC 4 Phase C PF
---
7296
SRC 5 P
Watts
7298
SRC 5 Pa
Watts
7300
SRC 5 Pb
Watts
7302
SRC 5 Pc
Watts
7304
SRC 5 Q
Vars
7306
SRC 5 Qa
Vars
7308
SRC 5 Qb
Vars
7310
SRC 5 Qc
Vars
7312
SRC 5 S
VA
7314
SRC 5 Sa
VA
A-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
7316
SRC 5 Sb
VA
7318
SRC 5 Sc
VA
7320
SRC 5 PF
---
7321
SRC 5 Phase A PF
---
7322
SRC 5 Phase B PF
---
7323
SRC 5 Phase C PF
---
7328
SRC 6 P
Watts
7330
SRC 6 Pa
Watts
7332
SRC 6 Pb
Watts
7334
SRC 6 Pc
Watts
7336
SRC 6 Q
Vars
7338
SRC 6 Qa
Vars
7340
SRC 6 Qb
Vars
7342
SRC 6 Qc
Vars
7344
SRC 6 S
VA
7346
SRC 6 Sa
VA
7348
SRC 6 Sb
VA
7350
SRC 6 Sc
VA
7352
SRC 6 PF
---
7353
SRC 6 Phase A PF
---
7354
SRC 6 Phase B PF
---
7355
SRC 6 Phase C PF
---
7552
SRC 1 Frequency
Hz
Source 1 frequency
7553
SRC 2 Frequency
Hz
Source 2 frequency
7554
SRC 3 Frequency
Hz
Source 3 frequency
7555
SRC 4 Frequency
Hz
Source 4 frequency
7556
SRC 5 Frequency
Hz
Source 5 frequency
7557
SRC 6 Frequency
Hz
Source 6 frequency
8960
Xfmr Ref Winding
---
Transformer reference winding
8961
Xfmr Iad Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase A current magnitude
8962
Xfmr Iad Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase A current angle
8963
Xfmr Iar Mag
Amps
Transformer restraint phase A current magnitude
8964
Xfmr Iar Angle
Degrees
Transformer restraint phase A current angle
8965
Xfmr Harm2 Iad Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase A second harmonic current magnitude
8966
Xfmr Harm2 Iad Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase A second harmonic current angle
8967
Xfmr Harm5 Iad Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase A fifth harmonic current magnitude
8968
Xfmr Harm5 Iad Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase A fifth harmonic current angle
8969
Xfmr Ibd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase B current magnitude
8970
Xfmr Ibd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase B current angle
8971
Xfmr Ibr Mag
Amps
Transformer restraint phase B current magnitude
8972
Xfmr Ibr Angle
Degrees
Transformer restraint phase B current angle
8973
Xfmr Harm2 Ibd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase B second harmonic current magnitude
8974
Xfmr Harm2 Ibd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase B second harmonic current angle
8975
Xfmr Harm5 Ibd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase B fifth harmonic current magnitude
8976
Xfmr Harm5 Ibd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase B fifth harmonic current angle
8977
Xfmr Icd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase C current magnitude
8978
Xfmr Icd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase C current angle
GE Multilin
A-9
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
8979
Xfmr Icr Mag
Amps
Transformer restraint phase C current magnitude
8980
Xfmr Icr Angle
Degrees
Transformer restraint phase C current angle
8981
Xfmr Harm2 Icd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase C second harmonic current magnitude
8982
Xfmr Harm2 Icd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase C second harmonic current angle
8983
Xfmr Harm5 Icd Mag
Amps
Transformer differential phase C fifth harmonic current magnitude
8984
Xfmr Harm5 Icd Angle
Degrees
Transformer differential phase C fifth harmonic current angle
12306
Oscill Num Triggers
---
Oscillography number of triggers
13504
DCMA Inputs 1 Value
mA
dcmA input 1 actual value
13506
DCMA Inputs 2 Value
mA
13508
DCMA Inputs 3 Value
mA
13510
DCMA Inputs 4 Value
mA
13512
DCMA Inputs 5 Value
mA
13514
DCMA Inputs 6 Value
mA
13516
DCMA Inputs 7 Value
mA
13518
DCMA Inputs 8 Value
mA
13520
DCMA Inputs 9 Value
mA
13522
DCMA Inputs 10 Value
mA
13524
mA
13526
mA
13528
mA
13530
mA
13532
mA
13534
mA
13536
mA
13538
mA
13540
mA
13542
mA
13544
mA
13546
mA
13548
mA
13550
mA
13552
RTD Inputs 1 Value
---
RTD input 1 actual value
13553
RTD Inputs 2 Value
---
13554
RTD Inputs 3 Value
---
13555
RTD Inputs 4 Value
---
13556
RTD Inputs 5 Value
---
13557
RTD Inputs 6 Value
---
13558
RTD Inputs 7 Value
---
13559
RTD Inputs 8 Value
---
13560
RTD Inputs 9 Value
---
13561
RTD Inputs 10 Value
---
13562
RTD Inputs 11 Value
---
13563
RTD Inputs 12 Value
---
13564
RTD Inputs 13 Value
---
13565
RTD Inputs 14 Value
---
13566
RTD Inputs 15 Value
---
13567
RTD Inputs 16 Value
---
A-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
13568
RTD Inputs 17 Value
---
13569
RTD Inputs 18 Value
---
13570
RTD Inputs 19 Value
---
13571
RTD Inputs 20 Value
---
13572
RTD Inputs 21 Value
---
13573
RTD Inputs 22 Value
---
13574
RTD Inputs 23 Value
---
13575
RTD Inputs 24 Value
---
13576
RTD Inputs 25 Value
---
13577
RTD Inputs 26 Value
---
13578
RTD Inputs 27 Value
---
13579
RTD Inputs 28 Value
---
13580
RTD Inputs 29 Value
---
13581
RTD Inputs 30 Value
---
13582
RTD Inputs 31 Value
---
13583
RTD Inputs 32 Value
---
13584
RTD Inputs 33 Value
---
13585
RTD Inputs 34 Value
---
13586
RTD Inputs 35 Value
---
13587
RTD Inputs 36 Value
---
13588
RTD Inputs 37 Value
---
13589
RTD Inputs 38 Value
---
13590
RTD Inputs 39 Value
---
13591
RTD Inputs 40 Value
---
13592
RTD Inputs 41 Value
---
13593
RTD Inputs 42 Value
---
13594
RTD Inputs 43 Value
---
13595
RTD Inputs 44 Value
---
13596
RTD Inputs 45 Value
---
13597
RTD Inputs 46 Value
---
13598
RTD Inputs 47 Value
---
13599
RTD Inputs 48 Value
---
24459
Active Setting Group
---
Current setting group
32768
Tracking Frequency
Hz
Tracking frequency
39425
FlexElement 1 Value
---
FlexElement 1 actual value
39427
FlexElement 2 Value
---
39429
FlexElement 3 Value
---
39431
FlexElement 4 Value
---
39433
FlexElement 5 Value
---
39435
FlexElement 6 Value
---
39437
FlexElement 7 Value
---
39439
FlexElement 8 Value
---
39441
FlexElement 9 Value
---
39443
FlexElement 10 Value
---
39445
---
39447
---
39449
---
GE Multilin
A-11
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS
FLEXANALOG NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
39451
---
39453
---
39455
---
45584
GOOSE Analog In 1
---
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1
45586
GOOSE Analog In 2
---
45588
GOOSE Analog In 3
---
45590
GOOSE Analog In 4
---
45592
GOOSE Analog In 5
---
45594
GOOSE Analog In 6
---
45596
GOOSE Analog In 7
---
45598
GOOSE Analog In 8
---
45600
GOOSE Analog In 9
---
45602
GOOSE Analog In 10
---
45604
GOOSE Analog In 11
---
45606
GOOSE Analog In 12
---
45608
GOOSE Analog In 13
---
45610
GOOSE Analog In 14
---
45612
GOOSE Analog In 15
---
45614
GOOSE Analog In 16
---
A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS
Table A2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS

ADDRESS
FLEXINTEGER NAME
UNITS
DESCRIPTION
9968
GOOSE UInt Input 1
---
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1
9970
GOOSE UInt Input 2
---
9972
GOOSE UInt Input 3
---
9974
GOOSE UInt Input 4
---
9976
GOOSE UInt Input 5
---
9978
GOOSE UInt Input 6
---
9980
GOOSE UInt Input 7
---
9982
GOOSE UInt Input 8
---
9984
GOOSE UInt Input 9
---
9986
GOOSE UInt Input 10
---
9988
GOOSE UInt Input 11
---
9990
GOOSE UInt Input 12
---
9992
GOOSE UInt Input 13
---
9994
GOOSE UInt Input 14
---
9996
GOOSE UInt Input 15
---
9998
GOOSE UInt Input 16
---
A-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to
requests issued by a master computer.
For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10Base-T, or 10Base-F. Data flow is half-duplex
in all configurations. See chapter 3 for details on communications wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION
SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS
1 byte
FUNCTION CODE
1 byte
DATA
N bytes
CRC
2 bytes
DEAD TIME
3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with function code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin
B-1
APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS:
ALGORITHM:
B-2
-->
data transfer
16 bit working register
Alow
low order byte of A
Ahigh
high order byte of A
CRC
16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j
loop counters
(+)
logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
total number of data bytes
Di
i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x)
right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
1.
FFFF (hex) --> A
2.
0 --> i
3.
0 --> j
4.
Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5.
j + 1 --> j
6.
shr (A)
7.
Is there a carry?
No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8.
Is j = 8?
No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9.
i + 1 --> i
10.
Is i = N?
11.
A --> CRC
No: go to 3; Yes: continue
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE
MODBUS DEFINITION
GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
Read holding registers
Read actual values or settings
04
Read holding registers
Read actual values or settings
05
Force single coil
Execute operation
06
Preset single register
Store single setting
10
16
Preset multiple registers
Store multiple settings
HEX
DEC
03
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)

This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16-bit (two-byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The T35 interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting
three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXAMPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
04
FUNCTION CODE
04
06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high
40
BYTE COUNT
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low
50
DATA #1 - high
00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high
00
DATA #1 - low
28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low
03
DATA #2 - high
01
2C
CRC - low
A7
DATA #2 - low
CRC - high
4A
DATA #3 - high
00
DATA #3 - low
00
CRC - low
0D
CRC - high
60
GE Multilin
B-3
APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of operation codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values FF and 00
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code.
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
FUNCTION CODE
05
FUNCTION CODE
05
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - low
01
OPERATION CODE - low
01
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - low
00
CODE VALUE - low
00
CRC - low
DF
CRC - low
DF
CRC - high
6A
CRC - high
6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION
CODE (HEX)
DEFINITION
DESCRIPTION
0000
NO OPERATION
Does not do anything.
0001
RESET
Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS
Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY
Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 103F
VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF
Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either ON or OFF.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).
MASTER TRANSMISSION
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE RESPONSE
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
FUNCTION CODE
06
FUNCTION CODE
06
40
40
51
51
DATA - high
00
DATA - high
00
DATA - low
C8
DATA - low
C8
CRC - low
CE
CRC - low
CE
CRC - high
DD
CRC - high
DD
B-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B

B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).

MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXMAPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
10
FUNCTION CODE
10
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
BYTE COUNT
04
CRC - lo
07
DATA #1 - high order byte
00
CRC - hi
64
DATA #1 - low order byte
C8
DATA #2 - high order byte
00
DATA #2 - low order byte
01
CRC - low order byte
12
CRC - high order byte
62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES

Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
B9
FUNCTION CODE
39
FUNCTION CODE
CD
ERROR CODE
01
F2
93
95
GE Multilin
B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
1.
Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2.
Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3.
Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4.
If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES
Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES
Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
B-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.
datalog.cfg and datalog.dat
To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.
dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat
To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:
To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime
To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime
Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The command password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes command password protection.
When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. Command security is
required to change the command password. Similarly, the setting password is set up at memory location 4002. These are
the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY menu via the
keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain command level security access, the command password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain setting
level security access, the setting password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered setting password must
match the current setting password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
Command and setting passwords each have a 30 minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password,
and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the setting password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the command password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used
to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled (a value of 0 represents disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled.
Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which
the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the
passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
GE Multilin
B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 43)

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000
UR Product Type
0 to 65535
---
F001
0002
Product Version
0 to 655.35
---
0.01
F001
1
0
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)

0010
Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
0020
Manufacturing Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0022
Modification Number
0 to 65535
---
F001
0
Order Code x
0040
Order Code
---
---
---
F204
0090
Ethernet MAC Address
---
---
---
F072
0093
Reserved (13 items)
---
---
---
F001
00A0
CPU Module Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00B0
CPU Supplier Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00C0
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items)
---
---
---
F203
(none)
0 to 4294967295
F143
Self Test Targets (Read Only)

0200
Self Test States (2 items)
Front Panel (Read Only)

0204
LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items)
0 to 65535
---
F501
0220
Display Message
---
---
---
F204
(none)
0248
Last Key Pressed
0 to 47
---
F530
0 (None)
0 to 42
---
F190
0 (No key -- use

between real keys)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)

0280
Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules)

0400
Virtual Input 1 State
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0401
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0402
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0403
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0404
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0405
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0406
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0407
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0408
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0409
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
040F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0410
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0411
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0412
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0413
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0414
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0415
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0416
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0417
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0418
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0419
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
B-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
041C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
041F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0420
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0421
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0422
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0423
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0424
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0425
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0426
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0427
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0428
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0429
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
042F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0430
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0431
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0432
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0433
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0434
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0435
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0436
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0437
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0438
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0439
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043A
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043B
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043C
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043D
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043E
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
043F
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)

0800
Digital Counter 1 Value
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
0802
Digital Counter 1 Frozen
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
0804
Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0806
Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0808
...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
0810
0818
0820
0828
0830
0838

0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 65535
---
F502
FlexStates (Read Only)

0900
FlexState Bits (16 items)
Element States (Read Only)

1000
Element Operate States (64 items)
GE Multilin
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
---
---
---
F200
(none)
0 to 65535
---
F001
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)

1080
Formatted user-definable displays (16 items)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)

1200
User Map Values (256 items)
Element Targets (Read Only)

14C0
Target Sequence
0 to 65535
---
F001
14C1
Number of Targets
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 65535
---
F001
---
---
---
F200
Element Targets (Read/Write)

14C2
Target to Read
Element Targets (Read Only)

14C3
Target Message
Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)

1500
Contact Input States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1508
Virtual Input States (8 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1510
Contact Output States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1518
Contact Output Current States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1520
Contact Output Voltage States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1528
Virtual Output States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1530
Contact Output Detectors (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)

1540
Remote Device States
0 to 65535
---
F500
1542
Remote Input States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
1550
Remote Devices Online
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
1551
Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1552
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1553
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1554
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
1555
0 to 3
---
F605
3 (Bad)
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)

15C0
Direct input states (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
F500
15C8
Direct outputs average message return time 1
0 to 65535
ms
F001
15C9
Direct outputs average message return time 2
0 to 65535
ms
F001
15CA
Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 1
0 to 65535
---
F001
15CB
Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 2
0 to 65535
---
F001
15D0
Direct device states
0 to 65535
---
F500
15D1
Reserved
0 to 65535
---
F001
15D2
Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 1
0 to 65535
---
F001
15D3
Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 2
0 to 65535
---
F001
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)

1610
Ethernet primary fibre channel status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
1611
Ethernet secondary fibre channel status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)

1618
Data logger channel count
0 to 16
channel
F001
1619
Time of oldest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F050
161B
Time of newest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
F050
161D
Data logger duration
0 to 999.9
days
0.1
F001
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)

1800
Source 1 Phase A Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1802
Source 1 Phase B Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1804
Source 1 Phase C Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1806
Source 1 Neutral Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1808
Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
180A
Source 1 Phase A Current Angle
180B
Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
B-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
180D
Source 1 Phase B Current Angle
180E
Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
1810
Source 1 Phase C Current Angle
1811
Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
1813
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
DEFAULT
0
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
Source 1 Neutral Current Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
1814
Source 1 Ground Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1816
Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1818
Source 1 Ground Current Angle
1819
Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
181B
Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
181C
Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
181E
Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
181F
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
1821
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
1822
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
1824
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
1825
Reserved (27 items)
1840
...Repeated for Source 2
1880
18C0
1900
1940
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
---
---
---
F001
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)

1A00
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
F060
1A02
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
F060
1A04
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
1A06
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
1A08
Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
1A09
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
1A0B
Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
1A0C
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
1A0E
Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
1A0F
1A11
F060
0 to 999999.999
V
V
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A13
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A15
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
1A17
Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle
1A18
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude
1A1A
Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle
1A1B
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude
1A1D
Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle
1A1E
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
1A20
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
1A22
Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
1A23
Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A25
Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
1A26
Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A28
Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
degrees
0.1
F002
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
F060
0
0
1A29
Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A2B
Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
1A2C
Reserved (20 items)
1A40
1A80
1AC0
GE Multilin
-359.9 to 0
0 to 999999.999
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
0
0
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 999999.999
0.001
F060
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
---
---
---
F001
B-11
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
1B00
1B40
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00
Source 1 Three Phase Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C02
Source 1 Phase A Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C04
Source 1 Phase B Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C06
Source 1 Phase C Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
0.001
F060
1C08
Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0A
Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0C
Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C0E
Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
1C10
Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C12
Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C14
Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C16
Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
1C18
Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C19
Source 1 Phase A Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C1A
Source 1 Phase B Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C1B
Source 1 Phase C Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C1C
Reserved (4 items)
---
---
---
F001
1C20
1C40
1C60
1C80
1CA0
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)

1D80
Frequency for Source 1
---
Hz
---
F003
1D82
---
Hz
---
F003
1D84
---
Hz
---
F003
1D86
---
Hz
---
F003
1D88
---
Hz
---
F003
1D8A
---
Hz
---
F003
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)

21E0
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase A
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E2
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase B
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E4
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase C
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
F060
21E6
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase A
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E7
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase B
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E8
Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21E9
Breaker 1 Operating Time
0 to 65535
ms
F001
21EA
...Repeated for Breaker Arcing Current 2
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)

2224
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Clear Command
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
2225
Breaker 2 Arcing Current Clear Command
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)

2230
B-12
Reset Unauthorized Access
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Transformer Differential And Restraint (Read Only)

2300
Transformer Reference Winding
1 to 6
---
F001
2301
Transformer Differential Phasor Iad Magnitude
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
2302
Transformer Differential Phasor Iad Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2303
Transformer Restraint Phasor Iar Magnitude
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
2304
Transformer Restraint Phasor Iar Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2305
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Iad Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
2306
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Iad Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2307
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Iad Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
2308
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Iad Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2309
Transformer Differential Phasor Ibd Magnitude
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
230A
Transformer Differential Phasor Ibd Angle
230B
Transformer Restraint Phasor Ibr Magnitude
230C
Transformer Restraint Phasor Ibr Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
230D
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Ibd Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
230E
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Ibd Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
230F
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Ibd Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
2310
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Ibd Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2311
Transformer Differential Phasor Icd Magnitude
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
2312
Transformer Differential Phasor Icd Angle
2313
Transformer Restraint Phasor Icr Magnitude
2314
Transformer Restraint Phasor Icr Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2315
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Icd Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
2316
Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Icd Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
2317
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Icd Magnitude
0 to 999.9
% fo
0.1
F001
2318
Transformer Differential 5th Harm Icd Angle
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
Remote double-point status inputs (read/write setting registers)

2620
Remote double-point status input 1 device
1 to 32
---
F001
2621
Remote double-point status input 1 item
0 to 128
---
F156
0 (None)
2622
Remote double-point status input 1 name
1 to 64
---
F205
"Rem Ip 1"
2628
Remote double-point status input 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
2629
... Repeated for double-point status input 2
2632
263B
2644
IEC 61850 GGIO5 configuration (read/write setting registers)

26B0
IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 1 operand
---
---
---
F612
26B1
---
---
---
F612
26B2
---
---
---
F612
26B3
---
---
---
F612
26B4
---
---
---
F612
26B5
---
---
---
F612
26B6
---
---
---
F612
26B7
---
---
---
F612
26B8
---
---
---
F612
26B9
---
---
---
F612
26BA
---
---
---
F612
26BB
---
---
---
F612
26BC
---
---
---
F612
26BD
---
---
---
F612
26BE
---
---
---
F612
26BF
---
---
---
F612
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
IEC 61850 received integers (read only actual values)

26F0
IEC 61850 received uinteger 1
GE Multilin
B-13
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
26F2
REGISTER NAME
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F4
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F6
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26F8
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FA
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FC
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
26FE
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2700
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2702
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2704
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2706
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
2708
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270A
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270C
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
270E
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)

2B00
FlexStates, one per register (256 items)
Expanded Digital Input/Output states (Read Only)

2D00
Contact Input States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
2D80
Contact Output States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
2E00
Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)

2F00
Remote Device States, one per register (16 items)
0 to 1
---
F155
0 (Offline)
2F80
Remote Input States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)

3000
Oscillography Number of Triggers
0 to 65535
---
F001
3001
Oscillography Available Records
0 to 65535
---
F001
3002
Oscillography Last Cleared Date
0 to 400000000
---
F050
3004
Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record
0 to 65535
---
F001
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)

3005
Oscillography Force Trigger
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
3011
Oscillography Clear Data
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
3012
Oscillography Number of Triggers
0 to 32767
---
F001
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
User Programmable Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)

3060
User Fault Report Clear
User Programmable Fault Report Actuals (Read Only)

3070
Newest Record Number
0 to 65535
---
F001
3071
Cleared Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
3073
Report Date (10 items)
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
User Programmable Fault Report (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)

3090
Fault Report 1 Fault Trigger
3091
Fault Report 1 Function
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
3092
Fault Report 1 Prefault Trigger
0 to 65535
---
F300
3093
Fault Report Analog Channel 1 (32 items)
0 to 65536
---
F600
30B3
Fault Report 1 Reserved (5 items)
---
---
---
F001
30B8
...Repeated for Fault Report 2

---
---
---
F204
(none)
0
Modbus file transfer (read/write)

3100
Name of file to read
Modbus file transfer values (read only)

3200
Character position of current block within file
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3202
Size of currently-available data block
0 to 65535
---
F001
3203
Block of data from requested file (122 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Event recorder actual values (read only)

3400
B-14
Events Since Last Clear
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
3402
Number of Available Events
REGISTER NAME
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3404
Event Recorder Last Cleared Date
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Event recorder commands (read/write)

3406
Event Recorder Clear Command
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)

34C0
DCMA Inputs 1 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C2
DCMA Inputs 2 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C4
DCMA Inputs 3 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C6
DCMA Inputs 4 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34C8
DCMA Inputs 5 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CA
DCMA Inputs 6 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CC
DCMA Inputs 7 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34CE
DCMA Inputs 8 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D0
DCMA Inputs 9 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D2
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D4
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D6
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34D8
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DA
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DC
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34DE
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E0
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E2
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E4
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E6
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34E8
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EA
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EC
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
34EE
-9999999 to 9999999
---
F004
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)

34F0
RTD Input 1 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F1
RTD Input 2 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F2
RTD Input 3 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F3
RTD Input 4 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F4
RTD Input 5 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F5
RTD Input 6 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F6
RTD Input 7 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F7
RTD Input 8 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F8
RTD Input 9 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34F9
RTD Input 10 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
0
0
34FA
RTD Input 11 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FB
RTD Input 12 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FC
RTD Input 13 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FD
RTD Input 14 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FE
RTD Input 15 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
34FF
RTD Input 16 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3500
RTD Input 17 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3501
RTD Input 18 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3502
RTD Input 19 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3503
RTD Input 20 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3504
RTD Input 21 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3505
RTD Input 22 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3506
RTD Input 23 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3507
RTD Input 24 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
GE Multilin
B-15
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
3508
RTD Input 25 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3509
RTD Input 26 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350A
RTD Input 27 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350B
RTD Input 28 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350C
RTD Input 29 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350D
RTD Input 30 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350E
RTD Input 31 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
350F
RTD Input 32 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3510
RTD Input 33 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3511
RTD Input 34 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3512
RTD Input 35 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3513
RTD Input 36 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3514
RTD Input 37 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3515
RTD Input 38 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3516
RTD Input 39 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3517
RTD Input 40 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3518
RTD Input 41 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
3519
RTD Input 42 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351A
RTD Input 43 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351B
RTD Input 44 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351C
RTD Input 45 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351D
RTD Input 46 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351E
RTD Input 47 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
351F
RTD Input 48 Value
-32768 to 32767
F002
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)

3560
Direct Device States, one per register (8 items)
0 to 1
---
F155
0 (Offline)
3570
Direct Input States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Passwords (Read/Write Command)

4000
Command Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)

4002
Setting Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008
Command Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
400A
Setting Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
Passwords (read only actual values)

4010
Command password status
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4011
Setting password status
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Passwords (read/write settings)

4012
Control password access timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
4013
Setting password access timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
30
4014
Invalid password attempts
2 to 5
---
F001
4015
Password lockout duration
5 to 60
minutes
F001
4016
Password access events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
1
4017
Local setting authorization
1 to 65535
---
F300
4018
Remote setting authorization
0 to 65535
---
F300
4019
Access authorization timeout
5 to 480
minutes
F001
30
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)

4040
Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)

4048
LED Test Function
4049
LED Test Control
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 3
---
F531
0 (English)
0.5 to 10
0.1
F001
10
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)

404F
Language
4050
Flash Message Time
B-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
4051
Default Message Timeout
10 to 900
F001
DEFAULT
300
4052
Default Message Intensity
0 to 3
---
F101
0 (25%)
4053
Screen Saver Feature
4054
Screen Saver Wait Time
4055
4056
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
1 to 65535
min
F001
30
Current Cutoff Level
0.002 to 0.02
pu
0.001
F001
20
Voltage Cutoff Level
0.1 to 1
0.1
F001
10
0
Communications (Read/Write Setting)

407E
COM1 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
407F
COM2 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
4080
Modbus Slave Address
1 to 254
---
F001
254
8 (115200)
4083
RS485 Com1 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
F112
4084
RS485 Com1 Parity
0 to 2
---
F113
0 (None)
4085
RS485 Com2 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
F112
8 (115200)
4086
RS485 Com2 Parity
0 to 2
---
F113
0 (None)
4087
IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
56554706
4089
IP Subnet Mask
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
4294966272
408B
Gateway IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
56554497
408D
Network Address NSAP
---
---
---
F074
409A
DNP Channel 1 Port
0 to 4
---
F177
0 (None)
0 (None)
409B
DNP Channel 2 Port
409C
DNP Address
409D
Reserved
409E
DNP Client Addresses (2 items)
40A3
TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol
0 to 4
---
F177
0 to 65519
---
F001
0 to 1
---
F001
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
1 to 65535
---
F001
502
20000
40A4
TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
40A5
TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
80
40A6
Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
F001
69
40A7
Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol

(zero means automatic) (2 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
40A9
DNP Unsolicited Responses Function
0 to 1
---
F102
40AA
DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout
0 to 60
F001
40AB
DNP unsolicited responses maximum retries
1 to 255
---
F001
10
40AC
DNP unsolicited responses destination address
0 to 65519
---
F001
40AD
Ethernet operation mode
0 to 1
---
F192
0 (Half-Duplex)
40AE
DNP current scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40AF
DNP voltage scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B0
DNP power scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B1
DNP energy scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
2 (1)
40B2
DNP power scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
40B3
DNP other scale factor
0 to 8
---
F194
2 (1)
40B4
DNP current default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
30000
40B6
DNP voltage default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
40B8
DNP power default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40BA
DNP energy default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40BE
DNP other default deadband
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40C0
DNP IIN time synchronization bit period
1 to 10080
min
F001
1440
40C1
DNP message fragment size
30 to 2048
---
F001
240
40C2
DNP client address 3
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C4
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C6
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
40C8
DNP number of paired binary output control points
0 to 32
---
F001
40C9
DNP TCP connection timeout
10 to 65535
---
F001
120
0 to 1
---
F001
1 to 65535
---
F001
2404
40CA
Reserved (22 items)
40E0
TCP port number for the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
GE Multilin
B-17
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
40E1
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol function
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
40E2
40E3
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol common address of ASDU
0 to 65535
---
F001
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol cyclic data transmit period
1 to 65535
F001
60
30000
40E4
IEC 60870-5-104 current default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
40E6
IEC 60870-5-104 voltage default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40E8
IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EA
IEC 60870-5-104 energy default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EC
IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40EE
IEC 60870-5-104 other default threshold
0 to 65535
---
F001
30000
40F0
IEC 60870-5-104 client address (5 items)
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
4104
IEC 60870-5-104 redundancy port
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
4005
Reserved (59 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
4140
DNP object 1 default variation
1 to 2
---
F001
4141
1 to 3
---
F001
4142
0 to 3
---
F523
0 (1)
4143
0 to 3
---
F524
0 (1)
4144
0 to 3
---
F523
0 (1)
0 (1)
4145
0 to 3
---
F523
4146
1 to 5
---
F001
4147
0 to 5
---
F525
0 (1)
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
3232235778
1 to 65535
---
F001
502
Ethernet switch (Read/Write Setting)

4148
Ethernet switch IP address
414A
Ethernet switch Modbus IP port number
414B
Ethernet switch Port 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414C
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414D
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414E
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
414F
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4150
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Ethernet switch (Read Only Actual Values)

4151
Ethernet switch MAC address
---
---
F072
4154
Ethernet switch Port 1 Status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4155
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4156
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4157
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4158
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
4159
0 to 2
---
F134
0 (Fail)
415A
Switch Firmware Version
0.00 to 99.99
---
0.01
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)

4168
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) function
0 to 1
---
F102
4169
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server IP address
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
416B
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP port number
1 to 65535
---
F001
123
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
---
---
---
F600
0 to 1
---
F260
0 (continuous)
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)

4170
Data Logger Clear
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)

4181
Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items)
4191
Data Logger Mode
4192
Data Logger Trigger
4193
Data Logger Rate
0 to 65535
---
F300
15 to 3600000
ms
F003
60000
0 to 235959
---
F050
Clock (Read/Write Command)

41A0
Real Time Clock Set Time
Clock (Read/Write Setting)

41A2
SR Date Format
0 to 4294967295
---
F051
41A4
SR Time Format
0 to 4294967295
---
F052
B-18
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
41A6
IRIG-B Signal Type
0 to 2
---
F114
DEFAULT
0 (None)
41A7
Clock Events Enable / Disable
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
41A8
Time Zone Offset from UTC
24 to 24
hours
0.5
F002
41A9
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
41AA
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month
0 to 11
---
F237
0 (January)
41AB
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day
0 to 6
---
F238
0 (Sunday)
41AC
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance
0 to 4
---
F239
0 (First)
41AD
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour
0 to 23
---
F001
41AE
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month
0 to 11
---
F237
0 (January)
41AF
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day
0 to 6
---
F238
0 (Sunday)
41B0
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance
0 to 4
---
F239
0 (First)
41B1
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour
0 to 23
---
F001
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)

41C0
Oscillography Number of Records
1 to 64
---
F001
41C1
Oscillography Trigger Mode
0 to 1
---
F118
0 (Auto. Overwrite)
50
41C2
Oscillography Trigger Position
0 to 100
F001
41C3
Oscillography Trigger Source
0 to 65535
---
F300
41C4
Oscillography AC Input Waveforms
0 to 4
---
F183
2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0
Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
F600
4200
Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)

4260
Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
4261
Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

4280
FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED
4281
User LED type (latched or self-resetting)
4282
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2
4284
4286
4288
428A
428C
428E
4290
4292
4294
4296
4298
429A
429C
429E
42A0
42A2
42A4
42A6
42A8
42AA
42AC
42AE
42B0
42B2
42B4
42B6
42B8
GE Multilin
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F127
1 (Self-Reset)
B-19
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
42BA
42BC
42BE
42C0
42C2
42C4
42C6
42C8
42CA
42CC
42CE
42D0
42D2
42D4
42D6
42D8
42DA
42DC
42DE
RANGE
UNITS
0 to 1
---
---
---
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
F133
0 (Not Programmed)
---
F202
Relay-1
1 (Enabled)
Installation (Read/Write Setting)

43E0
Relay Programmed State
43E1
Relay Name
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)

4441
User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function
0 to 1
---
F102
4442
User Programmable Direct Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4443
User Programmable Remote Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4444
User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4445
User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
4446
User Programmable Battery Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4447
User Programmable SNTP Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4448
User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
4449
User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4480
Phase CT 1 Primary
4481
Phase CT 1 Secondary
4482
Ground CT 1 Primary
4483
Ground CT 1 Secondary
4484
...Repeated for CT Bank 2
4488
448C
4490
4494
1 to 65000
F001
0 to 1
---
F123
0 (1 A)
1 to 65000
F001
0 to 1
---
F123
0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)

4500
Phase VT 1 Connection
0 to 1
---
F100
0 (Wye)
4501
Phase VT 1 Secondary
50 to 240
0.1
F001
664
4502
Phase VT 1 Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
F060
4504
Auxiliary VT 1 Connection
0 to 6
---
F166
1 (Vag)
4505
Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary
50 to 240
0.1
F001
664
4506
Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
F060
4508
...Repeated for VT Bank 2
4510
...Repeated for VT Bank 3

---
---
---
F206
SRC 1"
0 to 63
---
F400
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4580
Source 1 Name
4583
Source 1 Phase CT
B-20
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
4584
Source 1 Ground CT
0 to 63
---
F400
4585
Source 1 Phase VT
0 to 63
---
F400
4586
Source 1 Auxiliary VT
0 to 63
---
F400
4587
458E
4595
459C
45A3
Power System (Read/Write Setting)

4600
Nominal Frequency
25 to 60
Hz
F001
60
4601
Phase Rotation
0 to 1
---
F106
0 (ABC)
4602
Frequency And Phase Reference
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
4603
Frequency Tracking Function
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
Transformer General (Read/Write Setting)

4630
Transformer Number Of Windings
2 to 6
---
F001
4631
Transformer Phase Compensation
0 to 1
---
F160
0 (Internal (software))
1 to 20000
kW
F001
100
0 to 4
---
F161
1 (65C (oil))
1 to 20000
kW
F001
10
0 to 3
---
F162
0 (OA)
4632
Transformer Load Loss At Rated Load
4633
Transformer Rated Winding Temperature Rise
4634
Transformer No Load Loss
4635
Transformer Type Of Cooling
4636
Transformer Top-oil Rise Over Ambient
1 to 200
F001
35
4637
Transformer Thermal Capacity
0 to 200
kWh/C
0.01
F001
10000
4638
Transformer Winding Thermal Time Constant
0.25 to 15
min
0.01
F001
200
4639
Transformer Reference Winding Manual Selection
0 to 7
---
F470
0 (Auto. Selection)
0 (SRC 1)
Transformer windings (read/write settings)

4640
Transformer Winding 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
4641
Transformer Winding 1 Rated MVA
0.001 to 2000
MVA
0.001
F003
100000
4643
Transformer Winding 1 Nominal Phase-Phase Voltage
0.001 to 2000
kV
0.001
F003
220000
4645
Transformer Winding 1 Connection
0 to 2
---
F163
0 (Wye)
4646
Transformer Winding 1 Grounding
0 to 1
---
F164
0 (Not within zone)
4647
Transformer Winding 1 Angle w.r.t. Winding 1
4651
Transformer Winding 1 Resistance
4653
...Repeated for Transformer Winding 2
4666
4679
468C
469F
-359.9 to 0
degrees
0.1
F002
0.0001 to 100
ohms
0.0001
F003
100000
0 (Disabled)
Breaker control (read/write settings)

4700
Breaker 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
4701
Breaker 1 name
---
---
---
F206
Bkr 1"
4704
Breaker 1 mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
4705
Breaker 1 open
0 to 65535
---
F300
4706
Breaker 1 close
0 to 65535
---
F300
4707
Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
4708
Breaker 1 phase B closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
4709
Breaker 1 phase C closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
470A
Breaker 1 external alarm
0 to 65535
---
F300
470B
Breaker 1 alarm delay
0 to 65535
0.001
F003
470D
Breaker 1 pushbutton control
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
470E
Breaker 1 manual close recall time
0 to 65535
0.001
F003
4710
Breaker 1 out of service
0 to 65535
---
F300
0
0
4711
Breaker 1 block open
0 to 65535
---
F300
4712
Breaker 1 block close
0 to 65535
---
F300
4713
Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
GE Multilin
B-21
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
4714
REGISTER NAME
Breaker 1 phase B opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
4715
Breaker 1 phase C opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
4716
Breaker 1 operate time
0 to 65535
0.001
F001
70
4717
Breaker 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
---
---
4718
Reserved
4719
...Repeated for breaker 2
4732
474B
4764
477D
DEFAULT
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)

4800
FlexCurve A (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
48F0
FlexCurve B (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
0 to 65535
---
F001
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)

4A00
Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items)
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

4C00
User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text
---
---
---
F202
4C0A
User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text
---
---
---
F202
4C14
Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
4C19
Reserved (7 items)
---
---
---
F001
4C20
...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2
4C40
4C60
4C80
4CA0
4CC0
4CE0
4D00
4D20
4D40
4D60
4D80
4DA0
4DC0
4DE0
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)

4E00
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 2
---
F109
2 (Disabled)
4E01
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E0B
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E15
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E1F
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time
0 to 60
0.05
F001
4E20
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
4E21
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events
4E22
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand
4E23
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay
4E24
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function
4E25
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock
4E26
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority
4E27
4E28
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 600
0.05
F001
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F220
0 (Disabled)
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
4E29
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
4E2A
...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2
4E54
4E7E
B-22
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
4EA8
RANGE
4ED2
4EFC
4F26
4F50
4F7A
4FA4
4FCE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)

5000
FlexLogic Entry (512 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
16384
0 to 1
---
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
F205
0 to 3
RTD Ip 1
---
F174
0 (100 ohm Platinum)
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

5400
RTD Input 1 Function
5401
RTD Input 1 ID
5407
RTD Input 1 Type
5413
...Repeated for RTD Input 2
5426
5439
544C
545F
5472
5485
5498
54AB
54BE
54D1
54E4
54F7
550A
551D
5530
5543
5556
5569
557C
558F
55A2
55B5
55C8
55DB
55EE
5601
5614
5627
563A
564D
5660
5673
5686
5699
56AC
56BF
56D2
56E5
56F8
GE Multilin
B-23
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
570B
571E
5731
5744
5757
576A
577D
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (millisecond)
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

5800
FlexLogic Timer 1 Type
0 to 2
---
F129
5801
FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 60000
---
F001
5802
FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay
0 to 60000
---
F001
5803
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
5808
...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 2
5810
5818
5820
5828
5830
5838
5840
5848
5850
5858
5860
5868
5870
5878
5880
5888
5890
0 (Disabled)
5898
58A0
58A8
58B0
58B8
58C0
58C8
58D0
58D8
58E0
58E8
58F0
58F8
Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5900
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5901
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5902
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F122
0 (Phasor)
5903
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5904
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5906
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5907
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint
0 (Disabled)
5908
Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items)
590B
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target
B-24
0 to 1
---
F102
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
590C
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
590D
Reserved (3 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5910
...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2
5920
5930
5940
5950
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5D00
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
5D01
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (Disabled)
0 (SRC 1)
5D02
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F122
0 (Phasor)
5D03
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5D04
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5D06
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5D07
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5D08
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5D09
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5D0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
5D10
...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2
5D20
5D30
5D40
5D50
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)

5F80
Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1)
0 to 5
---
F001
5F81
Setting Groups Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F82
FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 6 (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
5F89
Setting Group Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
5F8A
Setting Group Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 5
---
F001
Setting Groups (Read Only)

5F8B
Current Setting Group
Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)

5F8C
Setting Group 1 Name
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5F94
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5F9C
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FA4
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FAC
---
---
---
F203
(none)
5FB4
---
---
---
F203
(none)
Transformer Percent Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

6200
Percent Differential Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6201
Percent Differential Pickup
0.05 to 1
pu
0.001
F001
100
6202
Percent Differential Slope 1
15 to 100
F001
25
6203
Percent Differential Break 1
1 to 2
pu
0.001
F001
2000
8000
6204
Percent Differential Break 2
2 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
6205
Percent Differential Slope 2
50 to 100
F001
100
6206
Inrush Inhibit Function
0 to 2
---
F168
1 (Adapt. 2nd)
6207
Inrush Inhibit Level
1 to 40
% fo
0.1
F001
200
6208
Overexcitation Inhibit Function
0 to 1
---
F169
0 (Disabled)
100
6209
Overexcitation Inhibit Level
1 to 40
% fo
0.1
F001
620A
Percent Differential Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
620B
Percent Differential Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
620C
Percent Differential Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
620D
Transformer Inrush Inhibit Mode
0 to 2
---
F189
0 (Per phase)
GE Multilin
B-25
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Transformer Instantaneous Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
6220
Transformer Instantaneous Differential Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
6221
Transformer Instantaneous Differential Pickup
2 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
8000
6222
Transformer Instantaneous Differential Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
6223
Transformer Instantaneous Differential Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
6224
Transformer Instantaneous Differential Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting)

72C0
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
72C1
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
72C2
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate A
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C3
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate B
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C4
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate C
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C5
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
72C6
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Limit
0 to 50000
kA2-cyc
F001
1000
72C7
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
72C8
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
72C9
Breaker 1 Arcing Current Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
72CA
...Repeated for Breaker 2 Arcing Current
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
DCMA I 1"
72D4
72DE
72E8
72F2
dcmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

7300
dcmA Inputs 1 Function
7301
dcmA Inputs 1 ID
7307
Reserved 1 (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
730B
dcmA Inputs 1 Units
---
---
---
F206
mA
730E
dcmA Inputs 1 Range
0 to 6
---
F173
6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F
dcmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
4000
7311
dcmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
20000
7313
Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
7318
...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 2
7330
7348
7360
7378
7390
73A8
73C0
73D8
73F0
7408
7420
7438
7450
7468
7480
7498
74B0
74C8
74E0
74F8
7510
7528
B-26
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (Disabled)
Disconnect switches (read/write settings)

7540
Disconnect switch 1 function
0 to 1
---
F102
7541
Disconnect switch 1 name
---
---
---
F206
SW 1"
7544
Disconnect switch 1 mode
0 to 1
---
F157
0 (3-Pole)
7545
Disconnect switch 1 open
0 to 65535
---
F300
7546
Disconnect switch 1 block open
0 to 65535
---
F300
7547
Disconnect switch 1 close
0 to 65535
---
F300
7548
Disconnect switch 1 block close
0 to 65535
---
F300
7549
Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754A
Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754B
Disconnect switch 1 phase B closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754C
Disconnect switch 1 phase B opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754D
Disconnect switch 1 phase C closed
0 to 65535
---
F300
754E
Disconnect switch 1 phase C opened
0 to 65535
---
F300
754F
Disconnect switch 1 operate time
0 to 65535
0.001
F001
70
7550
Disconnect switch 1 alarm delay
0 to 65535
0.001
F003
7552
Disconnect switch 1 events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7553
Reserved (2 items)
---
---
---
---
---
7555
...Repeated for disconnect switch 2
756A
757F
7594
75A9
75BE
75D3
75E8
75FD
7612
7627
763C
7651
7666
767B
7690
76A5
76BA
76CF
76E4
76F9
770E
7723
Thermal Overload Protecttion (Read/Write Settings)

7738
Thermal Protection 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7739
Thermal Protection 1 Source
0 to 5
---
F167
0 (SRC 1)
773A
Thermal Protection 1 Base Current
0.2 to 3
pu
0.01
F001
80
773B
Thermal Protection 1 K Factor
1 to 1.2
---
0.05
F001
110
773C
Thermal Protection 1 Trip Time Constant
0 to 1000
min.
F001
45
773D
Thermal Protection 1 Reset Time Constant
0 to 1000
min.
F001
45
773E
Thermal Protection 1 Minimum Reset Time
0 to 1000
min.
F001
20
773F
Thermal Protection 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
7740
Thermal Protection 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
7741
Thermal Protection 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7742
Thermal Protection 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
7743
Reserved (2 items)
---
---
---
F001
GE Multilin
B-27
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
7745
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Repeated for Thermal Protection 2
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
7B60
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 2
---
F109
2 (Disabled)
7B61
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B6B
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B75
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
7B7F
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time
0 to 60
0.05
F001
7B80
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7B81
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events
7B82
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand
7B83
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay
7B84
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function
7B85
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock
7B86
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority
7B87
7B88
7B89
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 600
0.05
F001
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 2
---
F220
0 (Disabled)
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
7B8A
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold
0 to 10
0.1
F001
7B8B
7BB6
7BE1
---
Hz
---
F001
7C0C
7C37
7C62
7C8D
7CB8
7CE3
7D0E
7D39
7D64
7D8F
7DBA
7DE5
Frequency (Read Only)

8000
Tracking Frequency
EGD Fast Production Status (Read Only)

83E0
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Signature
83E1
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time
83E3
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Size
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 4294967295
---
---
F003
0 to 65535
---
F001
0
0
EGD Slow Production Status (Read Only) (2 modules)

83F0
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature
83F1
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time
83F3
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size
83F4
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 4294967295
---
---
F003
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 (Disabled)
EGD Fast Production (Read/Write Setting)

8400
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
8401
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
8403
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate
50 to 1000
ms
50
F001
1000
8404
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (20 items)
0 to 65535
---
F001
8418
Reserved (80 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
0 (Disabled)
EGD Slow Production (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)

8500
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
8501
EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
8503
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate
500 to 1000
ms
50
F001
1000
B-28
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
8504
EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (50 items)
8536
Reserved (50 items)
8568
...Repeated for EGD Exchange 2
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
0 to 65535
---
F001
DEFAULT
0
---
---
---
F001
---
---
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)

8800
FlexState Parameters (256 items)
Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting)

8E00
Trip Bus 1 Function
8E01
Trip Bus 1 Block
---
---
---
F300
8E02
Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
8E03
Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
0.01
F001
8E04
Trip Bus 1 Input 1
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E05
Trip Bus 1 Input 2
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E06
Trip Bus 1 Input 3
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E07
Trip Bus 1 Input 4
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E08
Trip Bus 1 Input 5
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E09
Trip Bus 1 Input 6
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0A
Trip Bus 1 Input 7
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0B
Trip Bus 1 Input 8
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0C
Trip Bus 1 Input 9
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0D
Trip Bus 1 Input 10
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0E
Trip Bus 1 Input 11
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E0F
Trip Bus 1 Input 12
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E10
Trip Bus 1 Input 13
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E11
Trip Bus 1 Input 14
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E12
Trip Bus 1 Input 15
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E13
Trip Bus 1 Input 16
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E14
Trip Bus 1 Latching
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
8E15
Trip Bus 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
8E16
Trip Bus 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F001
8E16
Trip Bus 1 Events
8E18
Reserved (8 items)
8E20
...Repeated for Trip Bus 2
8E40
8E60
8E80
8EA0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

9000
FlexElement 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
9001
FlexElement 1 Name
---
---
---
F206
FxE 1
9004
FlexElement 1 InputP
0 to 65535
---
F600
9005
FlexElement 1 InputM
0 to 65535
---
F600
9006
FlexElement 1 Compare
0 to 1
---
F516
0 (LEVEL)
9007
FlexElement 1 Input
0 to 1
---
F515
0 (SIGNED)
9008
FlexElement 1 Direction
0 to 1
---
F517
0 (OVER)
9009
FlexElement 1 Hysteresis
0.1 to 50
0.1
F001
30
900A
FlexElement 1 Pickup
-90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
1000
900C
FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units
0 to 2
---
F518
0 (Milliseconds)
900D
FlexElement 1 DeltaT
20 to 86400
---
F003
20
900F
FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
9010
FlexElement 1 Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
0.001
F001
9011
FlexElement 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
9012
FlexElement 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
9013
FlexElement 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
9014
...Repeated for FlexElement 2
GE Multilin
B-29
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
9028
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
903C
9050
9064
9078
908C
90A0
90B4
90C8
90DC
90F0
9104
9118
912C
dcmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

9300
dcmA Output 1 Source
0 to 65535
---
F600
9301
dcmA Output 1 Range
0 to 2
---
F522
0 (1 to 1 mA)
9302
dcmA Output 1 Minimum
90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
9304
dcmA Output 1 Maximum
90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
1000
9306
...Repeated for dcmA Output 2
930C
9312
9318
931E
9324
932A
9330
9336
933C
9342
9348
934E
9354
935A
9360
9366
936C
9372
9378
937E
9384
938A
Direct Input/Output Names (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

9400
Direct Input 1 Name
0 to 96
---
F205
Dir Ip 1
9406
Direct Output 1 Name
1 to 96
---
F205
Dir Out 1
940C
...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 2
9418
9424
9430
943C
9448
9454
9460
946C
B-30
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
9478
9484
9490
949C
94A8
94B4
94C0
94CC
94D8
94E4
94F0
94FC
9508
9514
9520
952C
9538
9544
9550
955C
9568
9574
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 received integers (read/write setting registers)

9910
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 1 default value
9912
IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 mode
9913
...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 2
9916
9919
991C
991F
9922
9925
9928
992B
992E
9931
9934
9937
993A
993D
0 to 429496295
---
F003
1000
0 to 1
---
F491
0 (Default Value)
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)

9A01
FlexElement 1 Actual
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A03
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A05
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A07
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A09
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0B
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0D
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A0F
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A11
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A13
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A15
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A17
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A19
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
GE Multilin
B-31
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
9A1B
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A1D
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
9A1F
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
0
0 (Disabled)
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
9B00
Teleprotection Function
0 to 1
---
F102
9B01
Teleprotection Number of Terminals
2 to 3
---
F001
9B02
Teleprotection Number of Channels
1 to 2
---
F001
9B03
Teleprotection Local Relay ID
0 to 255
---
F001
9B04
Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID
0 to 255
---
F001
0
0
9B05
Teleprotection Terminal 2 ID
0 to 255
---
F001
9B06
Reserved (10 items)
0 to 1
---
---
F001
9B10
Teleprotection Input 1-n Default States (16 items)
0 to 3
---
F086
0 (Off)
9B30
Teleprotection Input 2-n Default States (16 items)
0 to 3
---
F086
0 (Off)
9B50
Teleprotection Output 1-n Operand (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
9B70
Teleprotection Output 2-n Operand (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
1 (OK)
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs Commands (Read/Write Command)

9B90
Teleprotection Clear Lost Packets
Teleprotection Channel Tests (Read Only)

9B91
Teleprotection Channel 1 Status
9B92
Teleprotection Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets
9B93
Teleprotection Channel 2 Status
9B94
Teleprotection Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets
9B95
Teleprotection Network Status
0 to 2
---
F134
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 2
---
F134
1 (OK)
0 to 65535
---
F001
0 to 2
---
F134
2 (n/a)
9BA0
Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States
0 to 1
---
F500
9BA1
Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States
0 to 1
---
F500
9BB0
Teleprotection Input 1 States, 1 per register (16 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
9BC0
Teleprotection Input 2 States, 1 per register (16 items)
0 to 1
---
F108
0 (Off)
Selector switch actual values (read only)

A210
Selector switch 1 position
1 to 7
---
F001
A211
Selector switch 2 position
1 to 7
---
F001
1
0 (Disabled)
Selector switch settings (read/write, 2 modules)

A280
Selector 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
A281
Selector 1 Range
1 to 7
---
F001
A282
Selector 1 Timeout
3 to 60
0.1
F001
50
A283
Selector 1 Step Up
0 to 65535
---
F300
A284
Selector 1 Step Mode
0 to 1
---
F083
0 (Time-out)
A285
Selector 1 Acknowledge
0 to 65535
---
F300
A286
Selector 1 Bit0
0 to 65535
---
F300
A287
Selector 1 Bit1
0 to 65535
---
F300
A288
Selector 1 Bit2
0 to 65535
---
F300
A289
Selector 1 Bit Mode
0 to 1
---
F083
0 (Time-out)
A28A
Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge
0 to 65535
---
F300
A28B
Selector 1 Power Up Mode
0 to 2
---
F084
0 (Restore)
A28C
Selector 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A28D
Selector 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A28E
Reserved (10 items)
---
---
F001
A298
...Repeated for Selector 2
DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting)

A300
DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
A400
DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 items)
0 to 65535
---
F300
Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)

A600
FlexCurve C (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
A680
FlexCurve D (120 items)
0 to 65535
ms
F011
B-32
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

A700
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A701
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type
0 to 1
---
F519
0 (Reset Dominant)
0
A702
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
F300
A703
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A704
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target
0 to 2
---
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A705
Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F001
A706
Reserved (4 items)
A70A
...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2
A714
A71E
A728
A732
A73C
A746
A750
A75A
A764
A76E
A778
A782
A78C
A796
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

A800
Digital Counter 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
A801
Digital Counter 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Counter 1"
A807
Digital Counter 1 Units
---
---
---
F206
(none)
A80A
Digital Counter 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80B
Digital Counter 1 Up
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80C
Digital Counter 1 Down
0 to 65535
---
F300
A80D
Digital Counter 1 Preset
2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
A80F
Digital Counter 1 Compare
2147483647 to
2147483647
---
F004
0
0
A811
Digital Counter 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A812
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A813
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count
0 to 65535
---
F300
A814
Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset
0 to 65535
---
F300
A815
Reserved (11 items)
---
---
---
F001
A820
A840
A860
1000000 to 1000000
---
0.001
F060
1000
0 to 1
---
F491
0 (Default Value)
---
---
---
F207
(none)
0 to 999999999.999
---
0.001
F060
A880
A8A0
A8C0
A8E0
IEC 61850 received analog settings (read/write)

AA00
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog 1 default value
AA02
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 mode
AA03
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 units
AA05
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 per-unit base
AA07
...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2
AA0E
AA15
AA1C
GE Multilin
B-33
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
AA23
AA2A
AA31
AA38
AA3F
AA46
AA4D
AA54
AA5B
AA62
AA69
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
IEC 61850 XCBR configuration (read/write settings)

AB24
Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status
AB25
Command to clear XCBR1 OpCnt (operation counter)
AB26
AB27
AB28
AB29
AB2A
AB2B
AB2C
AB2D
AB2E
AB2F
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
(none)
IEC 61850 LN name prefixes (read/write settings)

AB30
IEC 61850 logical node LPHD1 name prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
AB33
IEC 61850 logical node PIOCx name prefix (72 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC0B
IEC 61850 logical node PTOCx name prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC53
IEC 61850 logical node PTUVx name prefix (13 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC7A
IEC 61850 logical node PTOVx name prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AC98
IEC 61850 logical node PDISx name prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ACB6
IEC 61850 logical node RBRFx name prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ACFE
IEC 61850 logical node RPSBx name prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD01
IEC 61850 logical node RRECx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD13
IEC 61850 logical node MMXUx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD25
IEC 61850 logical node GGIOx name prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD34
IEC 61850 logical node RFLOx name prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD43
IEC 61850 logical node XCBRx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD55
IEC 61850 logical node PTRCx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD67
IEC 61850 logical node PDIFx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AD73
IEC 61850 logical node MMXNx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
ADE2
IEC 61850 logical node CSWIx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
AE3C
IEC 61850 logical node XSWIx name prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(none)
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
IEC 61850 XSWI configuration (read/write settings)

AECF
Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI1.ST.Loc status
AED0
Command to clear XSWI1 OpCnt (operation counter)
AED1
Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI2
AED3
AED5
AED7
AED9
AEDB
AEDD
AEDF
B-34
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
AEE1
AEE3
AEE5
AEE7
AEE9
AEEB
AEED
AEEF
AEF1
AEF3
AEF5
AEF7
AEF9
AEFB
AEFD
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 GGIO4 general analog configuration settings (read/write)

AF00
Number of analog points in GGIO4
4 to 32
---
F001
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input points configuration settings (read/write)

AF10
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 value
---
---
---
F600
AF11
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 deadband
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
100000
AF13
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 minimum
1000000000000 to
1000000000000
---
0.001
F060
AF15
IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 maximum
1000000000000 to
1000000000000
---
0.001
F060
1000000
AF17
...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 2
AF1E
AF25
AF2C
AF33
AF3A
AF41
AF48
AF4F
AF56
AF5D
AF64
AF6B
AF72
AF79
AF80
AF87
AF8E
AF95
AF9C
AFA3
AFAA
AFB1
AFB8
AFBF
AFC6
AFCD
AFD4
AFDB
AFE2
AFE9
GE Multilin
B-35
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 Logical Node Name Prefixes (Read/Write Setting)
AB30
IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AB33
IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC0B
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC53
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (12 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AC77
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (8 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
(None)
AC8F
IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
ACAD
IEC 61850 Logical Node RRBFx Name Prefix (24 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
ACF5
IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
ACF8
IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD0A
IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD1C
IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (4 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD28
IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD37
IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (2 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD3D
IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (2 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD43
IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
AD4F
IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 items)
0 to 65534
---
F206
(None)
IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

B01C
Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time
1 to 60
F001
60
B01D
IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna)
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
B013
IEC 61850 GSSE ID
B03F
IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna)
---
---
---
F209
GSSEOut
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B040
B043
IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address
---
---
---
F072
IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID
---
---
---
F209
GOOSEOut
0
B064
IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC Address
B067
IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority
---
---
---
F072
0 to 7
---
F001
B068
IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID
0 to 4095
---
F001
B069
IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID
0 to 16383
---
F001
B06A
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
1 to 65535
---
F001
102
---
---
---
F213
IECName
IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)

B06C
TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS Protocol
B06D
IEC 61850 Logical Device Name
B07D
IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance
---
---
---
F213
LDInst
B08D
IEC 61850 LPHD Location
---
---
---
F204
Location
B0B5
Include non-IEC 61850 Data
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B06B
IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B0B7
Reserved (15 items)
IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

B0C0
IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C2
IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C4
IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C6
IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0C8
IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CA
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CC
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0CE
IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D0
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsADeadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D2
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D4
IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D6
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0D8
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DA
IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DC
IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0DE
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B-36
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B0E0
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E2
IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E4
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E6
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0E8
IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EA
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EC
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0EE
IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F0
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F2
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
B0F4
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001
F003
10000
0 to 848
---
F615
0 (None)
8 to 128
---
F001
---
---
F300
B0F6
...Repeated for Deadband 2
B12C
B162
B198
B1CE
IEC 61850 Configurable Report Settings (Read/Write Setting)

B290
IEC 61850 configurable reports dataset items (64 items)
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)

B500
Number of Status Indications in GGIO1
B501
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication operands (128 items)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B5A0
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function
B5A1
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID
B5C2
Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address
B5C5
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority
B5C6
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID
B5C7
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID
B5C8
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev
B5CA
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve
B5CB
Configurable GOOSE dataset items for transmission

(64 items)
B60B
...Repeated for Module 2
B676
B6E1
B74C
B7B7
B822
B88D
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (None)
---
---
---
F209
GOOSEOut_x_
0
---
---
---
F072
0 to 7
---
F001
0 to 4095
---
F001
0 to 16383
---
F001
1 to 4294967295
---
F003
0 to 3
---
F611
3 (Relaxed)
0 to 542
---
F616
0 (None)
---
F233
0 (None)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B900
Configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception

(32 items)
B940
B980
B9C0
BA00
BA40
BA80
BAC0
0 to 32
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

BB00
Contact Input 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Cont Ip 1
BB06
Contact Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
BB07
Contact Input 1 Debounce Time
0 to 16
ms
0.5
F001
20
BB08
...Repeated for Contact Input 2
BB10
GE Multilin
B-37
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BB18
BB20
BB28
BB30
BB38
BB40
BB48
BB50
BB58
BB60
BB68
BB70
BB78
BB80
BB88
BB90
BB98
BBA0
BBA8
BBB0
BBB8
BBC0
BBC8
BBD0
BBD8
BBE0
BBE8
BBF0
BBF8
BC00
BC08
BC10
BC18
BC20
BC28
BC30
BC38
BC40
BC48
BC50
BC58
BC60
BC68
BC70
BC78
BC80
BC88
BC90
BC98
BCA0
BCA8
BCB0
BCB8
BCC0
B-38
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BCC8
BCD0
BCD8
BCE0
BCE8
BCF0
BCF8
BD00
BD08
BD10
BD18
BD20
BD28
BD30
BD38
BD40
BD48
BD50
BD58
BD60
BD68
BD70
BD78
BD80
BD88
BD90
BD98
BDA0
BDA8
BDB0
BDB8
BDC0
BDC8
BDD0
BDD8
BDE0
BDE8
BDF0
BDF8
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)

BE00
Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 24 (24 items)
0 to 3
---
F128
1 (33 Vdc)
0 to 1
---
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
F205
Virt Ip 1
F127
0 (Latched)
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

BE30
Virtual Input 1 Function
BE31
Virtual Input 1 Name
BE37
Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type
0 to 1
---
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F001
BE38
Virtual Input 1 Events
BE39
Reserved (3 items)
BE3C
...Repeated for Virtual Input 2
BE48
BE54
BE60
BE6C
BE78
BE84
GE Multilin
B-39
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
BE90
BE9C
BEA8
BEB4
BEC0
BECC
BED8
BEE4
BEF0
BEFC
BF08
BF14
BF20
BF2C
BF38
BF44
BF50
BF5C
BF68
BF74
BF80
BF8C
BF98
BFA4
BFB0
BFBC
BFC8
BFD4
BFE0
BFEC
BFF8
C004
C010
C01C
C028
C034
C040
C04C
C058
C064
C070
C07C
C088
C094
C0A0
C0AC
C0B8
C0C4
C0D0
C0DC
C0E8
C0F4
C100
C10C
B-40
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C118
C124
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

C130
Virtual Output 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Virt Op 1
C136
Virtual Output 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C137
Reserved
---
---
---
F001
C138
...Repeated for Virtual Output 2
C140
C148
C150
C158
C160
C168
C170
C178
C180
C188
C190
C198
C1A0
C1A8
C1B0
C1B8
C1C0
C1C8
C1D0
C1D8
C1E0
C1E8
C1F0
C1F8
C200
C208
C210
C218
C220
C228
C230
C238
C240
C248
C250
C258
C260
C268
C270
C278
C280
C288
C290
C298
C2A0
C2A8
C2B0
GE Multilin
B-41
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C2B8
C2C0
C2C8
C2D0
C2D8
C2E0
C2E8
C2F0
C2F8
C300
C308
C310
C318
C320
C328
C330
C338
C340
C348
C350
C358
C360
C368
C370
C378
C380
C388
C390
C398
C3A0
C3A8
C3B0
C3B8
C3C0
C3C8
C3D0
C3D8
C3E0
C3E8
C3F0
C3F8
C400
C408
C410
C418
C420
C428
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)

C430
Test Mode Function
0 to 1
---
F245
0 (Disabled)
C431
Force VFD and LED
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
C432
Test Mode Forcing
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Clear commands (read/write)

C433
B-42
Clear All Relay Records Command
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

C440
Contact Output 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
Cont Op 1"
C446
Contact Output 1 Operation
0 to 65535
---
F300
C447
Contact Output 1 Seal In
0 to 65535
---
F300
C448
Latching Output 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
F300
C449
Contact Output 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
C44A
Latching Output 1 Type
0 to 1
---
F090
0 (Operate-dominant)
---
---
---
F001
C44B
Reserved
C44C
...Repeated for Contact Output 2
C458
C464
C470
C47C
C488
C494
C4A0
C4AC
C4B8
C4C4
C4D0
C4DC
C4E8
C4F4
C500
C50C
C518
C524
C530
C53C
C548
C554
C560
C56C
C578
C584
C590
C59C
C5A8
C5B4
C5C0
C5CC
C5D8
C5E4
C5F0
C5FC
C608
C614
C620
C62C
C638
C644
C650
C65C
C668
GE Multilin
B-43
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C674
C680
C68C
C698
C6A4
C6B0
C6BC
C6C8
C6D4
C6E0
C6EC
C6F8
C704
C710
C71C
C728
C734
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 65535
---
F300
Reset (Read/Write Setting)

C750
FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)

C760
Control Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C761
Control Pushbutton 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C762
...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2
C764
C766
C768
C76A
C76C
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)

C771
Clear User Fault Reports operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C772
Clear Event Records operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C773
Clear Oscillography operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C774
Clear Data Logger operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C775
Clear Breaker 1 Arcing Current operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C776
0 to 65535
---
F300
C777
0 to 65535
---
F300
C778
0 to 65535
---
F300
C779
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77A
0 to 65535
---
F300
C77F
Clear Unauthorized Access operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C781
Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
C782
Reserved (13 items)
---
---
---
F001
Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)

C7A0
Force Contact Input x State (96 items)
0 to 2
---
F144
0 (Disabled)
C800
Force Contact Output x State (64 items)
0 to 3
---
F131
0 (Disabled)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)

C880
Direct Device ID
1 to 16
---
F001
C881
Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
C882
Platform Direct I/O Data Rate
64 to 128
kbps
64
F001
64
C883
Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
C884
Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
Direct input/output commands (Read/Write Command)

C888
B-44
Direct input/output clear counters command
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Direct inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

C890
Direct Input 1 Device Number
0 to 16
---
F001
C891
Direct Input 1 Number
0 to 96
---
F001
C892
Direct Input 1 Default State
0 to 3
---
F086
0 (Off)
C893
Direct Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
C894
...Repeated for Direct Input 2
C898
C89C
C8A0
C8A4
C8A8
C8AC
C8B0
C8B4
C8B8
C8BC
C8C0
C8C4
C8C8
C8CC
C8D0
C8D4
C8D8
C8DC
C8E0
C8E4
C8E8
C8EC
C8F0
C8F4
C8F8
C8FC
C900
C904
C908
C90C
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

CA10
Direct Output 1 Operand
CA11
Direct Output 1 Events
CA12
...Repeated for Direct Output 2
CA14
CA16
CA18
CA1A
CA1C
CA1E
CA20
CA22
CA24
CA26
CA28
CA2A
CA2C
CA2E
GE Multilin
0 to 65535
---
F300
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
B-45
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
CA30
CA32
CA34
CA36
CA38
CA3A
CA3C
CA3E
CA40
CA42
CA44
CA46
CA48
CA4A
CA4C
CA4E
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Direct Input/Output Alarms (Read/Write Setting)

CAD0
Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function
CAD1
Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Message Count
CAD2
Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Threshold
CAD3
Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events
CAD4
Reserved (4 items)
CAD8
Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function
CAD9
Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count
CADA
Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold
CADB
Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events
CADC
Reserved (4 items)
CAE0
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function
CAE1
CAE2
CAE3
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
100 to 10000
---
F001
600
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
100 to 10000
---
F001
600
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count
100 to 10000
---
F001
600
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
600
CAE4
Reserved (4 items)
CAE8
Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function
CAE9
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count
100 to 10000
---
F001
CAEA
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold
1 to 1000
---
F001
10
CAEB
Direct I/O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CAEC
Reserved (4 items)
---
---
F001
10
Remote Device 1
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

CB00
Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID
CB21
Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID
---
---
---
F209
0 to 16383
---
F001
CB22
Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset
0 to 16
---
F184
0 (Fixed)
CB23
Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme
0 to 1
---
F126
0 (No)
CB24
...Repeated for Device 2
CB48
CB6C
CB90
CBB4
CBD8
CBFC
CC20
CC44
CC68
CC8C
CCB0
B-46
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
CCD4
CCF8
CD1C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

CFA0
Remote Input 1 Device
1 to 16
---
F001
CFA1
Remote Input 1 Item
0 to 64
---
F156
0 (None)
CFA2
Remote Input 1 Default State
0 to 3
---
F086
0 (Off)
CFA3
Remote Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
CFA4
Remote Input 1 Name
1 to 64
---
F205
Rem Ip 1
CFAA
...Repeated for Remote Input 2
CFB4
CFBE
CFC8
CFD2
CFDC
CFE6
CFF0
CFFA
D004
D00E
D018
D022
D02C
D036
D040
D04A
D054
D05E
D068
D072
D07C
D086
D090
D09A
D0A4
D0AE
D0B8
D0C2
D0CC
D0D6
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D220
Remote Output DNA 1 Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
D221
Remote Output DNA 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
D222
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
D224
...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D228
D22C
D230
D234
D238
D23C
D240
D244
D248
GE Multilin
B-47
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D24C
D250
D254
D258
D25C
D260
D264
D268
D26C
D270
D274
D278
D27C
D280
D284
D288
D28C
D290
D294
D298
D29C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D2A0
Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand
0 to 65535
---
F300
D2A1
Remote Output UserSt 1 Events
0 to 1
---
F102
0 (Disabled)
D2A2
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
F001
D2A4
D2A8
D2AC
D2B0
D2B4
D2B8
D2BC
D2C0
D2C4
D2C8
D2CC
D2D0
D2D4
D2D8
D2DC
D2E0
D2E4
D2E8
D2EC
D2F0
D2F4
D2F8
D2FC
D300
D304
D308
D30C
D310
D314
B-48
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D318
D31C
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

D320
IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value
0 to 2
---
F001
D321
0 to 2
---
F001
D322
0 to 2
---
F001
D323
0 to 2
---
F001
D324
0 to 2
---
F001
D325
0 to 2
---
F001
D326
0 to 2
---
F001
D327
0 to 2
---
F001
D328
0 to 2
---
F001
D329
0 to 2
---
F001
D32A
0 to 2
---
F001
D32B
0 to 2
---
F001
D32C
0 to 2
---
F001
D32D
0 to 2
---
F001
D32E
0 to 2
---
F001
D32F
0 to 2
---
F001
D330
0 to 2
---
F001
D331
0 to 2
---
F001
D332
0 to 2
---
F001
D333
0 to 2
---
F001
D334
0 to 2
---
F001
D335
0 to 2
---
F001
D336
0 to 2
---
F001
D337
0 to 2
---
F001
D338
0 to 2
---
F001
D339
0 to 2
---
F001
D33A
0 to 2
---
F001
D33B
0 to 2
---
F001
D33C
0 to 2
---
F001
D33D
0 to 2
---
F001
D33E
0 to 2
---
F001
D33F
0 to 2
---
F001
D340
0 to 2
---
F001
D341
0 to 2
---
F001
D342
0 to 2
---
F001
D343
0 to 2
---
F001
D344
0 to 2
---
F001
D345
0 to 2
---
F001
D346
0 to 2
---
F001
D347
0 to 2
---
F001
D348
0 to 2
---
F001
D349
0 to 2
---
F001
D34A
0 to 2
---
F001
D34B
0 to 2
---
F001
D34C
0 to 2
---
F001
D34D
0 to 2
---
F001
D34E
0 to 2
---
F001
D34F
0 to 2
---
F001
D350
0 to 2
---
F001
D351
0 to 2
---
F001
D352
0 to 2
---
F001
GE Multilin
B-49
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
D353
0 to 2
---
F001
DEFAULT
2
D354
0 to 2
---
F001
D355
0 to 2
---
F001
D356
0 to 2
---
F001
D357
0 to 2
---
F001
D358
0 to 2
---
F001
D359
0 to 2
---
F001
D35A
0 to 2
---
F001
D35B
0 to 2
---
F001
D35C
0 to 2
---
F001
D35D
0 to 2
---
F001
D35E
0 to 2
---
F001
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)

D380
Remote Device 1 StNum
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
D382
Remote Device 1 SqNum
0 to 4294967295
---
F003
D384
...Repeated for Remote Device 2
D388
0 to 1
---
F102
1 (Enabled)
---
---
---
---
---
0 to 4294967295
---
F050
0 to 65535
---
F001
D38C
D390
D394
D398
D39C
D3A0
D3A4
D3A8
D3AC
D3B0
D3B4
D3B8
D3BC
D3C0
D3C4
D3C8
D3CC
D3D0
D3D4
D3D8
D3DC
D3E0
D3E4
D3E8
D3EC
D3F0
D3F4
D3F8
D3FC
Setting file template values (read only)

ED00
FlexLogic displays active
ED01
Reserved (6 items)
ED07
Last settings change date
ED09
Template bitmask (750 items)
B-50
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F040
UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F004
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register.
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January

1, 1970.
F051
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
F005
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
Last 16 bits are Seconds

1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
F006
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
(xx:xx:.SS.SSS):
0=00.000s,
F060
FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F011
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time
value is stored.
F070
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F071
F072
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the
number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F013
POWER_FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values
indicate leading.
F073
F074
F083
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
F084
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
GE Multilin
B-51
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F086
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE
F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
0 = Off, 1 = On
F090
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
F110
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
F101
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
F112
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
bitmask
0
value
bitmask
value
bitmask
9600
115200
300
value
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
1200
19200
14400
2400
38400
10
28800
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
4800
57600
11
33600
F113
ENUMERATION: PARITY
F103
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
bitmask
curve shape
bitmask
curve shape
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
IEEE Mod Inv
IEEE Very Inv
10
IAC Short Inv
IEEE Ext Inv
11
I2t
F114
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
IEC Curve A
12
Definite Time
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
IEC Curve B
13
FlexCurve A
IEC Curve C
14
FlexCurve B
IEC Short Inv
15
FlexCurve C
IAC Ext Inv
16
FlexCurve D
IAC Very Inv
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
B-52
IAC Inverse
F115
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
F116
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES
0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve A, 2 = FlexCurve B,
3 = FlexCurve C
F117
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
F119
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS
mask
value
mask
value
mask
value
mask
element
21
Phase Time Overcurrent 6
24
Phase Directional Overcurrent 1
value
25
Phase Directional Overcurrent 2

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
0.00
30
0.88
60
2.90
90
5.90
32
0.05
31
0.90
61
3.00
91
6.00
33
6.50
34
7.00
35

0.10
32
0.15
33
0.91
0.92
62
63
3.10
92
3.20
93
0.20
34
0.93
64
3.30
94
7.50
36
0.25
35
0.94
65
3.40
95
8.00
37
8.50
38
9.00
39
9.50
40
10.00
41
10.50
42
11.00
43
11.50
48
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1
12.00
49
12.50
50
13.00
51
13.50
52
14.00
53

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1
0.30
36
0.35
37
0.40
38
0.45
10
39
0.48
11
40
0.50
12
41
0.52
13
42
0.54
14
43
0.56
15
44
0.58
16
45
0.60
17
46
0.62
47
0.95
0.96
0.97
0.98
1.03
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.60
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
3.50
96
3.60
97
3.70
98
3.80
99
3.90
100
4.00
101
4.10
102
4.20
103
4.30
104
4.40
105
4.50
106
4.60
107
18
0.64
48
1.70
78
4.70
108
14.50
56
19
0.66
49
1.80
79
4.80
109
15.00
57
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2
15.50
60
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1
16.00
61
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 2

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
20
0.68
21
50
0.70
51
1.90
2.00
80
81
4.90
110
5.00
111
22
0.72
52
2.10
82
5.10
112
16.50
64
23
0.74
53
2.20
83
5.20
113
17.00
65
17.50
66
18.00
67
18.50
68
19.00
69
19.50
70
20.00
71
72
73
74
24
0.76
25
54
0.78
26
55
0.80
27
56
0.82
28
57
0.84
29
58
0.86
59
2.30
2.40
2.50
2.60
2.70
2.80
84
85
86
87
88
89
5.30
114
5.40
115
5.50
116
5.60
117
5.70
118
5.80
119
F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
75
80
Ground Time Overcurrent 1
81
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
82
83
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
84
85
96
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
bitmask
16
element
17
18
19
20
GE Multilin

97
Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
101
Opposite Phase Rotation
112
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1
113
Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2
120
Negative Sequence Overvoltage
140
Auxiliary Undervoltage 1
144
Phase Undervoltage 1
145
Phase Undervoltage 2
148
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1
B-53
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
element
APPENDIX B
bitmask
element
154
Compensated Overvoltage 1
424
Non-volatile Latch 5
156
Neutral Overvoltage 1
425
208
Transformer Instantaneous
426
209
Transformer Percent Differential
427
232
SRC1 50DD (Disturbance Detection)
428
233
429
234
430
235
431
236
432
237
433
280
Breaker Failure 1
434
281
Breaker Failure 2
435
282
Breaker Failure 3
544
Digital Counter 1
283
Breaker Failure 4
545
Digital Counter 2
284
Breaker Failure 5
546
Digital Counter 3
285
Breaker Failure 6
547
Digital Counter 4
288
Breaker Arcing Current 1
548
Digital Counter 5
289
549
Digital Counter 6
290
550
Digital Counter 7
291
551
Digital Counter 8
292
842
Trip Bus 1
293
843
Trip Bus 2
336
Setting Group
844
Trip Bus 3
337
Reset
845
Trip Bus 4
388
Selector 1
846
Trip Bus 5
389
Selector 2
847
Trip Bus 6
390
Control pushbutton 1
849
RTD Input 1
391
850
RTD Input 2
392
851
RTD Input 3
393
852
RTD Input 4
394
853
RTD Input 5
395
854
RTD Input 6
396
855
RTD Input 7
400
FlexElement 1
856
RTD Input 8
401
FlexElement 2
857
RTD Input 9
402
FlexElement 3
858
RTD Input 10
403
FlexElement 4
859
RTD Input 11
404
FlexElement 5
860
RTD Input 12
405
FlexElement 6
861
RTD Input 13
406
FlexElement 7
862
RTD Input 14
407
FlexElement 8
863
RTD Input 15
408
FlexElement 9
864
RTD Input 16
409
FlexElement 10
865
RTD Input 17
410
FlexElement 11
866
RTD Input 18
411
FlexElement 12
867
RTD Input 19
412
FlexElement 13
868
RTD Input 20
413
FlexElement 14
869
RTD Input 21
414
FlexElement 15
870
RTD Input 22
415
FlexElement 16
871
RTD Input 23
420
872
RTD Input 24
421
873
RTD Input 25
422
874
RTD Input 26
423
875
RTD Input 27
B-54
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask
element
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
element
876
RTD Input 28
936
Disconnect switch 17
877
RTD Input 29
937
878
RTD Input 30
938
879
RTD Input 31
939
880
RTD Input 32
940
881
RTD Input 33
941
882
RTD Input 34
942
883
RTD Input 35
943
884
RTD Input 36
968
Breaker 1
885
RTD Input 37
969
Breaker 2
886
RTD Input 38
970
Breaker 3
887
RTD Input 39
971
Breaker 4
888
RTD Input 40
972
Breaker 5
889
RTD Input 41
973
Breaker 6
890
RTD Input 42
1012
Thermal overload protection 1
891
RTD Input 43
1013
Thermal overload protection 2
892
RTD Input 44
893
RTD Input 45
894
RTD Input 46
895
RTD Input 47
896
RTD Input 48
900
User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
901
902
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
903
0 = No, 1 = Yes
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
920
Disconnect switch 1
921
Disconnect switch 2
922
Disconnect switch 3
923
Disconnect switch 4
924
Disconnect switch 5
925
Disconnect switch 6
926
Disconnect switch 7
927
Disconnect switch 8
928
Disconnect switch 9
929
F131
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
930
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
931
932
933
934
935
GE Multilin
F125
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
F128
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
F130
ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
B-55
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Bitmask
F134
ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
Error
15
Latching Output Discrepancy
16
Ethernet Switch Fail
17
Maintenance Alert 01
18
SNTP Failure
F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
19
---
20
Primary Ethernet Fail
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
21
Secondary Ethernet Fail
22
Temperature Monitor
23
Process Bus Trouble
F136
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
24
Brick Trouble
25
Field RTD Trouble
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles

3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
26
Field TDR Trouble
27
Remote Device Offline
28
Direct Device Offline
F137
ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON
FUNCTION
29
Direct Input/Output Ring Break
30
Any Minor Error
31
Any Major Error
0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched
32
IEC 61850 Data Set
33
---
34
---
35
---
F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
36
Watchdog Error
37
Low On Memory
38
---
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED
43
Module Failure 01
44
Module Failure 02
45
Module Failure 03
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V,

3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A,
6 = Notched 2 A
46
Module Failure 04
47
Module Failure 05
48
Module Failure 06
49
Module Failure 07
50
Module Failure 08
F141
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS
Bitmask
51
Module Failure 09
52
Incompatible Hardware
Error
53
Module Failure 10
Any Self Tests
54
Module Failure 11
IRIG-B Failure
55
Module Failure 12
Port 1 Offline
Port 2 Offline
Port 3 Offline
Port 4 Offline
Port 5 Offline
Port 6 Offline
RRTD Communcations Failure
Voltage Monitor
10
FlexLogic Error Token
11
Equipment Mismatch
12
Process Bus Failure
13
Unit Not Programmed
14
System Exception
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
F144
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
B-56
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask
F145
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
bitmask type
0
bitmask type
null
bitmask type
G
H
14
15
N
O
Test Mode Isolated
27
Test Mode Forcible
28
Test Mode Disabled
29
Temperature Warning On
30
Temperature Warning Off

Unauthorized Access
bitmask type
21
22
definition
26
16
23
31
10
17
24
32
System Integrity Recovery

System Integrity Recovery 06
System Integrity Recovery 07
11
18
25
33
12
19
26
34
13
20
F146
ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES
bitmask
definition
Events Cleared
Oscillography Triggered
Date/time Changed
Default Settings Loaded
Test Mode Forcing On
Test Mode Forcing Off
Power On
Power Off
Relay In Service
Relay Out Of Service
10
Watchdog Reset
11
Oscillography Clear
12
Reboot Command
13
Led Test Initiated
14
Flash Programming
15
Fault Report Trigger
16
User Programmable Fault Report Trigger
17
---
18
Reload CT/VT module Settings
19
---
20
Ethernet Port 1 Offline
21
22
23
24
25
GE Multilin
F151
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
NONE
17
RTD 17
33
RTD 33
RTD 1
18
RTD 18
34
RTD 34
RTD 2
19
RTD 19
35
RTD 35
RTD 3
20
RTD 20
36
RTD 36
RTD 4
21
RTD 21
37
RTD 37
RTD 5
22
RTD 22
38
RTD 38
RTD 6
23
RTD 23
39
RTD 39
RTD 7
24
RTD 24
40
RTD 40
RTD 8
25
RTD 25
41
RTD 41
RTD 9
26
RTD 26
42
RTD 42
10
RTD 10
27
RTD 27
43
RTD 43
11
RTD 11
28
RTD 28
44
RTD 44
12
RTD 12
29
RTD 29
45
RTD 45
13
RTD 13
30
RTD 30
46
RTD 46
14
RTD 14
31
RTD 31
47
RTD 47
15
RTD 15
32
RTD 32
48
RTD 48
16
RTD 16
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online
B-57
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F156
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
F161
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER RATED WINDING
TEMPERATURE RISE
bitmask
value
bitmask
value
NONE
35
UserSt-3
DNA-1
36
UserSt-4
DNA-2
37
UserSt-5
DNA-3
38
UserSt-6
DNA-4
39
UserSt-7
DNA-5
40
UserSt-8
DNA-6
41
UserSt-9
DNA-7
42
UserSt-10
DNA-8
43
UserSt-11
DNA-9
44
UserSt-12
10
DNA-10
45
UserSt-13
11
DNA-11
46
UserSt-14
12
DNA-12
47
UserSt-15
13
DNA-13
48
UserSt-16
14
DNA-14
49
UserSt-17
15
DNA-15
50
UserSt-18
16
DNA-16
51
UserSt-19
17
DNA-17
52
UserSt-20
18
DNA-18
53
UserSt-21
19
DNA-19
54
UserSt-22
20
DNA-20
55
UserSt-23
21
DNA-21
56
UserSt-24
22
DNA-22
57
UserSt-25
23
DNA-23
58
UserSt-26
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
24
DNA-24
59
UserSt-27
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
25
DNA-25
60
UserSt-28
26
DNA-26
61
UserSt-29
27
DNA-27
62
UserSt-30
28
DNA-28
63
UserSt-31
29
DNA-29
64
UserSt-32
30
DNA-30
65
Dataset Item 1
31
DNA-31
66
Dataset Item 2
32
DNA-32
67
Dataset Item 3
33
UserSt-1
34
UserSt-2
96
Dataset Item 32
0 = 55C (oil), 1 = 65C (oil), 2 = 80C (dry), 3 = 115C (dry),

4 = 150C (dry)
F162
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER TYPE OF COOLING
0 = OA, 1 = FA, 2 = Non-directed FOA/FOW,
3 = Directed FOA/FOW
F163
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER WINDING CONNECTION
0 = Wye, 1 = Delta, 2 = Zig-zag
F164
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER WINDING GROUNDING
0 = Not within zone, 1 = Within zone
F165
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER TAP INPUT
0 = None, 1 = Tap Input 1, 2 = Tap Input 2, 3 = Auto-detect
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F168
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
F157
ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
F169
ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th
F159
ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
F170
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN
TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F160
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER PHASE COMPENSATION
0 = Internal (software), 1 = External (with CTs)
B-58
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE
F181
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT,

4 = RRTD IN
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F183
ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
bitmask
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
Off
12
8 samples/cycle
13
16 samples/cycle
10
14
32 samples/cycle
11
15
64 samples/cycle
F173
ENUMERATION: DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE
bitmask
dcmA input/output range
0 to 1 mA
F184
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET
value
GOOSE dataset
Off
GooseIn 1
GooseIn 2
GooseIn 3
GooseIn 4
GooseIn 5
GooseIn 6
GooseIn 7
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
GooseIn 8
GooseIn 9
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,

2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
10
GooseIn 10
0 to 1 mA
1 to 1 mA
0 to 5 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
F175
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
11
GooseIn 11
12
GooseIn 12
13
GooseIn 13
14
GooseIn 14
15
GooseIn 15
16
GooseIn 16
F177
ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,

3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP, 5 = Network - UDP
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F186
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
F178
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES
0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,
5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min, 8 = 15 ms, 9 = 30 ms,
10 = 100 ms, 11 = 500 ms
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
definition
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F189
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT MODE
0 = Per Phase, 1 = 2-out-of-3, 2 = Average
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
GE Multilin
B-59
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F190
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS
bitmsk
0
keypress
bitmsk
F202
TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
keypress
--use between real keys
23
Reset
24
User 1
25
User 2
26
User 3
27
User-programmable key 1
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
Decimal Point
35
12
Plus/Minus
36
13
Value Up
37
14
Value Down
38
15
Message Up
43
16
Message Down
44
17
Message Left
45
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F203
18
Message Right
46
19
Menu
47
User 4 (control pushbutton)
20
Help
48
21
Escape
49
22
---
50
F192
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
F194
ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE
0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000,
7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F204
F205
F206
F207
F208
F213
F220
ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY
value
priority
Disabled
Normal
High Priority
F222
ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F199
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM
F226
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT TRANSFER
METHOD
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom
0 = None, 1 = GSSE, 2 = GOOSE
F200
F227
ENUMERATION: RELAY SERVICE STATUS
0 = Unknown, 1 = Relay In Service, 2 = Relay Out Of Service
F201
TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
B-60
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F232
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
FOR TRANSMISSION
value
GOOSE dataset item
298
MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
299
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
300
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
GOOSE dataset item
301
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
None
302
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q
303
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
304
MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q
305
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal
306
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
307
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
255
GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q
308
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
256
GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal
309
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
257
MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
310
MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
258
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
311
MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
259
MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f
312
MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
260
MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f
313
MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
261
MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
314
MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
262
315
MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
263
316
MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
264
317
MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
265
318
MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
266
319
MMXU2.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
267
320
MMXU2.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
268
321
MMXU2.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
269
322
MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
270
323
MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
271
324
MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
272
325
MMXU2.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
273
326
MMXU2.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
274
327
MMXU2.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
275
328
MMXU2.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
276
329
MMXU2.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f
277
330
MMXU2.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
278
331
MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f
279
332
280
333
281
334
282
335
MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f
283
336
284
337
285
338
286
339
287
340
288
341
289
342
290
343
291
344
292
345
293
346
294
MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
347
295
348
296
349
297
350
value
GE Multilin
B-61
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
351
GOOSE dataset item
APPENDIX B
value
GOOSE dataset item
404
352
405
MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f
353
406
354
407
355
408
356
409
MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f
357
410
358
411
359
412
360
413
361
414
362
415
363
416
364
417
365
418
366
419
367
420
368
MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f
421
369
422
370
423
371
424
372
MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f
425
373
426
374
427
375
428
376
429
377
430
378
431
379
432
380
433
381
434
382
435
383
436
384
437
385
438
386
439
387
440
388
441
389
442
MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f
390
443
391
444
392
445
393
446
MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f
394
447
395
448
396
449
397
450
398
451
399
452
400
453
401
454
402
455
403
456
B-62
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
value
GOOSE dataset item
457
458
459
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
GOOSE dataset item
510
GGIO4.MX.AnIn32.mag.f
511
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q
512
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal
460
513
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q
461
514
462
515
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q
463
516
464
517
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q
465
518
466
519
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q
467
520
468
521
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q
469
522
470
523
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q
471
524
472
525
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q
473
526
474
527
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q
475
528
476
529
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q
477
530
478
531
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q
479
532
480
533
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q
481
534
482
535
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.q
483
536
484
537
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.q
485
538
486
539
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.q
487
540
488
541
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.q
489
542
490
491
492
493
494
495
value
496
None
497
GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q
498
GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal
499
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q
500
GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal
501
502
127
GGIO1.ST.Ind64q
503
128
504
129
505
130
506
131
507
132
508
133
509
134
GE Multilin
F233
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
FOR RECEPTION
GOOSE dataset item
B-63
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value
GOOSE dataset item
APPENDIX B
value
GOOSE dataset item
135
187
136
188
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn12.q
137
189
138
190
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn13.q
139
191
140
192
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn14.q
141
193
142
194
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn15.q
143
195
144
196
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn16.q
145
197
146
147
148
149
150
value
month
151
January
152
February
153
March
154
April
155
May
156
June
157
July
158
August
159
September
160
October
161
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal
10
November
162
11
December
163
164
165
166
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.q
167
168
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.q
Sunday
169
Monday
170
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.q
Tuesday
171
Wednesday
172
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.q
Thursday
173
Friday
174
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.q
Saturday
175
176
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.q
177
178
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.q
179
180
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.q
181
182
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.q
Second
183
Third
184
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.q
Fourth
185
Last
186
GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.q
B-64
F237
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH
F238
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY
value
day
F239
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME START DAY INSTANCE
value
instance
First
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
F254
ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION
Value
Function
Disabled
F400
UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
Isolated
bitmask
Forcible
Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
F260
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER MODE
0 = Continuous, 1 = Trigger
F300
UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6-bit type)
The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range.
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
[0] On (1) this is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96)
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 96)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32)
[28] INSERT (via keypad only)
[32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 96)
[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
GE Multilin
bank selection
F491
ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE
0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known
F500
UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15
(LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to
input/output state 17 to 32 (if required) The third register indicates
input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output
state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to
64 (if required).
The number of registers required is determined by the specific
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On.
F501
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
F502
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
B-65
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F504
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
bitmask
0
F520
ENUMERATION: TRANSFORMER REFERENCE WINDING
element state
bitmask
Transformer Reference Winding
Pickup
Automatic Selection
Operate
Winding 1
Pickup Phase A
Winding 2
Pickup Phase B
Winding 3
Pickup Phase C
Winding 4
Operate Phase A
Winding 5
Operate Phase B
Winding 6
Operate Phase C
F522
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE
F505
BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
0 = 1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected

F523
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT
VARIATION
F507
BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
bitmask
default variation
F509
BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate
F511
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
F515
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
F524
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
bitmask
Default Variation
10
F525
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
bitmask
default variation
F518
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
0 = Level, 1 = Delta
F519
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
B-66
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F530
ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
value
keypress
value
keypress
value
keypress
None
15
33
User PB 3
Menu
16
Enter
34
User PB 4
Message Up
17
Message
Down
35
User PB 5
18
36
User PB 6
19
Decimal
37
User PB 7
20
+/
38
User PB 8
Help
21
Value Up
39
User PB 9
Message Left
22
Value Down
40
User PB 10
23
Reset
41
User PB 11
24
User 1
42
User PB 12
10
25
User 2
44
User 4
11
Escape
26
User 3
45
User 5
12
Message
Right
31
User PB 1
46
User 6
13
32
User PB 2
47
User 7
14
F611
ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME
Enumeration
Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme
Heartbeat
Aggressive
Medium
Relaxed
F612
UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER
This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the
selected FlexInteger paramter. Only certain values may be used
as FlexIntegers.
F615
ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 REPORT DATASET ITEMS
Enumeration
0
IEC 61850 report dataset items

None
PDIF1.ST.Str.general
F531
ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE
PDIF1.ST.Op.general
0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian
PDIF2.ST.Op.general
F600
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this
parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection).
Enumeration
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
64
GE Multilin
PDIF3.ST.Op.general
PDIF4.ST.Op.general
PDIS1.ST.Str.general
10
PDIS1.ST.Op.general
11
PDIS2.ST.Op.general
13
14
PDIS3.ST.Op.general
15
16
PDIS4.ST.Op.general
17
18
PDIS5.ST.Op.general
19
20
PDIS6.ST.Op.general
21
22
PDIS7.ST.Op.general
23
24
PDIS8.ST.Op.general
Remote double-point status input
25
None
26
PDIS9.ST.Op.general
Remote input 1
27
Remote input 2
28
PDIS10.ST.Op.general
Remote input 3
29
PIOC1.ST.Str.general
30
PIOC1.ST.Op.general
31
32
PIOC2.ST.Op.general
33
Remote DPS input status

Intermediate
Off
On
Bad
F606
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
Enumeration
12
F605
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
STATUS
Remote input 64
B-67
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-68
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
34
PIOC3.ST.Op.general
87
35
88
PIOC30.ST.Op.general
36
PIOC4.ST.Op.general
89
37
90
38
PIOC5.ST.Op.general
91
39
92
40
PIOC6.ST.Op.general
93
41
94
42
PIOC7.ST.Op.general
95
43
96
44
PIOC8.ST.Op.general
97
45
98
46
PIOC9.ST.Op.general
99
47
100
48
101
49
102
50
103
51
104
52
105
53
106
54
107
55
108
56
109
57
110
58
111
59
112
60
113
61
114
62
115
63
116
64
117
65
118
66
119
67
120
68
121
69
122
70
123
71
124
72
125
73
126
74
127
75
128
76
129
77
130
78
131
79
132
80
133
81
134
82
135
83
136
84
137
85
138
86
139
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
140
193
PTOC11.ST.Str.general
141
194
PTOC11.ST.Op.general
142
195
143
196
144
197
145
198
146
199
147
200
148
201
149
202
150
203
151
204
152
205
153
206
154
207
155
208
156
209
157
210
158
211
159
212
160
213
161
214
162
215
163
216
164
217
165
218
166
219
167
220
168
221
PTOV1.ST.Str.general
169
222
PTOV1.ST.Op.general
170
223
171
224
PTOV2.ST.Op.general
172
225
173
226
PTOV3.ST.Op.general
174
PTOC1.ST.Op.general
227
175
228
PTOV4.ST.Op.general
176
PTOC2.ST.Op.general
229
177
230
PTOV5.ST.Op.general
178
PTOC3.ST.Op.general
231
179
232
PTOV6.ST.Op.general
180
PTOC4.ST.Op.general
233
181
234
PTOV7.ST.Op.general
182
PTOC5.ST.Op.general
235
183
236
PTOV8.ST.Op.general
184
PTOC6.ST.Op.general
237
185
238
PTOV9.ST.Op.general
186
PTOC7.ST.Op.general
239
187
240
PTOV10.ST.Op.general
188
PTOC8.ST.Op.general
241
PTRC1.ST.Tr.general
189
242
PTRC1.ST.Op.general
190
PTOC9.ST.Op.general
243
PTRC2.ST.Tr.general
191
244
PTRC2.ST.Op.general
192
245
PTRC3.ST.Tr.general
GE Multilin
B-69
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-70
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
246
PTRC3.ST.Op.general
299
RBRF11.ST.OpEx.general
247
PTRC4.ST.Tr.general
300
RBRF11.ST.OpIn.general
248
PTRC4.ST.Op.general
301
249
PTRC5.ST.Tr.general
302
250
PTRC5.ST.Op.general
303
251
PTRC6.ST.Tr.general
304
252
PTRC6.ST.Op.general
305
253
PTUV1.ST.Str.general
306
254
PTUV1.ST.Op.general
307
255
308
256
PTUV2.ST.Op.general
309
257
310
258
PTUV3.ST.Op.general
311
259
312
260
PTUV4.ST.Op.general
313
261
314
262
PTUV5.ST.Op.general
315
263
316
264
PTUV6.ST.Op.general
317
265
318
266
PTUV7.ST.Op.general
319
267
320
268
PTUV8.ST.Op.general
321
269
322
270
PTUV9.ST.Op.general
323
271
324
272
PTUV10.ST.Op.general
325
273
326
274
327
RFLO1.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
275
328
276
329
277
330
278
331
279
332
RPSB1.ST.Str.general
280
333
RPSB1.ST.Op.general
281
334
RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal
282
335
RREC1.ST.Op.general
283
336
RREC1.ST.AutoRecSt.stVal
284
337
RREC2.ST.Op.general
285
338
286
339
RREC3.ST.Op.general
287
340
288
341
RREC4.ST.Op.general
289
342
290
343
RREC5.ST.Op.general
291
344
292
345
RREC6.ST.Op.general
293
346
294
347
CSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal
295
348
CSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
296
349
CSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
297
350
CSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal
298
351
CSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
352
CSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal
405
CSWI30.ST.Loc.stVal
353
CSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal
406
CSWI30.ST.Pos.stVal
354
CSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal
407
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
355
CSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal
408
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal
356
CSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
409
GGIO1.ST.Ind3.stVal
357
CSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
410
GGIO1.ST.Ind4.stVal
358
CSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
411
GGIO1.ST.Ind5.stVal
359
CSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
412
GGIO1.ST.Ind6.stVal
360
CSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal
413
GGIO1.ST.Ind7.stVal
361
CSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal
414
GGIO1.ST.Ind8.stVal
362
CSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal
415
GGIO1.ST.Ind9.stVal
363
CSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal
416
364
CSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal
417
365
CSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal
418
366
CSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal
419
367
CSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
420
368
CSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
421
369
CSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal
422
370
CSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal
423
371
CSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal
424
372
CSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal
425
373
CSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal
426
374
CSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal
427
375
CSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal
428
376
CSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal
429
377
CSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal
430
378
CSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal
431
379
CSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal
432
380
CSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal
433
381
CSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal
434
382
CSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal
435
383
CSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal
436
384
CSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal
437
385
CSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal
438
386
CSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal
439
387
CSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal
440
388
CSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal
441
389
CSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal
442
390
CSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal
443
391
CSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal
444
392
CSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal
445
393
CSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal
446
394
CSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal
447
395
CSWI25.ST.Loc.stVal
448
396
CSWI25.ST.Pos.stVal
449
397
CSWI26.ST.Loc.stVal
450
398
CSWI26.ST.Pos.stVal
451
399
CSWI27.ST.Loc.stVal
452
400
CSWI27.ST.Pos.stVal
453
401
CSWI28.ST.Loc.stVal
454
402
CSWI28.ST.Pos.stVal
455
403
CSWI29.ST.Loc.stVal
456
404
CSWI29.ST.Pos.stVal
457
GE Multilin
B-71
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-72
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
458
511
459
512
460
513
461
514
462
515
463
516
464
517
465
518
466
519
467
520
468
521
469
522
470
523
471
524
472
525
473
526
474
527
475
528
476
529
477
530
478
531
479
532
480
533
481
534
482
535
MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
483
536
484
537
485
538
486
539
MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
487
540
488
541
489
542
490
543
491
544
492
545
493
546
494
547
495
548
496
549
497
550
498
551
499
552
500
553
501
554
502
555
503
556
504
557
505
558
506
559
507
560
508
561
509
562
510
563
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Enumeration
Enumeration
564
617

565
618
566
619
567
620
568
621
569
622
570
623
571
624
572
MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
625
573
626
574
627
575
628
576
MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
629
577
630
578
631
579
632
580
633
581
634
582
635
583
636
584
637
585
638
586
639
587
640
588
641
589
642
590
643
591
644
592
645
593
646
MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f
594
647
595
648
596
649
597
650
MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f
598
651
599
652
600
653
601
654
602
655
603
656
604
657
605
658
606
659
607
660
608
661
609
MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f
662
610
663
611
664
612
665
613
MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f
666
614
667
615
668
616
669
GE Multilin
B-73
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-74
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
670
723
671
724
MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f
672
725
673
726
674
727
675
728
676
729
677
730
678
731
679
732
680
733
681
734
682
735
683
MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f
736
684
737
685
738
686
739
687
MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f
740
688
741
689
742
690
743
691
744
692
745
693
746
694
747
695
748
696
749
697
750
698
751
699
752
700
753
701
754
702
755
703
756
704
757
705
758
706
759
707
760
708
761
709
762
710
763
711
764
712
765
713
766
714
767
715
768
716
769
717
770
718
771
719
772
720
MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f
773
721
774
722
775
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
776
829
XSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal
777
830
XSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal
778
831
XSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal
779
832
XSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal
780
833
XSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal
781
834
XSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal
782
835
XSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal
783
836
XSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal
784
837
XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal
785
838
XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal
786
839
XCBR2.ST.Loc.stVal
787
840
XCBR2.ST.Pos.stVal
788
841
XCBR3.ST.Loc.stVal
789
XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal
842
XCBR3.ST.Pos.stVal
790
XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
843
XCBR4.ST.Loc.stVal
791
XSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
844
XCBR4.ST.Pos.stVal
792
XSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal
845
XCBR5.ST.Loc.stVal
793
XSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal
846
XCBR5.ST.Pos.stVal
794
XSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal
847
XCBR6.ST.Loc.stVal
795
XSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal
848
XCBR6.ST.Pos.stVal
796
XSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal
797
XSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal
798
XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
799
XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
800
XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
Enumeration
801
XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
None
802
XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q
803
XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
804
XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q
805
XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal
806
XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind3.q
807
XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind3.stVal
808
XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind4.q
809
XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind4.stVal
810
XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
GGIO1.ST.Ind5.q
811
XSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal
10
GGIO1.ST.Ind5.stVal
812
XSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal
11
GGIO1.ST.Ind6.q
813
XSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal
12
GGIO1.ST.Ind6.stVal
814
XSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal
13
GGIO1.ST.Ind7.q
815
XSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal
14
GGIO1.ST.Ind7.stVal
816
XSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal
15
GGIO1.ST.Ind8.q
817
XSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal
16
GGIO1.ST.Ind8.stVal
818
XSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal
17
GGIO1.ST.Ind9.q
819
XSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal
18
GGIO1.ST.Ind9.stVal
820
XSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal
19
GGIO1.ST.Ind10.q
821
XSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal
20
822
XSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal
21
GGIO1.ST.Ind11.q
823
XSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal
22
824
XSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal
23
GGIO1.ST.Ind12.q
825
XSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal
24
826
XSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal
25
GGIO1.ST.Ind13.q
827
XSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal
26
828
XSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal
27
GGIO1.ST.Ind14.q
GE Multilin
F616
ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
GOOSE dataset items
B-75
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
28
81
GGIO1.ST.Ind41.q
29
GGIO1.ST.Ind15.q
82
30
83
GGIO1.ST.Ind42.q
31
GGIO1.ST.Ind16.q
84
32
85
GGIO1.ST.Ind43.q
33
GGIO1.ST.Ind17.q
86
34
87
GGIO1.ST.Ind44.q
35
GGIO1.ST.Ind18.q
88
36
89
GGIO1.ST.Ind45.q
37
GGIO1.ST.Ind19.q
90
38
91
GGIO1.ST.Ind46.q
39
GGIO1.ST.Ind20.q
92
40
93
GGIO1.ST.Ind47.q
41
GGIO1.ST.Ind21.q
94
42
95
GGIO1.ST.Ind48.q
43
GGIO1.ST.Ind22.q
96
44
97
GGIO1.ST.Ind49.q
45
GGIO1.ST.Ind23.q
98
46
99
GGIO1.ST.Ind50.q
47
GGIO1.ST.Ind24.q
100
48
101
GGIO1.ST.Ind51.q
49
GGIO1.ST.Ind25.q
102
50
103
GGIO1.ST.Ind52.q
51
GGIO1.ST.Ind26.q
104
52
105
GGIO1.ST.Ind53.q
53
GGIO1.ST.Ind27.q
106
54
107
GGIO1.ST.Ind54.q
55
GGIO1.ST.Ind28.q
108
56
109
GGIO1.ST.Ind55.q
57
GGIO1.ST.Ind29.q
110
58
111
GGIO1.ST.Ind56.q
59
GGIO1.ST.Ind30.q
112
60
113
GGIO1.ST.Ind57.q
61
GGIO1.ST.Ind31.q
114
62
115
GGIO1.ST.Ind58.q
63
GGIO1.ST.Ind32.q
116
64
117
GGIO1.ST.Ind59.q
65
GGIO1.ST.Ind33.q
118
66
119
GGIO1.ST.Ind60.q
67
GGIO1.ST.Ind34.q
120
68
121
GGIO1.ST.Ind61.q
69
GGIO1.ST.Ind35.q
122
70
123
GGIO1.ST.Ind62.q
71
GGIO1.ST.Ind36.q
124
72
125
GGIO1.ST.Ind63.q
73
GGIO1.ST.Ind37.q
126
74
127
GGIO1.ST.Ind64.q
75
GGIO1.ST.Ind38.q
128
76
129
GGIO1.ST.Ind65.q
77
GGIO1.ST.Ind39.q
130
78
131
GGIO1.ST.Ind66.q
79
GGIO1.ST.Ind40.q
132
80
133
GGIO1.ST.Ind67.q
B-76
GOOSE dataset items
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
134
187
GGIO1.ST.Ind94.q
135
GGIO1.ST.Ind68.q
188
136
189
GGIO1.ST.Ind95.q
137
GGIO1.ST.Ind69.q
190
138
191
GGIO1.ST.Ind96.q
139
GGIO1.ST.Ind70.q
192
140
193
GGIO1.ST.Ind97.q
141
GGIO1.ST.Ind71.q
194
142
195
GGIO1.ST.Ind98.q
143
GGIO1.ST.Ind72.q
196
144
197
GGIO1.ST.Ind99.q
145
GGIO1.ST.Ind73.q
198
146
199
GGIO1.ST.Ind100.q
147
GGIO1.ST.Ind74.q
200
148
201
GGIO1.ST.Ind101.q
149
GGIO1.ST.Ind75.q
202
150
203
GGIO1.ST.Ind102.q
151
GGIO1.ST.Ind76.q
204
152
205
GGIO1.ST.Ind103.q
153
GGIO1.ST.Ind77.q
206
154
207
GGIO1.ST.Ind104.q
155
GGIO1.ST.Ind78.q
208
156
209
GGIO1.ST.Ind105.q
157
GGIO1.ST.Ind79.q
210
158
211
GGIO1.ST.Ind106.q
159
GGIO1.ST.Ind80.q
212
160
213
GGIO1.ST.Ind107.q
161
GGIO1.ST.Ind81.q
214
162
215
GGIO1.ST.Ind108.q
163
GGIO1.ST.Ind82.q
216
164
217
GGIO1.ST.Ind109.q
165
GGIO1.ST.Ind83.q
218
166
219
GGIO1.ST.Ind110.q
167
GGIO1.ST.Ind84.q
220
168
221
GGIO1.ST.Ind111.q
169
GGIO1.ST.Ind85.q
222
170
223
GGIO1.ST.Ind112.q
171
GGIO1.ST.Ind86.q
224
172
225
GGIO1.ST.Ind113.q
173
GGIO1.ST.Ind87.q
226
174
227
GGIO1.ST.Ind114.q
175
GGIO1.ST.Ind88.q
228
176
229
GGIO1.ST.Ind115.q
177
GGIO1.ST.Ind89.q
230
178
231
GGIO1.ST.Ind116.q
179
GGIO1.ST.Ind90.q
232
180
233
GGIO1.ST.Ind117.q
181
GGIO1.ST.Ind91.q
234
182
235
GGIO1.ST.Ind118.q
183
GGIO1.ST.Ind92.q
236
184
237
GGIO1.ST.Ind119.q
185
GGIO1.ST.Ind93.q
238
186
239
GGIO1.ST.Ind120.q
GE Multilin
GOOSE dataset items
B-77
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-78
APPENDIX B
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
240
293
241
GGIO1.ST.Ind121.q
294
MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
242
295
243
GGIO1.ST.Ind122.q
296
244
297
245
GGIO1.ST.Ind123.q
298
MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
246
299
247
GGIO1.ST.Ind124.q
300
248
301
249
GGIO1.ST.Ind125.q
302
250
303
251
GGIO1.ST.Ind126.q
304
252
305
253
GGIO1.ST.Ind127.q
306
254
307
255
GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q
308
256
309
257
MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
310
258
311
259
312
260
313
261
MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
314
262
315
263
316
264
317
265
318
266
319
267
320
268
321
269
322
270
323
271
324
272
325
273
326
274
327
275
328
276
329
277
330
278
331
MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f
279
332
280
333
281
334
282
335
MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f
283
336
284
337
285
338
286
339
287
340
288
341
289
342
290
343
291
344
292
345
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
346
399
347
400
348
401
349
402
350
403
351
404
352
405
MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f
353
406
354
407
355
408
356
409
MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f
357
410
358
411
359
412
360
413
361
414
362
415
363
416
364
417
365
418
366
419
367
420
368
MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f
421
369
422
370
423
371
424
372
MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f
425
373
426
374
427
375
428
376
429
377
430
378
431
379
432
380
433
381
434
382
435
383
436
384
437
385
438
386
439
387
440
388
441
389
442
MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f
390
443
391
444
392
445
393
446
MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f
394
447
395
448
396
449
397
450
398
451
GE Multilin
B-79
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Enumeration
B-80
GOOSE dataset items
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
452
505
453
506
454
507
455
508
456
509
457
510
458
511
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q
459
512
460
513
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q
461
514
462
515
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q
463
516
464
517
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q
465
518
466
519
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q
467
520
468
521
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q
469
522
470
523
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q
471
524
472
525
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q
473
526
474
527
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q
475
528
476
529
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q
477
530
478
531
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q
479
532
480
533
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q
481
534
482
535
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.q
483
536
484
537
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.q
485
538
486
539
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.q
487
540
488
541
GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.q
489
542
490
543
491
544
PDIF1.ST.Op.general
492
545
493
546
PDIF2.ST.Op.general
494
547
495
548
PDIF3.ST.Op.general
496
549
497
550
PDIF4.ST.Op.general
498
551
499
552
PDIS1.ST.Op.general
500
553
501
554
PDIS2.ST.Op.general
502
555
503
556
PDIS3.ST.Op.general
504
557
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
558
PDIS4.ST.Op.general
611
559
612
560
PDIS5.ST.Op.general
613
561
614
562
PDIS6.ST.Op.general
615
563
616
564
PDIS7.ST.Op.general
617
565
618
566
PDIS8.ST.Op.general
619
567
620
568
PDIS9.ST.Op.general
621
569
622
570
PDIS10.ST.Op.general
623
571
624
572
PIOC1.ST.Op.general
625
573
626
574
PIOC2.ST.Op.general
627
575
628
576
PIOC3.ST.Op.general
629
577
630
578
PIOC4.ST.Op.general
631
579
632
580
PIOC5.ST.Op.general
633
581
634
582
PIOC6.ST.Op.general
635
583
636
584
PIOC7.ST.Op.general
637
585
638
586
PIOC8.ST.Op.general
639
587
640
588
PIOC9.ST.Op.general
641
589
642
590
643
591
644
592
645
593
646
594
647
595
648
596
649
597
650
598
651
599
652
600
653
601
654
602
655
603
656
604
657
605
658
606
659
607
660
608
661
609
662
610
663
GE Multilin
B-81
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
664
717
665
718
PTOC2.ST.Op.general
666
719
667
720
PTOC3.ST.Op.general
668
721
669
722
PTOC4.ST.Op.general
670
723
671
724
PTOC5.ST.Op.general
672
725
673
726
PTOC6.ST.Op.general
674
727
675
728
PTOC7.ST.Op.general
676
729
677
730
PTOC8.ST.Op.general
678
731
679
732
PTOC9.ST.Op.general
680
733
681
734
682
735
683
736
684
737
685
738
686
739
687
740
688
741
689
742
690
743
691
744
692
745
693
746
694
747
695
748
696
749
697
750
698
751
699
752
700
753
701
754
702
755
703
756
704
757
705
758
706
759
707
760
708
761
709
762
710
763
711
764
PTOV1.ST.Op.general
712
765
713
766
PTOV2.ST.Op.general
714
767
715
768
PTOV3.ST.Op.general
716
PTOC1.ST.Op.general
769
B-82
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
770
PTOV4.ST.Op.general
823
771
824
772
PTOV5.ST.Op.general
825
773
826
774
PTOV6.ST.Op.general
827
775
828
776
PTOV7.ST.Op.general
829
777
830
778
PTOV8.ST.Op.general
831
779
832
780
PTOV9.ST.Op.general
833
781
834
782
PTOV10.ST.Op.general
835
783
PTRC1.ST.Tr.general
836
784
PTRC1.ST.Op.general
837
785
PTRC2.ST.Tr.general
838
786
PTRC2.ST.Op.general
839
787
PTRC3.ST.Tr.general
840
788
PTRC3.ST.Op.general
841
789
PTRC4.ST.Tr.general
842
790
PTRC4.ST.Op.general
843
791
PTRC5.ST.Tr.general
844
792
PTRC5.ST.Op.general
845
793
PTRC6.ST.Tr.general
846
794
PTRC6.ST.Op.general
847
795
848
796
PTUV1.ST.Op.general
849
797
850
798
PTUV2.ST.Op.general
851
799
852
800
PTUV3.ST.Op.general
853
801
854
802
PTUV4.ST.Op.general
855
803
856
804
PTUV5.ST.Op.general
857
805
858
806
PTUV6.ST.Op.general
859
807
860
808
PTUV7.ST.Op.general
861
809
862
810
PTUV8.ST.Op.general
863
811
864
812
PTUV9.ST.Op.general
865
813
866
814
867
815
868
816
869
817
870
818
871
819
872
820
873
821
874
RPSB1.ST.Str.general
822
875
RPSB1.ST.Op.general
GE Multilin
GOOSE dataset items

B-83
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
876
RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal
929
CSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal
877
RREC1.ST.Op.general
930
CSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal
878
931
CSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal
879
RREC2.ST.Op.general
932
CSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal
880
933
CSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal
881
RREC3.ST.Op.general
934
CSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal
882
935
CSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal
883
RREC4.ST.Op.general
936
CSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal
884
937
CSWI25.ST.Loc.stVal
885
RREC5.ST.Op.general
938
CSWI25.ST.Pos.stVal
886
939
CSWI26.ST.Loc.stVal
887
RREC6.ST.Op.general
940
CSWI26.ST.Pos.stVal
888
941
CSWI27.ST.Loc.stVal
889
CSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal
942
CSWI27.ST.Pos.stVal
890
CSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
943
CSWI28.ST.Loc.stVal
891
CSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
944
CSWI28.ST.Pos.stVal
892
CSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal
945
CSWI29.ST.Loc.stVal
893
CSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal
946
CSWI29.ST.Pos.stVal
894
CSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal
947
CSWI30.ST.Loc.stVal
895
CSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal
948
CSWI30.ST.Pos.stVal
896
CSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal
949
XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal
897
CSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal
950
XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
898
CSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
951
XSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
899
CSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
952
XSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal
900
CSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
953
XSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal
901
CSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
954
XSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal
902
CSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal
955
XSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal
903
CSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal
956
XSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal
904
CSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal
957
XSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal
905
CSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal
958
XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
906
CSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal
959
XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
907
CSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal
960
XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
908
CSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal
961
XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
909
CSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
962
XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal
910
CSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
963
XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal
911
CSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal
964
XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal
912
CSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal
965
XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal
913
CSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal
966
XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal
914
CSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal
967
XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal
915
CSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal
968
XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal
916
CSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal
969
XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
917
CSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal
970
XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
918
CSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal
971
XSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal
919
CSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal
972
XSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal
920
CSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal
973
XSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal
921
CSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal
974
XSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal
922
CSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal
975
XSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal
923
CSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal
976
XSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal
924
CSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal
977
XSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal
925
CSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal
978
XSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal
926
CSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal
979
XSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal
927
CSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal
980
XSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal
928
CSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal
981
XSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal
B-84
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
Enumeration
GOOSE dataset items
982
XSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal
983
XSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal
984
XSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal
985
XSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal
986
XSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal
987
XSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal
988
XSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal
989
XSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal
990
XSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal
991
XSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal
992
XSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal
993
XSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal
994
XSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal
995
XSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal
996
XSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal
997
XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal
998
XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal
999
XCBR2.ST.Loc.stVal
1000
XCBR2.ST.Pos.stVal
1001
XCBR3.ST.Loc.stVal
1002
XCBR3.ST.Pos.stVal
1003
XCBR4.ST.Loc.stVal
1004
XCBR4.ST.Pos.stVal
1005
XCBR5.ST.Loc.stVal
1006
XCBR5.ST.Pos.stVal
1007
XCBR6.ST.Loc.stVal
1008
XCBR6.ST.Pos.stVal
GE Multilin
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B-85
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B-86
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW
C.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
IEC 61850-2: Glossary
IEC 61850-3: General requirements
IEC 61850-4: System and project management
IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Common data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Compatible logical node classes
and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2)
and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with
any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer
of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the
transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract services in IEC 61850-8-1.
The T35 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over both TCP/IP and TP4/CLNP (OSI) communication protocol stacks.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the T35 to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) to establish a
communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the T35 to have an IP address to establish communications. These
addresses are located in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK menu. Note that the T35
supports IEC 61850 over the TP4/CLNP or TCP/IP stacks, and also operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC 61850) connections).
Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs
or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer tap changers, or bay controllers.
Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equipment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication.
Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe
the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file.
GE Multilin
C-1
APPENDIX C
C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or
more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data
objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each
level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each T35 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical
device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the T35 IED physical device. The
logical node LLN0 contains information about the T35 IED logical device.
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES
The GGIO1 logical node is available in the T35 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status
points for access by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the T35. Configuration settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice
of the T35 FlexLogic operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI
display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the
chances of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display.
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES
The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the T35 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control
(binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the virtual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services:
Status only.
Direct control with normal security.
SBO control with normal security.
Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2
should have its VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION setting programmed as Enabled and its corresponding GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64)
CTLMODEL setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration.
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATA
The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages.
The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other
devices.
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and
quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access
by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the T35. Configuration settings allow the selection of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog values that determine
the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available
from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.
C-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C

C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes.
Each MMXU logical node provides data from a T35 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source (programmed in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES menu). MMXU1 provides data
from T35 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from T35 source 2.
MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a
read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3.
The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the T35 is described in chapter 5 of this manual.
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power
MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power
MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power
MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power
MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor
MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor
C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES

The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The T35 relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential, current differential
GE Multilin
C-3
APPENDIX C
PDIS: phase distance, ground distance
PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.
PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcurrent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent
PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage
PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage
RBRF: breaker failure
RREC: autoreclosure
RPSB: power swing detection
RFLO: fault locator
XCBR: breaker control
XSWI: circuit switch
CSWI: switch controller
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is
PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the T35 protection elements, these flags
take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic operands for the corresponding element.
Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is
PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic operands for the element.
The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in
the fault locator function.
The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature.
XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected.
XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the
counter to be cleared.
XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic operands are used to determine
this state.
Intermediate state (00) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN and BREAKER 1 CLOSED operands are both On.
Off state (01) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN operand is On.
On state (10) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 CLOSED operand is On.
Bad state (11) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN and BREAKER 1 CLOSED operands are Off.
XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with
normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
C-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1
to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, substation configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured:
TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the T35:
Bit 1: data-change
Bit 4: integrity
Bit 5: general interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the T35:
Bit 1: sequence-number
Bit 2: report-time-stamp
Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: data-set-name
Bit 5: data-reference
Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only)
Bit 8: conf-revision
Bit 9: segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.
C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a T35 relay.
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING
The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or
quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data
changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 clients. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be programmed as Disabled. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as Enabled to ensure the proper
generation of IEC 61850 timestamps.
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME
The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the T35. This name is composed
of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of
the two character strings programmed in the IEDNAME and LD INST settings. The default values for these strings are IEDName and LDInst. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical
devices in the system.
C.3.5 LOCATION
The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string
meant to describe the physical location of the T35. This attribute is programmed through the LOCATION setting and its
default value is Location. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the T35.
GE Multilin
C-5
APPENDIX C
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of:
A five or six-character name prefix.
A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the
logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention
be used for an entire substation project.
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the T35 to detect dead connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the T35. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control
block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the T35 will
not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA
The T35 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the
UR MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the nonIEC data items, the INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting must be Enabled.
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES
The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a T35 relay with an
MMS browser, such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.
C-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic
Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE
services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given
a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional
features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards compatibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required.
Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a GSSE
control block to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in
the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files.
IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a
default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.
IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the
T35, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the
receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850
part 8-1.
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION
IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication.
GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data
structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair. GSSE messages are transmitted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the
same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have values that are of interest to receiving devices.
The GSSE FUNCTION, GSSE ID, and GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS settings are used to configure GSSE transmission.
GSSE FUNCTION is set to Enabled to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the
GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If
a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the T35 will use the source Ethernet MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE
The T35 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed
GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset
that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the T35 fixed GOOSE is the same data
that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic operands that determine
the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the
same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE
and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE.
It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between URseries IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers.
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the T35.
The T35 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
GE Multilin
C-7
APPENDIX C
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping,
blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmission of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The T35 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the T35 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the T35 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The T35 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setupsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1.
Configure the transmission dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.
Configure the reception dataset.
2.
3.
Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1.
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION

GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception
dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
C-8
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
3.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1).
Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1.
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the
configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu:
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The T35 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1.
Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC
61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2.
3.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is 0 in
the example above.
Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1.
Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The T35 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE
Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This
address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length
and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as
the source address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can
be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.
GE Multilin
C-9
APPENDIX C
A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more
than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01
00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address).
GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses.
By default, the T35 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the T35 destination MAC address setting
is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destination MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0
F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03.
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS
GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC
61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive
name of the originator of the GSSE message.
GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in
IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the
GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message:
DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block.
These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the T35; no settings are required.
C-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.5.1 OVERVIEW
The T35 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows.
1.
An ICD file is generated for the T35 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED.
2.
The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other vendors) for system configuration.
3.
The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings
file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.
The configuration process is illustrated below.

Creating ICD (GE Multilin)
IED (UR-series)
OR
EnerVista
UR Setup
Setting files
(.URS)
IEC 61850 related

configuration for the
IED (GSSE/GOOSE,
server, logical node
prefixes, MMXU
deadbands, GGIO2
control, etc.)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor 2)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor 3)
Process of
creating ICD
(vendor N)
ICD file 2
ICD file 3
ICD file N
ICD file 1
System
specification data
Import
SSD file
System specification tool
System configurator
System Configuration
(network, crosscommunications, IED setting
modification, etc.)
SCD file
Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin)

EnerVista UR Setup
URS 1
Write settings
file to device
Vendor specific tool

for updating new
configuration to IED
(vendor 2)
URS X
URS 2

for updating new
(vendor 3)

for updating new
(vendor N)
Write settings file

to other devices
UR relay 1
UR relay 2
UR relay X
Vendor relay 2
Vendor relay 3
Vendor relay N
Ethernet
842790A1.CDR
Figure 01: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC
61850:
BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured
DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute
DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context
GE Multilin
C-11
APPENDIX C
DOI: Instantiated Data Object
IED: Intelligent Electronic Device
LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device
LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node
SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible
Markup Language (XML) version 1.0.
SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name
UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series
URI: Universal Resource Identifier
URS: UR-series relay setting file
XML: Extensible Markup Language
The following SCL variants are also used:
ICD: IED Capability Description
CID: Configured IED Description
SSD: System Specification Description
SCD: Substation Configuration Description
The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850:
System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or
export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system
level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates
a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR
Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specification file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same
substation.
IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for
example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parameters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The
IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software.
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS
Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name
and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE
datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages
from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and generate an ICD file that contains the updated settings.
Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be
assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be
changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the T35 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged
settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file.
These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (preferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows:
Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the number of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two
CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal mappings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process
(access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration
menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR
Setup).
Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmission. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole
substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items.
The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 5.9x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and
GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status
points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system configurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly
within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception.
However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually created automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in
EnerVista UR Setup).
Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission
GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and
DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated
reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be
mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the
Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES
The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL
file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four
major sections:
Header
Communication
IEDs
DataTypeTemplates
GE Multilin
C-13
APPENDIX C
The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.

SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Communication
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
DataTypeTemplates
842795A1.CDR
Figure 02: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE
The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (iedName, apName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)

Address
P (type)
Text
842796A1.CDR
Other GSE elements
Other P elements
Figure 03: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instantiated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with
its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD
since it only describes one IED.
C-14
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)

Services
DynAssoication
GetDataSetValue
ReadWrite
ConfLogControl (max)
GetDirectory
SetDataSetValue
TimerActivatedControl
GSEDir
GetDateObjectDefinition
DataSetDirectory
ConfReportControl (max)
GOOSE (max)
DataObjectDirectory
ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes)
GetCBValues
GSSE (max)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg)
RptEnabled
OptFields (seqNum)
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Text
SDI (name)
Other DOI elements
DAI (name)
Val
GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID)
Text
Other GSEControl elements

LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg)
OptFields (seqNum)
RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements

DOI (name)
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Other DOI elements
Text
SDI (name)
DAI (name)
Val
Text
Other LN elements
Other LDevice elements
842797A1.CDR
Figure 04: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE
GE Multilin
C-15
APPENDIX C
The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the
data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical
node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes
(CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a functional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from
BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.
DataTypeTemplates
LNodeType (id, InClass)
DO (name, type)
Other DO elements
Other LNodeType elements

DOType (id, cdc)
SDO (name, type)
DA (name, fc, bType, type)
Other SDO elements
Other DA elements
Val
Text
Other DOType elements
DAType (id)
BDA (name, bType, type)
Other BDA elements
Other DAType elements
EnumType (id)
EnumVal (ord)
Text
Other EnumVal elements
Other EnumType elements

842798A1.CDR
Figure 05: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE
C-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C

C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
An ICD file can be created directly from a connected T35 IED or from an offline T35 settings file with the EnerVista UR
Setup software using the following procedure:
1.
Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.
2.
The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click
OK to generate the file.
The time to create an ICD file from the offline T35 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from
the relay.
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES
System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their
own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI
version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12).
Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation
project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification
file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are
imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the
ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps
to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details).
Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as:
Assigning network addresses to individual IEDs.
Customizing the prefixes of logical nodes.
Creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others).
When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration
for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed
back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED.
The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:
GE Multilin
C-17
Header.
Substation.
Communication.
IED section (one or more).
DataTypeTemplates.
APPENDIX C
The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.

SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Substation
Communication
IED Section (IED 1)
IED Section (IED 2)
Other IED Sections
DataTypeTemplates
842791A1.CDR
Figure 06: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to
signals.
The Substation node describes the substation parameters:
Substation
PowerSystemResource
EquipmentContainer
Power Transformer
GeneralEquipment
EquipmentContainer
VoltageLevel
Bay
Voltage
PowerSystemResource
Function
SubFunction
GeneralEquipment
842792A1.CDR
Figure 07: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE
C-18
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (IED 1)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements

Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements

Other P elements
ConnectedAP (IED 2)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements
Other P elements
Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR
Figure 08: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
GE Multilin
C-19
APPENDIX C
The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.

IED Section (IED 1)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet elements
ReportControl elements
DOI elements
Inputs
ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)
Other ExtRef elements
GSEControl elements
842794A1.CDR
Figure 09: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The following procedure describes how to update the T35 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista
UR Setup software.
1.
Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.
2.
Select the saved SCD file and click Open.
C-20
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
3.
The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and
name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file.
If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file for each IED.
4.
After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required).
5.
To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
6.
The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new
settings will be updated to the selected device.
GE Multilin
C-21
APPENDIX C
C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR-FAMILY
Yes
CLIENT-SERVER ROLES
B11
Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)
c1
B12
Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)
---
SCSMS SUPPORTED
B21
SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used
B22
B23
B24
SCSM: other
Yes
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE)

B31
Publisher side
Yes
B32
Subscriber side
---
Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)

B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side
---
NOTE
c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR-FAMILY
IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED

M1
Logical device
c2
Yes
M2
Logical node
c3
Yes
M3
Data
c4
Yes
M4
Data set
c5
Yes
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
REPORTING
M7
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
M8
Unbuffered report control
M8-1
sequence-number
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
C-22
Yes
Yes
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
M8-4
UR-FAMILY
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
M8-8
GI
Logging
M9
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M11
Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED

GOOSE
M12-1
entryID
M12-2
DataReflnc
M13
GSSE
IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED

M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
Yes
M17
File transfer
Yes
NOTE
c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared
c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries
are defined in the notes following the table.
SERVICES
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
TP
Yes
SERVER (CLAUSE 6)
S1
ServerDirectory
APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 7)

S2
Associate
Yes
S3
Abort
Yes
S4
Release
Yes
TP
Yes
LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 8)

S5
LogicalDeviceDirectory
LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 9)

S6
LogicalNodeDirectory
TP
Yes
S7
GetAllDataValues
TP
Yes
GetDataValues
TP
Yes
Yes
DATA (CLAUSE 10)

S8
S9
SetDataValues
TP
S10
GetDataDirectory
TP
Yes
S11
GetDataDefinition
TP
Yes
GE Multilin
C-23

SERVICES
APPENDIX C
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
Yes
DATA SET (CLAUSE 11)

S12
GetDataSetValues
TP
S13
SetDataSetValues
TP
S14
CreateDataSet
TP
S15
DeleteDataSet
TP
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
TP
TP
Yes
SUBSTITUTION (CLAUSE 12)

S17
SetDataValues
SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 13)
S18
SelectActiveSG
TP
S19
SelectEditSG
TP
S20
SetSGValues
TP
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
TP
S22
GetSGValues
TP
S23
GetSGCBValues
TP
REPORTING (CLAUSE 14)

BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB)
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change (dchg)
S24-2
qchg-change (qchg)
S24-3
TP
c6
Yes
Yes
data-update (dupd)
S25
GetBRCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S26
SetBRCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S27
Report
c6
Yes
UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)

S27-1
data-change (dchg)
S27-2
qchg-change (qchg)
S27-3
TP
Yes
data-update (dupd)
S28
GetURCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
S29
SetURCBValues
TP
c6
Yes
LOGGING (CLAUSE 14)

LOG CONTROL BLOCK
S30
GetLCBValues
TP
S31
SetLCBValues
TP
M
M
LOG
S32
QueryLogByTime
TP
S33
QueryLogByEntry
TP
S34
GetLogStatusValues
TP
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 14.3.5.3.4)

GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
MC
c8
S36
GetReference
TP
c9
Yes
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
TP
c9
S38
GetGoCBValues
TP
Yes
S39
SetGoCBValues
TP
Yes
Yes
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40
SendGSSEMessage
MC
c8
S41
GetReference
TP
c9
C-24
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES
AA: TP/MC
SERVER/
PUBLISHER
UR FAMILY
S42
GetGSSEElementNumber
TP
c9
S43
GetGsCBValues
TP
Yes
S44
SetGsCBValues
TP
Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLE VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 16)

MULTICAST SVC
S45
SendMSVMessage
MC
c10
S46
GetMSVCBValues
TP
S47
SetMSVCBValues
TP
UNICAST SVC
S48
SendUSVMessage
MC
c10
S49
GetUSVCBValues
TP
S50
SetUSVCBValues
TP
CONTROL (CLAUSE 16.4.8)

S51
Select
S52
SelectWithValue
TP
Yes
S53
Cancel
TP
Yes
S54
Operate
TP
Yes
S55
Command-Termination
TP
S56
TimeActivated-Operate
TP
FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 20)

S57
GetFile
TP
S58
SetFile
TP
S59
DeleteFile
TP
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
TP
Yes
Yes
TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)

T1
Time resolution of internal clock

(nearest negative power of 2 in
seconds)
T2
Time accuracy of internal clock
T3
supported TimeStamp resolution

(nearest value of 2n in seconds,
accoridng to 5.5.3.7.3.3)
NOTE
20
20
c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)
c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9: shall declare support if TP association is available
c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)
GE Multilin
C-25
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
APPENDIX C
C.7LOGICAL NODES
C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE
The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node PDIS (distance protection) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay.
Table C1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 3)
NODES
UR-FAMILY
L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES
LPHD: Physical device information
Yes
LLN0: Logical node zero
Yes
P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

PDIF: Differential
Yes
PDIR: Direction comparison
---
PDIS: Distance
Yes
PDOP: Directional overpower
---
PDUP: Directional underpower
---
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency
---
PHAR: Harmonic restraint
---
PHIZ: Ground detector
---
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent
Yes
PMRI Motor restart inhibition
---
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision
---
POPF: Over power factor
---
PPAM: Phase angle measuring
---
PSCH: Protection scheme
---
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault
---
PTEF: Transient earth fault
---
PTOC: Time overcurrent
Yes
PTOF: Overfrequency
---
PTOV: Overvoltage
Yes
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning
Yes
PTTR: Thermal overload
Yes
PTUC: Undercurrent
---
PTUV: Undervoltage
Yes
PUPF: Underpower factor
---
PTUF: Underfrequency
---
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent
---
PVPH: Volts per Hz
---
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed
---
R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION RELATED FUNCTIONS

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
---
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue
---
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary
---
RDRS: Disturbance record handling
---
RBRF: Breaker failure

RDIR: Directional element
Yes
---
RFLO: Fault locator
Yes
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking
Yes
RREC: Autoreclosing
Yes
C-26
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.7 LOGICAL NODES

NODES
UR-FAMILY
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing
---
C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL

CALH: Alarm handling
---
CCGR: Cooling group control
---
CILO: Interlocking
---
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching
---
CSWI: Switch controller
Yes
G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES

GAPC: Generic automatic process control
---
GGIO: Generic process I/O
Yes
GSAL: Generic security application
---
I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING

IARC: Archiving
---
IHMI: Human machine interface
---
ITCI: Telecontrol interface
---
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface
---
A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL

ANCR: Neutral current regulator
---
ARCO: Reactive power control
---
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller
---
AVCO: Voltage control
---
M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT

MDIF: Differential measurements
---
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics
---
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic
---
MMTR: Metering
---
MMXN: Non phase related measurement
Yes
MMXU: Measurement
Yes
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance
---
MSTA: Metering statistics
---
S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs
---
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)
---
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)
---
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges
---
X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR

XCBR: Circuit breaker
Yes
XSWI: Circuit switch
Yes
T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

TCTR: Current transformer
---
TVTR: Voltage transformer
---
Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)
---
YLTC: Tap changer
---
YPSH: Power shunt
---
YPTR: Power transformer
---
GE Multilin
C-27
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
APPENDIX C

NODES
UR-FAMILY
Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

ZAXN: Auxiliary network
---
ZBAT: Battery
---
ZBSH: Bushing
---
ZCAB: Power cable
---
ZCAP: Capacitor bank
---
ZCON: Converter
---
ZGEN: Generator
---
ZGIL: Gas insulated line
---
ZLIN: Power overhead line
---
ZMOT: Motor
---
ZREA: Reactor
---
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component
---
ZSAR: Surge arrestor
---
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter
---
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component
---
C-28
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: 4 used in
standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1.
SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
System Definition
Controlling Station Definition (Master)
4 Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2.
3.
NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point
Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point
Multipoint Star
PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure:
Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision
Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission
One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
D-1
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5.
APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
4 Two Octets
Information Object Address:
One Octet
4 Structured
Two Octets
4 Unstructured
4 Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
4 Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: 4 used in standard direction; not used; cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
D-2
4 <1> := Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
<3> := Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
<5> := Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits
M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
<9> := Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_NE_TA_1
<11> := Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_NE_TB_1
4 <13> := Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
M_NE_TC_1
4 <15> := Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_SP_NA_1
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
4 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_SP_TB_1
<31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a
M_DP_TB_1
<32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ST_TB_1
<33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
M_BO_TB_1
<34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TD_1
<35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TE_1
<36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TF_1
4 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
M_IT_TB_1
<38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TD_1
<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TE_1
<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
4 <45> := Single command
C_SC_NA_1
<46> := Double command
C_DC_NA_1
<47> := Regulating step command
C_RC_NA_1
<48> := Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_NA_1
<49> := Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50> := Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51> := Bitstring of 32 bits
C_BO_NA_1
4 <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SC_TA_1
<59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_DC_TA_1
<60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_RC_TA_1
<61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TA_1
<62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TB_1
<63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TC_1
<64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
4 <70> := End of initialization
M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

4 <100> := Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
4 <101> := Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
4 <102> := Read command
C_RD_NA_1
4 <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard)
C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command
C_TS_NA_1
4 <105> := Reset process command
C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command
C_CD_NA_1
4 <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_TS_TA_1
GE Multilin
D-3
APPENDIX D
Parameter in control direction

<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value
PE_ME_NA_1
<111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value
PE_ME_NB_1
4 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
PE_ME_NC_1
<113> := Parameter activation
PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
<120> := File Ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121> := Section Ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
<123> := Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124> := Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125> := Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)
C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

(station-specific parameters)
In the following table:

Shaded boxes are not required.
Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
X if only used in the standard direction
D-4
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
M_ME_NA_1
FILE TRANSFER
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
DEACTIVATION
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
<3>
ACTIVATION
M_SP_TA_1
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
INITIALIZED
<1>
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
<10>
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
M_EP_TB_1
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
M_ME_TF_1
<37>
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
M_EP_TE_1
<40>
M_EP_TF_1
<45>
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
C_RC_NA_1
<48>
C_SE_NA_1
<49>
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
C_BO_NA_1
<58>
C_SC_TA_1
<59>
C_DC_TA_1
<60>
C_RC_TA_1
GE Multilin
DEACTIVATION
FILE TRANSFER
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
D
X
D-5
APPENDIX D
6.
<61>
C_SE_TA_1
<62>
C_SE_TB_1
<63>
C_SE_TC_1
DEACTIVATION
FILE TRANSFER
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
<64>
C_BO_TA_1
<70>
M_EI_NA_1*)
<100>
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
C_TS_NA_1
<105>
C_RP_NA_1
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
<107>
C_TS_TA_1
<110>
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
P_AC_NA_1
<120>
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
F_DR_TA_1*)
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
X
X
X
X
X
X
BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
4 Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
4 Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
4 Read procedure
D-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
Spontaneous Transmission:
4 Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.
Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
4 Global
4 Group 1
4 Group 5
4 Group 9
4 Group 13
4 Group 2
4 Group 6
4 Group 10
4 Group 14
4 Group 3
4 Group 7
4 Group 11
4 Group 15
4 Group 4
4 Group 8
4 Group 12
4 Group 16
Clock synchronization:
4 Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
4 Direct command transmission
Direct setpoint command transmission
4 Select and execute command
Select and execute setpoint command
4 C_SE ACTTERM used
4 No additional definition
4 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
4 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
4 Persistent output
4 Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
Transmission of integrated totals:
4 Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
4 Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
4 Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
4 Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
4 Counter read
4 Counter freeze without reset
GE Multilin
D-7
APPENDIX D
4 Counter freeze with reset

4 Counter reset
4 General request counter
4 Request counter group 1
Parameter loading:
4 Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured values
High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

Test procedure:
Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Transmission of sequences of events
Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Transparent file
Background scan:
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
SELECTED
VALUE
t0
30 s
Timeout of connection establishment
120 s
t1
15 s
Timeout of send or test APDUs
15 s
t2
10 s
Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1
10 s
t3
20 s
Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state
20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
D-8
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
12 APDUs
Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable
12 APDUs
8 APDUs
Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs
8 APDUs
SELECTED
VALUE
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
Maximum range of values k:
1 to 32767 (215 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w:
1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER
VALUE
REMARKS
Portnumber
2404
In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
4 Ethernet 802.3
Serial X.21 interface
Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
D.1.2 POINT LIST
The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP /
menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
IEC104 POINT LISTS
GE Multilin
D-9
APPENDIX D
D-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests:
Level 2
For Responses: Level 2
Master
4 Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
Binary Counters (Object 20)

Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Time and Date (Object 50)
File Transfer (Object 70)
Internal Indications (Object 80)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Received:
292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):

Transmitted: configurable up to 2048
Received:
2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
4 None
Fixed at 3
Configurable
4 None
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

4
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
GE Multilin
E-1
APPENDIX E

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
4
4
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:
Complete Appl. Fragment:
Application Confirm:
Complete Appl. Response:
4
4
None
None
None
None
Fixed at ____
Fixed at ____
Fixed at 10 s
Fixed at ____
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay:
Need Time Interval:
Select/Operate Arm Timeout:
Binary input change scanning period:
Analog input change scanning period:
Counter change scanning period:
Frozen counter event scanning period:
Unsolicited response notification delay:
Unsolicited response retry delay
No intentional delay
Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
10 s
8 times per power system cycle
500 ms
500 ms
500 ms
100 ms
configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

4
WRITE Binary Outputs

SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Queue
Clear Queue
4 Never
4 Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
4
4
4
Always
Always
Always
Always
4
4
4
4
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to Self-Reset,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. Pulse Off and Latch Off
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the Off state. Trip and Close operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the On state.
E-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
4 Default Object:
20
Default Variation: 1
4 Point-by-point list attached
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no

specific variation requested:
4 Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Counters Roll Over at:
4
4
No Counters Reported
16 Bits (Counter 8)
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

4 Yes
No
GE Multilin
E-3
APPENDIX E
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the T35 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
1
0
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
E
10
12
20
Note 1:
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
Binary Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
Binary Input with Status
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
0
1
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)

request default variation)
Binary Input Change without Time
1 (read)
Binary Input Change with Time
1 (read)
Binary Input Change with Relative Time
1 (read)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)

request default variation)
Binary Output Status
1 (read)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01(start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
echo of request
3 (select)
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
0
Binary Counter
1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
7 (freeze)
06(no range, or all)
(Variation 0 is used to request default
8 (freeze noack)
07, 08(limited quantity)
variation)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1
32-Bit Binary Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze)
17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack)
(see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5
for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
1
Control Relay Output Block
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the T35 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
E-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
20
2
16-Bit Binary Counter
contd
21
22
23
Note 1:
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Frozen Counter
variation)
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
9
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
0
Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
to request default variation)
1
32-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2
16-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
5
32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
6
16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
0
Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-5
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
23
5
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
contd
6
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
30
E
32
34
Note 1:
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
0
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
3
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
4
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
5
short floating point
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06(no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
0
Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
1
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
2
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
3
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
4
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
5
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
without Time
7
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
with Time
0
Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
variation)
17, 28 (index)
1
16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(default see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E

OBJECT
NO.
NO.
34
2
32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
contd
2 (write)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07 (limited qty=1)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read)

Deadband
50
Time and Date

(default see Note 1)
52
Time Delay Fine
60
Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data
Class 0 Data
2
3
4
Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
Class 3 Data
File event - any variation
2
3
File authentication
File command
File command status
File transfer
File transfer status
File descriptor
28 (get file info.)
5b (free format)
Internal Indications
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (read)
2 (write)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
129 (response)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
70
80
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
29 (authenticate)
25 (open)
27 (delete)
26 (close)
30 (abort)
1 (read)
2 (write)


5b (free format)
129 (response)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
5b (free format)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
00, 01 (start-stop)
(index =7)
------Note 1:
2 (write)
(see Note 3)
13 (cold restart)
00 (start-stop)
(index =7)
No Object (function code only)

see Note 3
14 (warm restart)
23 (delay meas.)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-7
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The DNP binary input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. When a
freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter
point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 500
Default Class for All Points: 1
E-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS
Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported:
3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Virtual Input 1
32
Virtual Input 33
Virtual Input 2
33
Virtual Input 34
Virtual Input 3
34
Virtual Input 35
Virtual Input 4
35
Virtual Input 36
Virtual Input 5
36
Virtual Input 37
Virtual Input 6
37
Virtual Input 38
Virtual Input 7
38
Virtual Input 39
Virtual Input 8
39
Virtual Input 40
Virtual Input 9
40
Virtual Input 41
Virtual Input 10
41
Virtual Input 42
10
Virtual Input 11
42
Virtual Input 43
11
Virtual Input 12
43
Virtual Input 44
12
Virtual Input 13
44
Virtual Input 45
13
Virtual Input 14
45
Virtual Input 46
14
Virtual Input 15
46
Virtual Input 47
15
Virtual Input 16
47
Virtual Input 48
16
Virtual Input 17
48
Virtual Input 49
17
Virtual Input 18
49
Virtual Input 50
18
Virtual Input 19
50
Virtual Input 51
19
Virtual Input 20
51
Virtual Input 52
20
Virtual Input 21
52
Virtual Input 53
21
Virtual Input 22
53
Virtual Input 54
22
Virtual Input 23
54
Virtual Input 55
23
Virtual Input 24
55
Virtual Input 56
24
Virtual Input 25
56
Virtual Input 57
25
Virtual Input 26
57
Virtual Input 58
26
Virtual Input 27
58
Virtual Input 59
27
Virtual Input 28
59
Virtual Input 60
28
Virtual Input 29
60
Virtual Input 61
29
Virtual Input 30
61
Virtual Input 62
30
Virtual Input 31
62
Virtual Input 63
31
Virtual Input 32
63
Virtual Input 64
GE Multilin
E-9
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),

10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
Table E4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Digital Counter 1
Digital Counter 2
Digital Counter 3
Digital Counter 4
Digital Counter 5
Digital Counter 6
Digital Counter 7
Digital Counter 8
Oscillography Trigger Count
Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. T35 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.
E-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The DNP analog input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT
menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit
values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 2
GE Multilin
E-11
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N
T35 REVISION
RELEASE DATE
ECO
1601-0114-B1
2.8x
12 October 2001
URT-010
1601-0114-B2
2.9x
03 December 2001
URT-012
1601-0114-B3
2.9x
11 April 2002
URT-015
URT-016
1601-0114-C1
3.0x
03 July 2002
1601-0114-C2
3.1x
30 August 2002
URT-017
1601-0114-C3
3.0x
18 November 2002
URT-019
1601-0114-C4
3.1x
18 November 2002
URT-020
1601-0114-C5
3.0x
11 February 2003
URT-023
1601-0114-C6
3.1x
11 February 2003
URT-025
1601-0114-D1
3.2x
11 February 2003
URT-027
1601-0114-D2
3.2x
02 June 2003
URX-084
1601-0114-E1
3.3x
01 May 2003
URX-080
1601-0114-E2
3.3x
29 May 2003
URX-083
1601-0114-F1
3.4x
10 December 2003
URX-111
1601-0114-F2
3.4x
09 February 2004
URX-115
1601-0114-G1
4.0x
23 March 2004
URX-123
1601-0114-G2
4.0x
17 May 2004
URX-136
1601-0114-H1
4.2x
30 June 2004
URX-145
1601-0114-H2
4.2x
23 July 2004
URX-151
1601-0114-J1
4.4x
15 September 2004
URX-156
1601-0114-K1
4.6x
15 February 2005
URX-176
1601-0114-L1
4.8x
05 August 2005
URX-202
1601-0114-M1
4.9x
15 December 2005
URX-208
1601-0114-M2
4.9x
27 February 2006
URX-214
1601-0114-N1
5.0x
31 March 2006
URX-217
1601-0114-N2
5.0x
26 May 2006
URX-220
1601-0114-P1
5.2x
23 October 2006
URX-230
1601-0114-P2
5.2x
24 January 2007
URX-232
1601-0114-R1
5.4x
26 June 2007
URX-242
1601-0114-R2
5.4x
31 August 2007
URX-246
1601-0114-R3
5.4x
17 October 2007
URX-251
1601-0114-S1
5.5x
7 December 2007
URX-253
1601-0114-S2
5.5x
22 Februrary 2008
URX-258
1601-0114-S3
5.5x
12 March 2008
URX-260
1601-0114-T1
5.6x
27 June 2008
08-0390
09-0938
1601-0114-U1
5.7x
29 May 2009
1601-0114-U2
5.7x
30 September 2009
09-1165
1601-0114-V1
5.8x
29 May 2010
09-1457
1601-0114-V2
5.8x
04 January 2011
11-2237
1601-0114-W1
5.9x
12 January 2011
11-2227
GE Multilin
F-1
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE T35 MANUAL
Table F2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION W1

PAGE
(V2)
PAGE
(W1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0081-W1
2-9
2-9
Update
Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section
---
3-42
Update
Added INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE section
4-1
4-1
Update
Updated USING SETTING FILES section
5-21
5-21
Update
Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section
5-39
5-41
Update
Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section
5-53
5-55
Update
Updated USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section
5-82
5-84
Update
Updated BREAKERS section
5-86
5-88
Update
Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-98
5-100
Update
Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table
---
5-140
Add
Added THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION section
5-144
5-150
Update
Updated REMOTE INPUTS section
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
C-3
C-3
Update
Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section
Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION V2
PAGE
(V1)
PAGE
(V2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-V2
2-
2-
Update
Updated ORDERING section
3-24
3-24
Update
Updated RS485 PORTS section
Table F4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION V1

PAGE
(U2)
PAGE
(V1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-V1
2-2
2-2
Update
2-6
2-6
Update
Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section
3-23
3-23
Update
Updated CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section
3-41
3-40
Update
Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section
4-28
4-28
Update
Updated INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY section
5-10
5-10
Update
Updated ACCESS SUPERVISION section
5-21
5-21
Update
5-110
5-111
Update
Updated PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL section
B-8
B-8
Update
C-3
C-3
Update
Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section
F-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION U2

PAGE
(U1)
PAGE
(U2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-U2
1-1
1-1
Update
Updated INSPECTION CHECKLIST section
2-16
2-16
Update
Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section
2-17
2-17
Update
Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
2-17
2-18
Update
Updated APPROVALS specifications section
4-14
4-14
Update
Updated LED INDICATORS section
5-21
5-21
Update
5-85
5-85
Update
C-7
C-7
Update
Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section
Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION U1

PAGE
(T1)
PAGE
(U1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-U1
2-12
2-12
Update
Updated INPUTS specifications section
2-16
2-16
Update
Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section
2-17
2-17
Update
Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
3-2
3-2
Update
Updated VERTICAL UNITS sub-section
3-13
3-14
Update
Updated CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section
4-1
4-1
Update
Updated USING SETTINGS FILES section
5-7
5-8
Update
Updated SECURITY section
5-20
5-21
Update
Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-36
5-38
Update
Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section
5-65
5-67
Update
Updated POWER SYSTEM section
5-79
5-81
Update
Updated BREAKERS section
5-83
5-85
Update
5-95
5-97
Update
5-108
5-110
Update
Updated PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL section
5-137
5-139
Update
Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section
---
5-151
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section
---
5-152
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section
---
6-8
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section
6-13
6-13
Update
Updated TRANSFORMER section
7-2
7-3
Update
Updated RELAY MAINTENANCE section
7-5
7-6
Update
Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERRORS section
---
8-1
Add
Added SECURITY chapter
---
A-12
Add
Added FLEXINTEGER ITEMS section
B-8
B-8
Update
B-50
B-51
Update
Updated DATA FORMATS section
GE Multilin
F-3
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION T1

PAGE
(S3)
PAGE
(T1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-T1
2-2
2-2
Update
---
3-13
Add
Added PROCESS BUS MODULES section
---
5-10
Add
Added DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS section
5-19
5-20
Update
---
5-62
Add
Added REMOTE RESOURCES section
5-92
5-95
Update
---
5-142
Add
Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
5-151
5-156
Update
Updated TEST MODE section
---
6-4
Add
Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
B-8
B-8
Update
Table F8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION S3
PAGE
(S2)
PAGE
(S3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0108-0114
2-12
2-12
Update
Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
2-14
2-14
Update
Updated INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
3-7
3-7
Update
Updated REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT section
---
3-46
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS section
5-97
---
Remove
Removed FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE section
7-4
7-5
Update
Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES section
B-8
B-8
Update
Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
Table F9: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION S2

PAGE
(S1)
PAGE
(S2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-S2
3-40
3-40
Update
Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH OVERVIEW section
3-40
3-40
Update
Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section
---
3-43
Add
Added UPLOADING T35 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE sub-section
---
3-43
Add
Added SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION sub-section
Table F10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION S1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE
(R3)
PAGE
(S1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-S1
2-2
2-2
Update
2-4
2-4
Update
Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section
2-7
2-7
Update
F-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION S1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

PAGE
(R3)
PAGE
(S1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
2-11
2-11
Update
Updated OUTPUTS specifications section
2-12
2-12
Update
3-35
3-36
Update
Updated IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE section
---
3-40
Add
Added MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES section
---
4-23
Add
Added BREAKER CONTROL section
5-7
5-7
Update
Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section (now titled SECURITY)
---
5-31
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH sub-section
5-41
5-42
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS section
---
5-76
Add
Added BREAKERS section
---
5-80
Add
Added DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-82
5-92
Update
---
6-8
Add
Added ETHERNET SWITCH section
B-8
B-8
Update
Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section for revision 5.5x
Table F11: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION R3

PAGE
(R2)
PAGE
(R3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-R3
---
4-4
Add
Added EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES section
6-20
6-20
Update
Updated MODEL INFORMATION section
Table F12: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION R2

PAGE
(R1)
PAGE
(R2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Table F13: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION R1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE
(P2)
PAGE
(R1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
2-2
2-2
Update
2-7
2-7
Update
3-1
3-1
Update
Updated PANEL CUTOUT section
3-4
3-5
Update
Updated MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION section
3-6
3-9
Update
Updated TYPICAL WIRING section
4-4
4-4
Update
Updated FACEPLATE section
4-5
4-5
Update
Updated LED INDICATORS section
4-7
4-8
Update
Updated CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS section
4-12
4-20
Update
Updated ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS section
5-7
5-7
Update
Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section
5-33
5-34
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS section
GE Multilin
F-5
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F13: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION R1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

PAGE
(P2)
PAGE
(R1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
5-37
5-38
Update
Updated CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS section
5-38
5-39
Update
5-44
5-46
Update
Updated DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section
5-76
5-79
Update
---
5-121
Add
Added TRIP BUS section
7-3
7-3
Update
Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section
B-7
B-7
Update
Updated MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION section
B-8
B-8
Update
---
C-2
Add
Added GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES section
C-7
C-7
Update
Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section
Table F14: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION P2
PAGE
(P1)
PAGE
(P2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-P2
2-2
2-2
Update
2-7
2-7
Update
3-20
3-20
Update
Updated CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING diagram to 842765A2
5-95
5-95
Update
Updated PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 828001A6
6-16
6-16
Update
Updated TRACKING FREQUENCY section
---
6-17
Add
Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES section
7-4
7-4
Update
Updated SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES table
A-1
A-1
Update
Updated FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS table
Table F15: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION P1

PAGE
(N2)
PAGE
(P1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-P1
2-2
2-2
Update
3-30
3-30
Update
Updated TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

drawing to 831022A3
5-13
5-13
Update
Updated DNP PROTOCOL sub-section
5-17
5-17
Update
5-74
5-76
Update
B-8
B-8
Update
C-1
C-1
Update
Updated Appendix C: IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS
E-1
E-1
Update
Updated DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE section
E-4
E-4
Update
Updated DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE section
E-8
E-8
Update
Updated BINARY INPUT POINTS section
E-10
E-10
Update
Updated COUNTERS section
F-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F16: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION N2

PAGE
(N1)
PAGE
(N2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-N2
1-7
---
Remove
Removed CONNECTING THE ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE WITH THE T35 section
---
1-7
Add
Added CONFIGURING THE T35 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS section
---
1-9
Add
Added USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE section
---
1-15
Add
Added CONNECTING TO THE T35 RELAY section
2-2
2-2
Update
2-8
2-8
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS specifications section
3-10
3-10
Update
Updated CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
3-18
3-19
Update
Updated CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section
5-36
5-36
Update
5-53
5-54
Update
Updated GENERAL TRANSFORMER SETTINGS sub-section
5-72
5-74
Update
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for revision 5.0x
C-1
C-1
Update
Updated the IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS appendix
Table F17: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION N1

PAGE
(M2)
PAGE
(N1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-N1
5-17
5-17
Update
5-23
5-26
Update
Updated REAL TIME CLOCK section
5-33
5-36
Update
5-114
5-118
Update
Updated REMOTE DEVICES section
5-115
5-119
Update
B-8
B-8
Update
Table F18: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION M2

PAGE
(M1)
PAGE
(M2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-M2
3-28
3-28
Update
Updated RS422 INTERFACE section
4-13
4-13
Update
Updated INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY sub-section
5-7
5-7
Update
Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section
5-84
5-84
Update
Updated PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL sub-section
Table F19: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION M1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE
(L1)
PAGE
(M1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-M1
2-2
2-2
Update
GE Multilin
F-7
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F19: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION M1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

PAGE
(L1)
PAGE
(M1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
3-1
3-1
Update
Updated PANEL CUTOUT section
4-4
4-4
Update
Updated FACEPLATE section
5-16
5-17
Update
B-8
B-8
Update
Table F20: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION L1
PAGE
(K1)
PAGE
(L1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-L1
2-3
2-3
Update
Updated T35 ORDER CODES table
2-4
2-4
Update
Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table
2-8
2-8
Update
Updated INPUTS specifications section
2-10
2-10
Update
3-6
3-5
Update
Updated CONTROL POWER section
3-8
3-8
Update
Updated CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
3-16
3-16
Update
Updated CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS section
3-17
3-18
Update
Updated RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION diagram
3-22
3-23
Update
Updated G.703 INTERFACE section
3-27
3-28
Update
Updated RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION drawing
---
3-31
Add
Added C37.94SM INTERFACE section
---
4-12
Add
Added INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY section
5-13
5-13
Update
---
5-15
Add
Added DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS sub-section
5-15
5-16
Update
5-18
5-19
Update
Updated IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-24
5-26
Update
Updated DATA LOGGER section
---
5-42
Add
Added TELEPROTECTION section
5-64
5-68
Update
5-93
5-97
Update
Updated SETTING GROUPS section
5-94
5-98
Update
Updated SELECTOR SWITCH section
5-110
5-115
Update
5-112
5-117
Update
Updated DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
---
5-121
Add
Added TELEPROTECTION INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
---
6-4
Add
Added TELEPROTECTION INPUTS section
---
6-8
Add
Added TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS section
6-11
---
Remove
Removed THERMAL ELEMENTS sub-section
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for release 4.8x
D-9
D-9
Update
Updated IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST sub-section
E-8
E-8
Update
Updated BINARY INPUT POINTS section
E-13
E-9
Update
Updated BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT POINTS section
E-15
E-11
Update
Updated ANALOG INPUTS section
F-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F21: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION K1

PAGE
(J1)
PAGE
(K1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-K1
2-3
2-3
Update
Updated T35 ORDER CODES table
3-4
3-4
Update
Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 828747A3
3-17
3-17
Update
Updated RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION diagram to 827757A7
5-8
5-8
Update
Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section
5-13
5-13
Update
5-15
5-15
Update
5-105
5-106
Update
The LATCHING OUTPUTS section is now a sub-section of the CONTACT OUTPUTS
5-108
5-109
Update
Updated REMOTE DEVICES section
5-110
5-111
Update
Updated REMOTE OUTPUTS section
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware revision 4.6x
---
C-1
Add
Added IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS appendix
D-4
E-4
Update
Updated DNP IMPLEMENTATION section
Table F22: MAJOR UPDATES FOR T35 MANUAL REVISION J1

PAGE
(H2)
PAGE
(J1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0114-J1
5-15
---
Remove
Removed UCA/MMS PROTOCOL sub-section
---
5-15
Add
Added IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-44
5-43
Update
Updated TRANSFORMER section
5-103
5-103
Update
Updated VIRTUAL INPUTS section
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware revision 4.4x
C-1
---
Remove
Removed UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONS appendix
GE Multilin
F-9
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
APPENDIX F
F.2ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere
AC .................. Alternating Current
A/D ................. Analog to Digital
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity
AMP ............... Ampere
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM ............. Asymmetry
AUTO ............. Automatic
AUX................ Auxiliary
AVG ................ Average
BER................ Bit Error Rate
BF................... Breaker Fail
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate
BKR................ Breaker
BLK ................ Block
BLKG.............. Blocking
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker
CAP................ Capacitor
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
CFG................ Configure / Configurable
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK................ Check
CHNL ............. Channel
CLS ................ Close
CLSD.............. Closed
CMND ............ Command
CMPRSN........ Comparison
CO.................. Contact Output
COM............... Communication
COMM............ Communications
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison
CONN............. Connection
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact
CO-ORD......... Coordination
CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRT, CRNT .... Current
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association
CT .................. Current Transformer
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current
DD .................. Disturbance Detector
DFLT .............. Default
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input
DIFF ............... Differential
DIR ................. Directional
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy
DIST ............... Distance
DMD ............... Demand
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor
dt .................... Rate of Change
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files
EXT ................ Extension, External
F ..................... Field
FAIL................ Failure
FD .................. Fault Detector
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set
FLA................. Full Load Current
FO .................. Fiber Optic
F-10
FREQ ............. Frequency

FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
FxE ................ FlexElement
FWD............... Forward
G .................... Generator
GE.................. General Electric
GND............... Ground
GNTR............. Generator
GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS ............... Global Positioning System
HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
HCT ............... High Current Time
HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HYB ............... Hybrid
I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
IA ................... Phase A current
IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
IB ................... Phase B current
IBC................. Phase B minus C current
IC ................... Phase C current
ICA................. Phase C minus A current
ID ................... Identification
IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
Igd.................. Differential Ground current
IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
INIT ................ Initiate
INST............... Instantaneous
INV................. Inverse
I/O .................. Input/Output
IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
kA................... kiloAmpere
kV................... kiloVolt
LED................ Light Emitting Diode
LEO................ Line End Open
LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
LOOP............. Loopback
LPU................ Line Pickup
LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
M.................... Machine
mA ................. MilliAmpere
MAG............... Magnitude
MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
MMI................ Man Machine Interface
MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
MSG............... Message
MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
MTR ............... Motor
MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase)

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C)
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A)
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B)
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C)
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour
N..................... Neutral
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable
NEG ............... Negative
NMPLT ........... Nameplate
NOM............... Nominal
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol
NTR................ Neutral
O .................... Over
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent
O/P, Op........... Output
OP .................. Operate
OPER ............. Operate
OPERATG...... Operating
O/S ................. Operating System
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking
OUT................ Output
OV .................. Overvoltage
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency
OVLD ............. Overload
P..................... Phase
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
PCNT ............. Percent
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B)
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop
PHS................ Phase
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance
Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
POS................ Positive
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS ........... Pressure
PRI ................. Primary
PROT ............. Protection
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector
pu ................... Per Unit
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated
PWR............... Power
QUAD............. Quadrilateral
R..................... Rate, Reverse
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle
REF ................ Reference
REM ............... Remote
REV................ Reverse
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector
RST ................ Reset
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver
s ..................... second
S..................... Sensitive
GE Multilin
SAT .................CT Saturation

SBO ................Select Before Operate
SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEC ................Secondary
SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection
SENS ..............Sensitive
SEQ ................Sequence
SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio
SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC ................Source
SSB.................Single Side Band
SSEL...............Session Selector
STATS.............Statistics
SUPN..............Supervision
SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision
SV ...................Supervision, Service
SYNC..............Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck
T......................Time, transformer
TC ...................Thermal Capacity
TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol
TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used
TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier
TEMP..............Temperature
TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol
THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion
TMR ................Timer
TOC ................Time Overcurrent
TOV ................Time Overvoltage
TRANS............Transient
TRANSF .........Transfer
TSEL...............Transport Selector
TUC ................Time Undercurrent
TUV.................Time Undervoltage
TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter
U .....................Under
UC...................Undercurrent
UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture
UDP ................User Datagram Protocol
UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories
UNBAL............Unbalance
UR...................Universal Relay
URC ................Universal Recloser Control
.URS ...............Filename extension for settings files
UV...................Undervoltage
V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz

V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage
V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage
V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage
VA ...................Phase A voltage
VAB.................Phase A to B voltage
VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage
VARH ..............Var-hour voltage
VB ...................Phase B voltage
VBA.................Phase B to A voltage
VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage
VC...................Phase C voltage
VCA ................Phase C to A voltage
VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage
VF ...................Variable Frequency
VIBR ...............Vibration
VT ...................Voltage Transformer
VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
WDG ...............Winding
WH..................Watt-hour
w/ opt ..............With Option
WRT................With Respect To
X .....................Reactance
XDUCER.........Transducer
XFMR..............Transformer
Z......................Impedance, Zone
F-11
F.3 WARRANTY
APPENDIX F
F.3WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay
providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation
charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard
Conditions of Sale.
F-12
GE Multilin
Index
INDEX
Numerics
10BASE-F
communications options ................................................. 3-23
description .................................................................... 3-26
interface ........................................................................ 3-36
redundant option ........................................................... 3-23
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................. F-10
AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-12, 3-12, 5-68
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-12, 3-13
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-17, 4-28
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-112
ACTUAL VALUES
maintenance ................................................................. 6-20
metering ........................................................................ 6-10
product information ........................................................ 6-21
status .............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-46
APPARENT POWER ................................................2-11, 6-16
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-144
windings between two breakers ...................................... 5-82
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-18
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-98
ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-137
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-13
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-16
B
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-68, 5-69
BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-6
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. E-9
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-4
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
actual values ................................................................. 6-20
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-100
logic ............................................................................ 5-139
measurement .............................................................. 5-138
Modbus registers .................................................. B-12, B-26
settings ....................................................................... 5-137
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
BREAKER CONTROL
control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-25
description .................................................................... 4-24
dual breaker logic ..................................................5-86, 5-87
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-21
settings ......................................................................... 5-84
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ..................................... 5-6
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-12
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ............................ 3-37, 3-38, 3-40
C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-39
GE Multilin
CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-18

CHANGES TO MANUAL ................. F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9
CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-30
CHANNEL TESTS .............................................................. 6-9
CHANNELS
banks ................................................................... 5-68, 5-69
CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-18
CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-14, 7-2
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-44
settings ......................................................................... 5-14
CLOCK
setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-39
COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
COMMUNICATIONS
10BASE-F ................................................... 3-23, 3-26, 5-16
channel ......................................................................... 3-30
connecting to the UR ............................................... 1-8, 1-15
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
dnp .........................................................................5-17, E-1
EGD .............................................................................. 5-36
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-32
half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
HTTP ............................................................................. 5-34
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-35
IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-149
inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-16
Modbus .................................................. 5-16, 5-38, B-1, B-3
network ......................................................................... 5-16
overview ........................................................................ 1-16
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-23
RS485 ......................................................... 3-23, 3-25, 5-15
settings ............................. 5-16, 5-17, 5-22, 5-35, 5-36, 5-38
specifications ........................................................ 2-14, 2-16
UCA/MMS .................................................................... 5-151
web server ..................................................................... 5-34
COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-17
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
CONTACT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
dry connections ............................................................. 3-20
FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-102
Modbus registers ............................... B-10, B-14, B-37, B-39
settings ....................................................................... 5-143
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
thresholds ................................................................... 5-143
wet connections ............................................................. 3-20
CONTACT OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
Modbus registers ........................................ B-10, B-14, B-43
settings ....................................................................... 5-146
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-126
CONTROL POWER
description ..................................................................... 3-12
specifications ................................................................. 2-14
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
settings ......................................................................... 5-48
specifications ................................................................. 2-10
COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
settings ....................................................................... 5-135
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-63
INDEX
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-13, 3-11
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-18
CT BANKS
settings ......................................................................... 5-68
CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-68
CT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-13
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-68
CURRENT METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10
specifications ................................................................. 2-11
CURVES
definite time................................................................. 5-122
FlexCurves ...................................................... 5-91, 5-122
I2T .............................................................................. 5-122
IAC ............................................................................. 5-121
IEC ............................................................................. 5-120
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-119
types ........................................................................... 5-118
D
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-51
DATA LOGGER
clearing ........................................................................... 7-2
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ..................................................B-10, B-18
settings ......................................................................... 5-43
specifications ................................................................. 2-11
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6
DATE ................................................................................. 7-2
DCMA INPUTS ................................................................. 6-18
settings ....................................................................... 5-160
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
DCMA OUTPUTS
description..................................................................... 3-22
settings ....................................................................... 5-163
specifications ................................................................. 2-14
DEFINITE TIME CURVE ................................................. 5-122
DESIGN ............................................................................. 1-3
DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-149
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ......................................... E-1
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................. 3-11
DIFFERENTIAL
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
instantaneous .............................................................. 5-117
percent ........................................................................ 5-113
transformer ............................. 5-73, 5-75, 5-82, 5-112, 5-113
DIGITAL COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
logic ............................................................................ 5-136
Modbus registers ................................................... B-9, B-33
settings ....................................................................... 5-135
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIMENSIONS .............................................................. 3-1, 3-2
DIRECT DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
settings ....................................................................... 5-153
DIRECT I/O
see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
ii
application example ........................................... 5-154, 5-155

configuration examples ........................ 5-57, 5-60, 5-63, 5-64
settings ..............................................5-57, 5-63, 5-64, 5-153
DIRECT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
Modbus registers .............. B-10, B-16, B-30, B-44, B-45, B-46
settings ........................................................................ 5-153
specifications .................................................................2-12
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
error messages ............................................................... 7-6
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Modbus registers ....................... B-10, B-30, B-44, B-45, B-46
settings ........................................................................ 5-153
DISCONNECT SWITCH
logic ..............................................................................5-90
settings ..........................................................................5-88
DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-16, 4-24, 5-12
DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
internal ..........................................................................5-71
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-151
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
binary counters ............................................................. E-10
binary input points ........................................................... E-8
binary output points ......................................................... E-9
control relay output blocks ............................................... E-9
device profile document ................................................... E-1
frozen counters ............................................................. E-10
implementation table ....................................................... E-4
settings ..........................................................................5-17
DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
E
EGD PROTOCOL
actual values ................................................................... 6-8
settings ..........................................................................5-36
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................2-17
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-4
ENERVISTA UR SETUP
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2
overview ......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
EQUATIONS
definite time curve ........................................................ 5-122
FlexCurve ................................................................. 5-122
It curves ..................................................................... 5-122
IAC curves ...................................................................5-121
IEC curves ...................................................................5-120
IEEE curves ................................................................. 5-119
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ...................................... 7-5
ETHERNET
GE Multilin
INDEX
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
configuration ................................................................... 1-8
error messages ............................................................... 7-7
quick connect ................................................................ 1-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
ETHERNET SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-9
configuration .........................................................3-46, 3-47
hardware ....................................................................... 3-41
overview ....................................................................... 3-41
saving setting files ......................................................... 3-47
settings ......................................................................... 5-38
uploading setting files .................................................... 3-48
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ...................................4-16, 4-17
EVENT RECORDER
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
specifications ................................................................ 2-11
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-5
F
F485 ............................................................................... 1-16
FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2
FACEPLATE PANELS ..............................................4-14, 4-24
FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-13
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-17
FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1
FIRMWARE REVISION .................................................... 6-21
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLASH MESSAGES ......................................................... 5-12
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-54
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
FLEXCURVES
equation ...................................................................... 5-122
settings ......................................................................... 5-91
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
table ............................................................................. 5-91
FLEXELEMENTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
direction ...................................................................... 5-109
hysteresis ................................................................... 5-109
pickup ......................................................................... 5-109
scheme logic ............................................................... 5-108
settings .................................................. 5-107, 5-108, 5-110
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
FLEXLOGIC
locking to a serial number ......................................4-10, 8-11
FLEXLOGIC
editing with EnerVista UR Setup....................................... 4-2
equation editor ............................................................ 5-106
error messages ............................................................... 7-5
evaluation ................................................................... 5-106
GE Multilin
example ........................................................................ 5-98

example equation ......................................................... 5-128
gate characteristics ...................................................... 5-105
locking equation entries .......................................... 4-9, 8-10
operands ............................................................ 5-99, 5-100
operators ..................................................................... 5-105
rules ............................................................................ 5-105
security .................................................................. 4-9, 8-10
specifications ................................................................. 2-10
timers .......................................................................... 5-106
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ................................ 5-106
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
settings ....................................................................... 5-106
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-167
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-168
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-19
FORM-A RELAY
high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-15
outputs ........................................................ 3-14, 3-15, 3-20
specifications ................................................................. 2-13
FORM-C RELAY
outputs ................................................................. 3-14, 3-20
specifications ................................................................. 2-13
FREQUENCY METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
settings ......................................................................... 5-70
specifications ................................................................. 2-11
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-70, 6-17
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-70
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4
FUSE ............................................................................... 2-13
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-31, 3-32, 3-33, 3-36
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-121
GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-15
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-125
settings ....................................................................... 5-125
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................. 5-112
GSSE ................................................ 5-150, 5-151, 5-152, 6-5
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
HTTP PROTOCOL ............................................................ 5-34
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-122
IAC CURVES ................................................................. 5-121
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
interoperability document ................................................ D-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-35
iii
INDEX
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
settings ....................................................................... 5-158
IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
settings ....................................................................... 5-159
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
device ID ..................................................................... 5-150
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-152
error messages ................................................................ 7-7
Modbus registers ............. B-33, B-34, B-35, B-36, B-37, B-49
remote device settings ................................................. 5-149
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-150
settings ......................................................................... 5-21
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-152
IEC CURVES ................................................................. 5-120
IED .................................................................................... 1-2
IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5
IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ...................3-37, 3-38, 3-40
IEEE CURVES ............................................................... 5-119
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4
IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-17, 7-4
INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-5
INPUTS
AC current ............................................................ 2-12, 5-68
AC voltage ........................................................... 2-12, 5-69
contact inputs ........................................... 2-12, 5-143, 5-167
dcmA inputs ......................................................... 2-12, 3-22
direct inputs ................................................................... 2-12
IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-12, 3-27
remote inputs ................................ 2-12, 5-149, 5-150, 5-151
RTD inputs ........................................................... 2-12, 3-22
virtual .......................................................................... 5-145
INSPECTION CHECKLIST .................................................. 1-1
INSTALLATION
communications ............................................................. 3-24
CT inputs .............................................................. 3-12, 3-13
RS485 ........................................................................... 3-25
settings ......................................................................... 5-65
INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
logic ............................................................................ 5-117
settings ....................................................................... 5-117
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-16
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-16
IRIG-B
connection ..................................................................... 3-27
error messages ................................................................ 7-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-39
specifications........................................................ 2-12, 2-14
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-18
K
KEYPAD ................................................................. 1-17, 4-24
L
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3
LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 5-12
LASER MODULE .............................................................. 3-30
LATCHING OUTPUTS
iv

error messages ............................................................... 7-7
settings ........................................................................ 5-146
specifications .................................................................2-13
LED INDICATORS ......................... 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 4-23, 5-46
LED TEST
FlexLogic operand ..................................................... 5-103
settings ..........................................................................5-44
specifications .................................................................2-10
LINK POWER BUDGET .....................................................2-16
LOGIC GATES ............................................................... 5-105
LOST PASSWORD ...................................... 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3
MANUFACTURING DATE .................................................6-21
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-51
MENU HEIRARCHY ................................................. 1-17, 4-26
MENU NAVIGATION ....................................... 1-17, 4-25, 4-26
METERING
conventions .......................................................... 6-10, 6-11
current ...........................................................................2-11
frequency .......................................................................2-11
power ............................................................................2-11
voltage...........................................................................2-11
METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................6-11
MODBUS
data logger .............................................................. B-6, B-7
event recorder ................................................................. B-7
exception responses ........................................................ B-5
execute operation ............................................................ B-4
flex state parameters ......................................................5-55
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
function code 05h ............................................................ B-4
function code 06h ............................................................ B-4
function code 10h ............................................................ B-5
introduction ..................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats ............................................. B-51
obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
oscillography ................................................................... B-6
passwords ...................................................................... B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
settings ................................................................. 5-16, 5-38
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
store single setting .......................................................... B-4
supported function codes ................................................. B-3
user map .................................................... 5-38, B-10, B-22
MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-21
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER .........................................6-21
MODULE FAILURE ERROR ............................................... 7-5
MODULES
communications .............................................................3-24
CT .................................................................................3-13
CT/VT .....................................................................3-12, 5-6
direct inputs/outputs .......................................................3-30
insertion ................................................................... 3-6, 3-7
order codes ..................................................................... 2-6
power supply ..................................................................3-11
transducer I/O ................................................................3-22
VT .................................................................................3-13
withdrawal ............................................................... 3-6, 3-7
MONITORING ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-137
MOUNTING ................................................................ 3-1, 3-2
GE Multilin
INDEX
N
NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1
NEUTRAL TOC
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
settings ....................................................................... 5-111
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
NSAP ADDRESS ............................................................. 5-16
O
ONE SHOTS .................................................................. 5-105
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-16
OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-9
ORDER CODES ............................. 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 6-21, 7-3
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3
ORDERING ............................................ 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-17
OSCILLOGRAPHY
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-41
specifications ................................................................ 2-11
via COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
OSI NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................... 5-16
OUTPUTS
contact outputs ............................................................ 5-146
control power ................................................................ 2-14
critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-13
Fast Form-C relay ......................................................... 2-13
Form-A relay ....................................... 2-13, 3-14, 3-15, 3-20
Form-C relay ................................................ 2-13, 3-14, 3-20
IRIG-B .......................................................................... 2-14
latching outputs ................................................... 2-13, 5-146
remote outputs .................................................. 5-151, 5-152
virtual outputs ............................................................. 5-148
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-118
OVERCURRENT CURVES
definite time ................................................................ 5-122
FlexCurves .............................................................. 5-122
I2T .............................................................................. 5-122
IAC ............................................................................. 5-121
IEC ............................................................................. 5-120
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-119
P
PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2
PARITY ........................................................................... 5-15
PASSWORD SECURITY ...................................... 5-9, 8-2, 8-3
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-103
PASSWORDS
changing ....................................................................... 4-29
for settings templates ............................................... 4-6, 8-7
lost password ................................... 4-29, 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
overview ....................................................................... 1-18
GE Multilin
security .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1

settings .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1
PC SOFTWARE
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
calculations ................................................................. 5-113
characteristic ............................................................... 5-114
logic ............................................................................ 5-116
settings ............................................................ 5-113, 5-114
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4
PHASE ANGLE METERING .............................................. 6-11
PHASE COMPENSATION ................................................. 5-80
PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-14
PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-70
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE TOC
PHASE TOC
logic ............................................................................ 5-124
settings ....................................................................... 5-123
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................. 1-1
POWER METERING
specifications ................................................................. 2-11
values ........................................................................... 6-16
POWER SUPPLY
description ..................................................................... 3-11
low range ...................................................................... 2-13
specifications ................................................................. 2-13
POWER SYSTEM
PREFERENCES
PROCESS BUS
overview ........................................................................ 3-14
PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................6-21, B-8
PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-8, 8-2
PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-17
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
R
REACTIVE POWER ................................................. 2-11, 6-16
REAL POWER ......................................................... 2-11, 6-16
REAL TIME CLOCK
settings ......................................................................... 5-39
REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-8
RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-94, 5-122
REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-23
RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-28
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-98
RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-3
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-66
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-17
REMOTE DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
device ID ..................................................................... 5-150
INDEX
error messages ................................................................ 7-8
Modbus registers ............................... B-10, B-14, B-46, B-50
settings ....................................................................... 5-149
statistics .......................................................................... 6-5
REMOTE DPS INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-151
REMOTE INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
Modbus registers .........................................B-10, B-14, B-47
settings ....................................................................... 5-150
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-151
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-152
REPLACEMENT MODULES .................................. 2-6, 2-7, 2-8
RESETTING .........................................................5-104, 5-152
REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1
RF IMMUNITY .................................................................. 2-17
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-17
RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-11
RMS VOLTAGE ................................................................ 2-11
RS232
configuration ................................................................... 1-9
specifications ................................................................. 2-14
wiring ............................................................................ 3-23
RS422
configuration ................................................................. 3-34
timing ............................................................................ 3-35
two-channel application .................................................. 3-34
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-36
RS485
communications ............................................................. 3-23
configuration ................................................................... 1-7
description..................................................................... 3-25
specifications ................................................................. 2-14
RTD INPUTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-18
settings ....................................................................... 5-161
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
S
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4
SELECTOR SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
application example ..................................................... 5-133
logic ............................................................................ 5-134
settings ....................................................................... 5-129
specifications ................................................................. 2-10
timing ................................................................5-132, 5-133
SELF-TESTS
description....................................................................... 7-4
error messages ................................................................ 7-6
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8
SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................ 6-21
SERIAL PORTS
vi
settings ..........................................................................5-15
SETTING GROUPS ......................... 5-101, 5-112, 5-128, B-25
SETTINGS TEMPLATES
description ............................................................... 4-5, 8-6
editing ..................................................................... 4-5, 8-6
enabling ................................................................... 4-5, 8-6
password protection ................................................. 4-6, 8-7
removing .................................................................. 4-8, 8-9
viewing .................................................................... 4-7, 8-8
SETTINGS, CHANGING ....................................................4-27
SIGNAL SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
metering ........................................................................6-14
settings ..........................................................................5-71
SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ............................................. 2-1, 2-2
SITE LIST, CREATING ...................................................... 4-1
SNTP PROTOCOL
error messages ............................................................... 7-7
settings ..........................................................................5-36
SOFTWARE
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4
SOFTWARE, PC
see entry for EnerVista UR Setup
SOURCE FREQUENCY ....................................................6-17
SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
example use of ...............................................................5-72
metering ........................................................................6-14
settings ..........................................................................5-71
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-9
ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-26
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................... F-10
STATUS INDICATORS ............................................. 4-15, 4-17
STORAGE TEMPERATURE ..............................................2-16
SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT
SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-17
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING .....................6-11
SYNCHROCHECK
actual values ...........................................................6-8, 6-18
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-70
SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-68
T
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-4
TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-5
TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-4
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-34
TELEPROTECTION
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
logic ............................................................................ 5-158
overview ...................................................................... 5-156
settings .................................................... 5-65, 5-156, 5-157
specifications .................................................................2-12
TEMPERATURE MONITOR ...................................... 5-104, 7-8
TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-8
GE Multilin
INDEX
TESTING
force contact inputs ..................................................... 5-167
force contact outputs ................................................... 5-168
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3
self-test error messages .................................................. 7-4
THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
settings ....................................................................... 5-140
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
TIME OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-106
TOC
ground ........................................................................ 5-125
phase .......................................................................... 5-123
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
TRACEABILITY
data .................................................... 4-12, 4-13, 8-13, 8-14
overview ...............................................................4-11, 8-12
rules .....................................................................4-13, 8-14
TRACKING FREQUENCY ........................................ 6-17, B-28
TRANSDUCER I/O
actual values ................................................................. 6-18
settings ............................................................. 5-160, 5-161
specifications ................................................................ 2-12
wiring ............................................................................ 3-22
TRANSFORMER
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
metering ........................................................................ 6-13
phase relationships ....................................................... 5-76
phasors ......................................................................... 5-77
settings .................................................................5-73, 5-75
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL ......... 5-73, 5-75, 5-82, 5-112
TRIP BUS
settings ....................................................................... 5-126
TRIP LEDs ...................................................................... 5-46
TROUBLE INDICATOR ............................................. 1-17, 7-4
U
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-18
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
commands .................................................................... 5-14
resetting .......................................................................... 7-2
UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR ...................................... 7-8
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ....................................... 5-66, 7-5
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-64
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3
URPC
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
example ........................................................................ 5-57
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-55
settings .................................................................5-55, 5-57
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
GE Multilin
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2

settings ......................................................................... 5-40
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
custom labeling .............................................................. 4-23
defaults ......................................................................... 4-17
description ............................................................ 4-16, 4-17
settings ......................................................................... 5-46
specifications ................................................................. 2-10
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Modbus registers ................................................. B-22, B-28
settings ......................................................................... 5-49
specifications ................................................................. 2-10
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-47
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-152
V
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-17
VIRTUAL INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
commands ....................................................................... 7-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-145
Modbus registers ................................................... B-8, B-39
settings ....................................................................... 5-145
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
settings ....................................................................... 5-148
VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-69
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-17
VOLTAGE METERING
specifications ................................................................. 2-11
values ........................................................................... 6-15
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-123
VT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-69
VT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-13
VTFF
see VT FUSE FAILURE
W
WARRANTY .....................................................................F-12
WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-34
WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
WINDING
application example ....................................................... 5-82
WINDINGS
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ................................ 3-13
ZERO-SEQUENCE COMPENSATION ...................... 5-80, 5-81
vii
INDEX
viii
GE Multilin

t35 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

t35 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

t35 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

T35 Transformer Protection System

Canada L6E 1B3

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario

GE Multilin's Quality Management

RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)

RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)

RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)

RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and 10/100Base-T

RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch

Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT

Sensitive ground 8CT

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1

INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5

MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16

1.5 USING THE RELAY

FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17

PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-9

PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1

TYPICAL WIRING............................................................................................ 3-10

T35 Transformer Protection System

TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-22

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-5

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

T35 Transformer Protection System

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49

5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-67

5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-68

INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ............................................................... 5-98

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-143

5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-160

TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-166

T35 Transformer Protection System

ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1